Digital PDFs

AA-0944E-TB

January 1977

362 pages

Original

117MB

view download

OCR Version

49MB

view download

Document:	DECsystem10 FORTRAN Programmer's Reference Manual
Order Number:	AA-0944E-TB
Revision:	0
Pages:	362
Original Filename:

OCR Text

gecsUscenio

FORTRAN
PROGRAMMERS
REFERENCE MANUAL

dlilgliltiall

January 1977

This document describes the language elements of the

FORTRAN-10 compiler for the DECsystem-10.

aecsyscenito
FORTRAN PROGRAMMER'S|
REFERENCE MANUAL
Order No. AA-0944E-TB

SUPERSESSION/UPDATE INFORMATION:

This document supersedes the document of the
same name, Order No. DEC-10-LFORA-D-D,
published June 1975.

OPERATING SYSTEM AND VERSION:

Any Digital-supported operating system for the

DECsystem-10.

SOFTWARE VERSION:

FORTRAN-10, Version 5

To order additional ccpies of this document, contact the Software Distribution
Center, Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts 01754,

digital equipment corporation - maynard, massachusetts

First

Printing,

Revised:

June

1973

January

1974

October

1974

May

1975

June

1975

November

1975

January

1977

The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment
Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility
Corporation.
for any errors that may appear in this document.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such
license.

Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for the use
or reliability of its software on equipment that is not supplied by
DIGITAL.

(C)

1973, 1974, 1975, 1977 by Digital Equipment Corporation

The postage prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future documentation.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

DIGITAL

DECsystem-10

MASSBUS

DEC

DECtape

OMNIBUS

PDP

DIBOL

0S/8

DECUS

EDUSYSTEM

UNIBUS

FLIP

COMPUTER LABS

FOCAL

RSX

COMTEX
DDT
DECCOMM

INDAC
LAB-8
DECsystem-20

TYPESET-8
TYPESET-10
TYPESET-11

CHIP

PHA
RSTS

PREFACE

This manual has two parts:

with

SOS,

and

PART

II1,

PART I,

FORTRAN-10

Introduction to

LanguagJe

Using

Manual.

FORTRAN-10

System.
Operating
DECsystem-10
Part I is a short guide to using the
It describes the minimum set of commands necessary to input, edit, and

execute

FORTRAN

programs.

assumes

that

the

reader

implementing

FORTRAN on the DECsystem-10.

has

rudimentary knowledge of or is presently learning FORTRAN programming.
It

is a guide

The complete

DECsystem—-10

The SOS

set

Operating

text editor

Operating

Systems

System

Commands

commands

is described completely

Manual

in the

1is

given

1in

the

(DEC-10-OSCMA-A-D).

SOS

User's

Guide

(DEC-10-0US0OSA-A-D)
.

Part
II
describes
the
FORTRAN
language
as
1implemented
for
the
FORTRAN-10
Language
Processing
3System
(referred to as FORTRAN-10).
The language manual (PART II) is intended for reference purposes only.
The
reader
1is
expected
to
have some experience in writing FORTRAN

programs and to be familiar with the standard FORTRAN language set and
terminology
as
defined
1in
the
American National Standard FORTRAN,
X3.9-19566.
Descriptions of FORTRAN-10 extensions and additions to the
standard FORTRAN language set are printed with gray shading.

Operating procedures and descriptions of the DECsystem-10
environment are included in the appendixes.
'

iii

programming

MASTER

TABLE

CONTENTS

Page

CHAPTER

PART

1II

FORTRAN-10
SOME

INPUT

HELPFUL

SAYING

AND

INTRO

OUTPUT

DATA

GOODBYE

THE

INTRO

COMPUTER

INTRO

EXAMPLES

FORTRAN-10

LANGUAGE

CHAPTER

INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER

CHARACTERS

CHAPTER

DATA TYPES,

AND

VARIABLES,

AND

EXPRESSIONS

CHAPTER

COMPILATION

CHAPTER

SPECIFICATION

CHAPTER

DATA

CHAPTER

ASSIGNMENT

CHAPTER

CONTROL

MANUAL

LINES

CONSTANTS,

CHAPTER

SYMBOLIC

ARRAYS

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

STATEMENT
STATEMENTS

STATEMENTS

CHAPTER

I1/0

CHAPTER

NAMELIST

CHAPTER

FILE

INTRO
INTRO

COMMAWDS

STATEMENTS
STATEMENTS

CHAPTER

FORMAT

STATEMENT

CHAPTER

DEVICE

CONTROL

CHAPTER

SUBPROGRAM

CHAPTER

BLOCK

APPENDIX

ASCII-1968

DATA

APPENDIX

USING

APPENDIX

WRITING

APPENDIX

FOROTS

THE

STATEMENTS

STATEMENTS
SUBPROGRAMS

CHARACTER

CODE

SET

COMPILER

USER

APPENDIX

FORDDT

APPENDIX

COMPILER

APPENDIX

FORTRAN-10

APPENDIX

FOROTS

NAMES,

11-1

STATEMENTS

CONTROL

INTRO

PROGRAM

YOUR

CHANGING

INTRO

PROGRAM

ULWD

YOUR

PROGRAM

RUNNING

YOUR

CHAPTER

INTRO

1IN
IN

—

CHAPTER

SOS

QO ~JO

CHAPTER

WITH

N =
|
P

CHAPTER

FORTRAN-10

1o
HFRHHHRPRR

CHAPTER

LOGGING
TYPING

USING

OWJO
U
W

CHAPTER

PROGRAMS

MESSAGES

REALTIME

ERROR

SOFTWARE

MESSAGES

e
e

CHAPTER

INTRODUCTION

.’EQ"‘JL‘?UOU‘J

O ~JOYU
& WK

PART

Introduction

Using

FORTRAN-10

with

SOS

CONTENTS

LOGGING

CHAPTER

TYPING

CHAPTER

INTRO

1IN

YOUR

INTRO

PROGRAM

INTRO

RUNNING

INTRO

THE

YOUR

EXECUTE

CTRL/C

PROGRAM

("C)

(GETTING THE

MONITOR'S
INTRO

Stopping

Your

Deleting

CTRL/U

("U)

CHANGING

THE

YOUR

INTRO

INTRO
INTRO

(CORRECTING

MISTAKES

1IN
INTRO

PROGRAM)
COMMANDS

INTRO

—
-

Inserting Lines Into Your Program
Deleting Lines From Your Program
Replacing Lines In Your Program
Printing Lines Of Your Program On
The Terminal
Changing The Line Numbers
End (Ends Editing and Stores

INTRO

the

INTRO

FEW

TAB

INTRO

PROGRAM

Program)

Returning
Storing

CHAPTER

Execution

Command

COMMAND

EQ A

Program's

(CHANGING A LINE)

YOUR

SOS

U
O H

SOS

50S

Your

the

Monitor

Program

FORTRAN-10

INPUT

INTRO

AND

OUTPUT

DATA

UNIT

STATEMENT

INTRO

NUMBERS

TYPE

STATEMENT

DATA

FILES

INTRO
INTRO
INTRO

FORTRAN Use

Predefined
INTRO

Filename

Your

HELPFUL

Own

Filename

COMMANDS

TYPE COMMAND (PRINTING OUT YOUR PROGRAM)
DIRECT COMMAND (LISTING ALL STORED
PROGRAMS AND FILES)
DELETE COMMAND (ERASING A PROGRAM
OR

INTRO

STATEMENT

DEVICE

SOME

INTRO

STATEMENT

Letting

INTRO

MISTAKES

Using

INTRO

(CTRL/I)

WRITE

INTRO

Without

CONVENTIONS

CORRECTING

READ

CHAPTER

INTRO

COMMAND

ATTENTION

CHAPTER

INTRO

TO 3TOP ENTERING LINES INTO YOUR PROGRAM
ENDING OR STORING YOUR PROGRAM(E)
THE RUBOUT OR DELETE KEY (CORRECTING
TYPING MISTAKES)

INTRO

INTRO
INTRO
INTRO

INTRO

FILE)

CONTENTS

RENAME
A

NEW

COMMAND

(CONT.)

(GIVING

PROGRAM

FILE
INTRO

NAME)

CTRL/O

(SUPPRESSNG

PRINTED OUTPUT)

INTRO
INTRO

GRIPES

CHAPTER

SAYING GOODBYE TO THE
KJOB COMMAND (LOGGING

K/F

Command

HELP
WHAT

YOUR JOB

FORGOT
CHAPTER

YOU

Logout)

INTRO

(Getting
ARE

Assistance)

DISCONNECTED

NUMBER?

INTRO

FROM
INTRO

(ATTACH)

YOUR JOB

EXAMPLES

INTRO

(Fast

Command

INTRO

COMPUTER
OUT)

(SYS)

INTRO
INTRO

CHAPTER

LOGGING-IN

begin programming

you

need

need
you

to make a
need
the

information

the

account

DECsystem-10 Timesharing

number

and

password.

telephone connection to
computer's
telephone

You

Systenm,
may

also
the computer;
1if so,
number.
Write
this

here:

Telephone Number:
(1f needed)
Account

Number:

Password:

NOTE

Before logging-in, be sure to read Chapter 7 on KJOB
(logging-out) .
If
you
do not log out, but merely
disconnect
your
terminal,
the
DECsystem-10

accounting

and

WILL

system

CONTINUE

will

not

CHARGE

know you have

YOU

FOR TERMINAL

finished
TIME.

First, make sure that the terminal is turned on to LINE.
If
you are to make a telephone connection to the computer, turn
on the acoustic coupler and then dial the
telephone
number
to make the connection to the DECsystem-10.
The computer now may print
and will print:
FLEASE

few

1lines

identifying

1itself

ATTACH

followed by a line beginning with a period (.).
This period
signifies
the
computer's
readiness
to
accept your LOGIN
command.
If the computer does
not
orint
a
period,
type
CTRL/C
("C).
The
may appear as an + on some terminals.
The computer will respond with a period.

NOTE

To type CTRL/C, hold the Control (CTRL)
key
down
while typing C.
This causes the computer to print
the characters "C on the terminal.
1In this
book,
the
symbols
“C
will
mean
that you are to type
CTRL/C.
1In order to signal
that
vyou
wish to give it a

“"C.
This
attention

is your way of
so
that
vyou

command.
INTRO-1-1

the
computer
system
command, you can type
getting
the
computer's
<can
give
1t
vyour next

LOGGING-IN

MONITOR

Monitor:
In
system
the
executive

what follows we shall often call
the
computer
monitor;
this
1s
the
operating
system
or
program that directs
the
execution
of
all
the

programs

and

performs

the

record-keeping

duties

for

the

computer.

You

may

now

log

.LOGIN

typing:

account

number

<CR>

("<CR>"

means

carriage

return.)
Example:

1If

your

account

number

were

27,240

you

would

type

27y 240<CR>

NOTE

shall

use

press

labelled

the

"carriage

job

RET

type

will

key.

and

show
This

key

often

where

vyou

may

referred

distinguish

and

those

used

for

the

are

also

between

computer

prints,

characters

you,

the

type.

monitor

JOB

CAR

you

uderlining

The

<CR>

return".

characters
user,

symbol
RETURN

will

now

number

respond

system

with

number

the

lines:

TTY

terminal

1line

number

You

should

PASSWORD:

(The
PASSWORD

The

job

number

monitor

respond

Since

many

password

now

asking
your

users

prefer

and

would

appear

not

the

for

your

password

and

keep

©printed.

everything

you

monitor.)
password.
pressing

the

their

passwords

your

password

typed

were

RETURN

secret,
were

printed,

the

key.

the
word

the

output

account

number

as:

PASSWORD:

what

assigned

typing

TROLL,

But

TROLL

actually

appears

FASSWORD
S

The

monitor

and

signals

password

message.

Then

ready

will

look

passages

types

your

something
are

its

those

acceptance

typing
a

that

date,

period

(.)

indicating

this
you

What

have

typed).

274 240<CR>

ROG72510

FASSWORTE

1242

18-NOV--76

BYS

#4072
<CR>

TTYLQ6

THUR

INTRO-1-2

you

(remember

Example:

your

time,

command.

the

and

now

have

that

the

perhaps

that

the

a
1is

page

underlined

CHAPTER
TYPING

type

called

SOS

your

SOS.

YOUR

program,

Call

SOS

2
PROGRAM

you

will

giving

use

the

editing

monitor

program

command:

HOSKCR>

responds

with:

L¢

asking
your

you

for

program

the

name

your

file.

disk.)

You

must

(The
give

which you and the computer can refer to it
of this name as the name of your program.
from

one

six

handle

several

declare

that

letters

different

this

file

computer

the

Because

computer

languages,

used

stores

name

- you
may
think
This name must be

digits.

will

file

the

computer
you

store

must
a

can
also

program

written
1in FORTRAN language.
This is done by extending the
name of your file with the letters FOR.
These letters
will
be
separated
from
the
filename
(or
program
name) by a
period.
Some examples of filenames in which you
may
store
programs written for FORTRAN are:
ASPEN.FOR

ASC123.FOR
INSPIR.FOR

Whenever

you

refer

your

program,

use

its

full

name

with

extension.
Now

you

should

Example:

type

(Here

the

name

your

the

file/program.

file

program

ASPEN.FOR.)
R

SOS<KCR>

FILES

SOS

will

now

INFUT?:

ASFEN.FORKCR>

print:
ASFEN.FOR

Q0100

and the carriage will move
1)
for you to begin typing

your

FORTRAN

through

program,

columns

the correct
program.

INTRO-2-1

are

position

(column
in a

Remember

that

reserved

for

the

TYPING

IN YOUR PROGRAM

statement number, column 6 is the continuation field, and
The
columns 7 through 72 are for the FORTRAN statement.
00100 that SOS has printed 1is not part of your
number
program, but is S0S's line number for the first statement of
If this first statement is not a numbered or
your program.
(to column 7)
spaces
comment statement, you must skip 6
1in the statement. When you have
before beginning to type

the RETURN
press
typed in the first line of your program,
and SOS will print the next line number (in increments
key,
vyou may enter

of 100);

the

1line

your

program.

Thus, when SOS prints a line number, you know that it is
(For a fast way of
ready to accept a line of your program.
on TAB, page INTRO
section
the
see
field,
skipping the label
4-6.)

TO STOP ENTERING LINES INTO YOUR PROGRAM (ESCAPE)
ESCAPE

when you wish to stop entering lines into your program,

Yyou

should press the ESCape key (on some terminals labeled ESC,
key as
this
to
We shall refer
ALT, ALTMODE, or PREFIX).
Pressing the ESCape key causes a $§ to be printed on
ESCape.
the terminal.

(In this example, the first statement is a comment
Example:
the character C is in column 1.)
statement:
~C

505<CR>

FILE? ASFEN.FORCCRY
INFUT? ASFEN.FOR
C THIS IS AN EXAMFLE .KCR>
00100
TYFE_10<CR>
00200

00300

00400
00500

FORMAT (' ASFEN IS A NICE FLACE TO SKI!‘)XCR>
ENIKCR>

SOS

Note that we have two programs that are

already

stored

As you
- the system monitor program and SOS.
computer
the
your
accept
to
readiness
know, the monitor indicates its
1its
indicates
SOS
(.):
command by printing a period

readiness to accept your command by printing an asterisk
When you press the ESCape key, SOS returns with an
(*).
asterisk (*) showing that it is ready to accept a command.

ENDING OR STORING YOUR PROGRAM

(E)

finished writing your
It is very important, when you have
that you tell SOS you are done and that it should
program,
You
store your program until you are ready to use it again.
for a command by typing the End
respond to SOS's request
command

(the letter E)

and the RETURN key.

Example:
XE<CR>

COSKC:ASFEN.FOR]

INTRO-2-2

TYPING

YOUR

PROGRAM

In this example, SOS tells us that the program ASPEN.FOR has
been
stored
on
the
disk
(named
DSKC:).
Then S0OS turns
control over to the monitor, which signals its readiness
to
accept your next command by printing a period.

NOTE

The SOS END command, E, is essential.
tell SOS to store your file befors you
monitor, your program will be lost.

RUBOUT

THE

RUBOUT

DELETE

KEY

(CORRECTING

1If you
return

TYPING

don't
the

MISTAKES)

you make a
mistake
while
tyving
a
1line,
the
RUBOUT
(DELETE
or
DEL)
key
allows
vyou
to correct your mistake
without having to retype the entire line.
Press the
RUBOUT
key
once
for each character you wish deleted.
This causes
the deleted characters to be printed with
a
backslash
(\)
before

and

after

them.

Then,

type

the

correct

'N'

has

been

characters.

Example:

FILES

this

ASFNAMNNENFORSCR>

example,

the

character

AFENEFNSFEN

the

RUBOUT

rubbed

out.

Example:

QO300

this

the

FORMAT

example,

unwanted

characters

Think

are

the

IS5

key was

characters

PE.

printed

reverse

RUBOUT

key

INTRO-2-3

Note

NICE

FLACE

SKI!7)<CR>

twice

to erase

the

deleted

erasure"

key!

pressed
also

that

order.

"backspace

plus

CHAPTER
RUNNING

THE

EXECUTE

BEX

YOUR PROGRAM

COMMAND

To execute or cause the computer to follow the

given by the program,

command

the monitor

to:

instructions

filename.extension<CR>

.EXECUTE

Example:

EAECUTE

ASFEN. FORCCR>

FORTRAM:

ASFEN

MALM.

(]

LOAOTING

CLNKXCT ASFEN EXECUTIONI]
ASFEN 16 A NICE FLACE TO
ENG

CRU

TIMES

SKI!

EXECUTION

0,05

ELAFSED

TIMED

0.13

EXIT

EXECUTE may

abbreviated

EX.

NOTE

You may have been puzzled at the occurrence of lines
the monitor before the actual execution
by
written
in the above example.
They
appear
because
before
your FORTRAN source program can be executed, it must
language
machine
a
be translated or compiled into

orogram
(the
object program) that the computer can
execute.
This
is
done
during
the
step
1labeled
FORTRAN:
filename.
This object program, like the
original source program, is stored in a
disk
file.
Before
the
program
can be executed, a copy of the
compiled or object program must be
placed
(loaded)
into
the working memory of the computer - this copy
is often called a core image of the object
vprogram.
This
1is accomplished during the LINK: LOADING step.
Finally, the execution step is performed.

INTRO-3-1

RUNNING

YOUR

PROGRAM

Few programs will complete execution the very first time you
try
to
execute
them.
Do not be discouraged!
Chances are
that the compiler will find at least
one
mistake
1in
your
program.
To help you find your mistake(s), it will type out
a message to you.
For example, suppose that you
have
made
the
following mistake in the program on page INTRO 2-2:
1in
the FORMAT statement in line 300 the closing quote has
been
omitted.
The program would look like this:

QO1LAD

THIS

0200

00300

EXAMFLE.

¢’

ASFEN

NICE

cause

the

FLACE

SKI!)

END

attempt

FORMAT

00400

TYFE

EXECUTE

it will

following:

ASFENFORCCR>

FORTRAN:

ASHFEN

Q0300
PEFTNCAL

LLINE:OOI00

FORMAT (7 ASFEN IS
NO CLOSING QUOTE

TFTNFUWE

LINE:OO300

FOUND

END

A NICE FLACE
IN LITERAL

STATEMENT

WHEN

SKI!)

EXFECTING

fl)l‘

UNDEFINED

LARELS

TFTNFTL

MAIN.

LINK?
FLNKNSA

LOADING
NO START

FATAL

ERRORS

AND

WARNINGS

ANDRESS]

EXTT

If the compiler has found errors in your program
that
make
execution
impossible, you will again have to call on SOS to
help you correct your program.
Do this by using the
R
SOS
command discussed in Chapter 4.

NOTE

The compiler will
only
print
error
messages
for
cases
where
the program is not clearly understood.
It is possible to have a program
that
consists
of
valid
FORTRAN
statements,
but
gives
the
wrong
answers.
For example, suppose you intended to enter
TAX
but

RATE*AMOUNT

mistake

TAX

typed

RATE+AMOUNT

INTRO-3-2

RUNNING YOUR PROGRAM

The compiler

both
type

cannot detect

this as

because

an error

Errors of this
wvalid formulas.
possibly
are
(logic errors) are the most difficult to
find.

The program will run, but the answers will be wrong.
the
read
Frequently the author of the program will
and see what he meant to write instead of
statement
valuable
extremely
One
wrote.
actually
what he
of finding errors of this kind is to attempt
method
should
program
the
to explain to someone else why

of explaining will often highlight
act
The
work.
to
Another method of locating errors is
the error.

have another programmer

your

code.

(GETTING THE MONITOR'S ATTENTION)

("C)

CTRL/C

"proofread"

a
it
to _give
that you wish
CTRL/C informs the monitor
interrupts whatever the computer 1is
The monitor
command.
to
ready
1is
doing and prints a period to indicate that it
hold the Control
To type CTRL/C,
accept your command.
key down while typing C.

(CTRL)

Stopping Your Program's Execution

CTRL/C interrupts
control

program

the monitor.

CTRL/C twice to

during

execution,

returning

Sometimes it is necessary to type

interrupt a program.

Example:

JEXECUTE
FORTRAN:

ASFEN.FORSCR>
ASFEN

I‘\Cl‘\C

Deleting

a Command

You may also use CTRL/C to delete the line you are presently
typing and return control to the monitor.

Example:

JEXECUTE

ASFEN.FORTC

Typing "CONT" in answer to a monitor prompt will return
to your previous activity IF AND ONLY IF you have not:
.
.

tampered with the core image, OR
caused the FORTRAN compiler image in

<core

you

Dbe

overwritten.

1f, for instance,
message
a
send

to
program
executing
the
you interrupt
another terminal, you can
on
someone
to
INTRO-3-3

RUNNING

YOUR

PROGRAM

return.
If you, say, request a directory activity, then the
FORTRAN
compller
1is
overwritten
and you cannot return to
your previous activity.
When
in
doubt,
wait
until
the
execution
1s
complete,
unless
vyou
want
to
restart the
execution anyway.

CTRL/U

("U)

(CHANGING A LINE)

CTRL/U deletes the entire line you are typing and moves
the
carriage
to
the
beginning of the next line.
You may then
retype the line.
Note that CTRL/U only deletes that vart of
the
1line
vyou
have
typed
and
not
the part the computer
prints, i.e., in the following example the
1line
number
|is
not
deleted.
CTRL/U is typed by holding the Control (CTRL)
key

down

while

typing

Example:

Q1800

490

SEHQAT

SRQAOT

SQRT

(0I8CY

(NISCIKCR>

01900

In this example, CTRL/U deletes your input line,
which
vyou
then reenter.
CTRL/U does not delete the line number, 1800,
printed

If you wish
the

RETURN

SOS.

to delete

the

line

key.

INTRO-3-4

entirely,

follow CTRL/U

with

CHAPTER
YOUR

CHANGING

THE R SOS COMMAND

4
PROGRAM

(CORRECTING MISTAKES IN YOUR PROGRAM)

S0S.
to
To correct a mistake in a program, you must return
we saw on page INTRO 2-1, we turn control over to SOS by
As
commanding

SOS

the monitor:

SOESCR>

responds with:

FrLE:

QuUAD. FORKCR>

case
this
1in
extension,
and
filename
the
type
and we
But now SOS recognizes that this program already
QUAD.FOR.
a
inputting
of
exists and correctly assumes that, instead
you wish to edit

file,

FEOLTe

it.

SOS thus

types:

QUATT. FOR

The
The asterisk (*) indicates that SOS is at your command.
that are
commands
SOS
1lists
section
this
of
remainder
FORTRAN
simple
essential for typing and editing
Use the ESCape to terminate these commands.

SOS

I
INSERT

programs.

COMMANDS

Inserting

Lines

Into Your

Program

To Insert lines into your program beginning with line
for

instance,

you give

SOS

2700,

the command:

X 1L2700<CR>

SOS types out each line number, and you respond by inserting

When you press the RETURN key
the program.
into
1line
the
number.
after typing each line, SOS will type the next line
(This

is called

"Insert Mode".)

INTRO-4-1

CHANGING

YOUR

PROGRAM

Example:
¥ L2 700<KCR>
QD00

PFOCOEaCY

D200

41)

FOOQTL

20y

30y

4KCR>

GURT

(DLEST)Y) /C2¥AXWCRY

WEP0O0

Terminate

the

Insert

(ALTMODE/PREFIX) ;

command

this

causes

by
a

§$

typing
to

ESCape

printed

the

terminal.
Example:
K LAO00OKCR>

Q3050

DA1L00

WRITE

(5.

701KCR>

Note that in the above examples, S50S has numbered the
1lines
in
1ncrements
of
100.
The
reason
for
providing
this
increment 1is to allow you
room
to
maneuver - suppose
you
have
accidentally
omitted lines that must now be Inserted,
or suppose
you
now
find
1t
necessary
to
—changes
vyour
original
program.
If you have left out 2 lines that should
have

gone

lines
by
command:

between

lines

changing

the

L3210

and

3300,

you

may

increment

3200

size,

say,

Insert
20,

these

using

the

E0KCR>

This

allows you to Insert lines 3210, 3230, 3250, 3270,
and
3290
1into your program.
The size of the increment is of no
importance as long as it 1s small enough to accommodate
all
additional
1lines.
Each time you change the increment size,
the new size is kept until you change it.
Example:

XI32100 20<CRY
WRITE (52

50)

OB230

(/7

0XRE0

0F210

FORMAT

ROOTL1r

ROOTS

ROOT2CR>

ARE‘y

F10.2y

‘ANI‘y

F10.2)<CR>

you try to
or equal

than

.
.

insert a line whose
that of the next

1line

use a different line number,
ignore the command entirely

INTRO-4-2

number
line,

existing

greater

SOS

will:

CHANGING YOUR PROGRAM

Deleting

DELETE

delete

Lines

line

From Your

Program

from

program,

500

your

type

XO5H00<KCR>

Example:

XHQO<KCR>

LINES

(0050071)

DELETED

through

1400

I1f you wish to delete lines
program,

1600

from

vyour

use:

*¥N1400:1800KCR>

Example:

AN14002 LEOOKCRD

ZLINES

(0140071816000

DELETED

in Your

Program

R
REPLACE

R -

Lines

Replacing

command
Delete
a
of
The Replace command is a combination
To instruct SOS to delete
Insert command.
an
by
followed
line 1700 and to begin inserting lines at line 1700, use the
Replace

command:

¥R1700<KCR>

This is equivalent to the
command

command

D1700

followed

Dby

the

I1700.

Example:

¥R1700<CR>

01700
1 LLINES

&0
FORMAT (7 ROOT
(0170071) DELETED

1572

F10.2)XCR>

replace

lines

500

through

700

use:

¥RG00: 700<CR>

delete
to
SOS
commanding
D500:700
This is equivalent to
I500
command
the
by
followed
700,
through
500
lines
instructing SOS to begin inserting
INTRO-4-3

lines at

500.

CHANGING

YOUR

PROGRAM

Example:

MRG0

70GLCR>

QOUNO0
QDAHQ0
QOO0

(OGQEO0Q/L

FORMAT (7 QGIVE CQEFFTCIENTS
" 3KCR>
READ iy 102 Ay ke CKCR>
FORMAT (F10..23<CR>

IR,

LINES

007000

NELETED

you

also wish

Replace

change

the

increment

size

10,

use

the

command:

ARLOO00:
1100 LOGSCRY

This is
command

equivalent
I1000,10.

the

command

D1000:1100

(DISCIKCRY

followed

Example:

¥ELOOO 1100y 1OCCRY

GLO00

SROOT

SOART

01010

[ENOM

2%A<CR>

01020

ROOTL

(~E

SROOT)

DENOMCCRD>

01030

ROOT2

(~K

SGROOT)

UENOM<CR>

01040

(0100071601100

LINES

UELETED

with

| o

command,

the

use

Printing

you

wish

1Insert

the

Lines

command,

ESCape

Your

line

the

Program

1800

terminate

above

the

your

the

example.

Terminal

program,

type

*F 1 8OOKCR>

Example:

A LB8O0QKCR>

01800

SROAT

HSART

(DI&SC)H

through

3000

lines

2700

XFZ700QE3000<KCR>

INTRO-4-4

your

program,

use

Revlace

CHANGING

PROGRAM

YOUR

Example:

27000 3000KCR>

G200
2800

DRS00

FOQT = B
WRITE (50

FORMAT

GOOTAO

16O

DRO00

/7 (2HKAD
600 ROQT

ROOT

F10.2)

the

Changing

NUMBER

The Number

Line

command

Numbers

instructs

SOS to

renumber

your

vrogram

SOS does not
100 in increments of 100.
1line
at
beginning
the
see
to
wish
you
If
print anything on the terminal.
renumbered program, you must use the Print command.
Example:

*N<CR>
X

Editing

and

Stores the Program)

| &3

(Ends

E - End

END

350OS
inform
program,
your
when you have completed editing
typing
by
disk
the
on
program
your
store
now
should
it
that
If you do not instruct 50S to store your
E (end).
the editing you have just completed will be lost.

program,

Example:

¥ KCR>

924011
QUAD.
FOREZ27
COSKCI

been
QUAD.FOR has
named
program
This indicates that the
The End command turns control over to the
on DSKC:.
stored

monitor, which prints a period to indicate its readiness
accept your

command.

EQ - Returning to the Monitor Without Storing Your Program
QUIT

If you decide that the current editing session is worthless,
return to the monitor without storing your program
may
you
by

using

the

Quit

command.

INTRO-4-5

CHANGING

YOUR PROGRAM

Example:
*EQSCR>

This restores the original copy of the
program
as
1it
was
when
vyou last typed R SOS.
If the program is a new one, 1t
is deleted since an original program did not exist.

FEW

SOS

CONVENTIONS

A range of lines is
first and last line

indicated by
a
colon
between
the
numbers of the range, i.e., 500:700.

A period represents the current
delete the current line.

line.

Thus,

means

Example:

D700

FORMAT

(70GIVE

COEFFICIENTS?)

X1 <CR>

(00700/1)

LINES

DELETED

In the above example the current
is

TAB

line

is line 700 and

deleted.

An asterisk is used to represent the last
1line
of
the
file.
Thus,
to
instruct SOS to print out your entire
file

use:

¥<CR>

(CTRL/I)

The TAB or Horizontal Tab

(sometimes

labeled

or-|)

handy
when
vyou
are entering lines into your program.
The
TAB, similar to that on a typewriter, is set at
8-character
intervals.
It moves the carriage to the next column that is

a multiple of 8;
no characters are output on the
terminal.
As
you
know,
a
FORTRAN
statement must be located within
columns 7 through 72, although it may appear
at
any
point
within
this
range.
Using the TAB to skip over all or part
of the label field will bring
the
<carriage
to
column
8,
enabling you to begin your FORTRAN statement in that column.

If your terminal does not have a key labeled TAB, use CTRL/I
instead.

while

typing

CORRECTING

type CTRL/I,

INTRO

To change

the Control

(CTRL)

key

the

key

(see

MISTAKES

To correct one
page

hold down

characters

use

RUBOUT

2-3).

an entire

line use CTRL/U

INTRO-4-6

(see

page

INTRO

3-4).

CHANGING YOUR PROGRAM

Example:

¥NO1500

"LUKCR>

T2000<KCR>
2000

In the above example, CTRL/U (~ U) allows you to
command "Delete line 1500" to an insert command.

change

the

Example:
L

SOS<KCRY

FILES

ZELDA.FORKCR>

INFUTS

ZELDA.FOR

00100

00200
00300
00400
00500

£ THIS FROGRAM DOES NOTHING.<CR>
10

TYENENFE

00400
*1500<CR>

00500

00700
00800

20
ACCEFT
30

00900

01000

¥RPOOLCRY

00900

01100

01000

01200
01300

LINES

TYFE 20

FORMAT

(¢

WHAT I8 YOUR NAME?’)<CR>

ACEFT 30y YORNAM "U

30y YORMAMCCRY
FORMAT (A5)<CR>

YORNAMCCR>

TYFE_40y

‘HIy’s

FORMAT

(‘0°y

FORMAT

(‘OHIy’

TYFE

50<CR>

FORMAT

ASy

A%Ss
’

‘IO YOU EANT?IKCR>
sD00 YOU’)ISCR>

WANT TO EE FRIENDS?’)<CR>

ENIKCR>
$

(00900/1)

*R9OO
¢ 11 00<CR>

00900

01000

3 LINES

20<CR>

KE400< CR>

004600

TYFE 10<CR>
FORMAT (7 1T//5 WORKING!’)<CR>

DELETED

FORMAT

(00900/1:01100)

(‘OHIs

‘s ASs

‘y

WANT TO RE FRIENDS?Z)<CR>

LELETED

KN<CR>

T XSCR>
KFO
C THIS FROGRAM DOES NOTHING.
00100
00200

00300
00400

00%00

D0600
00700
00800

00900
01000

10
20
30

TYFE

¢/

IT’’S WORKING!’)

FORMAT

WHAT IS YOUR NAME?’)

FORMAT

(‘OHIy

FORMAT

ACCEFT 30y YORNAM
FORMAT (AS)
TYFE 40, YORNAM
END

¥
<E
CR>

[NSKE:

ZELDAFOR

INTRO-4-7

‘»

ASs

‘s

WANT TO EE FRIENDS?/)

CHANGING

PROGRAM

YOUR

Let us look at the above example in detail.
e

HOBKCR>

<control

over

SOS requests the name of the file you

wish

Commands the monitor to turn
program

the

editor

SOS.

FILE:

ZELOA.FORKCR>

respond with the name of your

INFUTe
Q0100

ZELDA FOR
C THIS FROGEAM

file or program:

DOAES

edit.

You

ZELDA.FOR.

NOTHING.KCR>

<concludes
1t
name,
this
When SOS fails to find a file by
SOS then prints the
intend to create a new file.
you
that
are
vyou
Now
number.
name of the file and the first line
'
ready to enter the first line of the program.
Q0200

TYFE

10<CR>

Each time you finish typing a line and press the RETURN key,

SOS

prints

out

00300

the next line number so that you may input

In typing line 200, the first character actually
that line.
typed was a TAB (CTRL/I), which caused the label field to be
spaces
this avoids the necessity of counting
skipped over;
would begin in the proper
statement
FORTRAN
our
that
so
TAB is a non-printing character.
column.
FORMAT

IT’’S

WORKING!

)<CR>

This
statement
1is
1labeled.
After
tyoing
the
FORTRAN
vyou type the non-printing character
(10),
1label
statement
TAB (CTRL/I) to skip over the remainder of the label
field.
a printing FORMAT
of
character
first
the
that
Remember

which
statement must be the carriage control (here a blank,
Notice that because apostrophes
means single space output).
allowable
not
are used to enclose literal fields, they are
1instead be
must
but
field
1literal
a
within
characters
words,
1In other
represented by two successive apostrophes.
although line 300 appears in the program with two successive
word
the
causes
it
avostrophes (IT''S), in the execution
IT'S to be printed (see the EXECUTION which follows).
00400

Again,
label

TYENENFE

20<CR>

here

a non-printing TAB is used
field.

The

D0E00

The ESCape

key

RUBOUT

key

terminates

erases

the

program.

¥400<CR>

INTRO-4-8

the

input

skip

over

the

1lines

1into

the

CHANGING YOUR

PROGRAM

You

ask

1lines

into

your

SOS is now ready for a new command.
line

400.

SOS prints

TYFE

00400

line

400.

¥ LHOOKCR>

Your

step

DOL0O0

beginning with line

You type

500

line

insert

FORMAYT

into your
ACEFT

0600
ACCEFT

©program

500.

30y

WHAT 18 YOUR NAMET”)<KCR>

program.

30y

YORNAM

YORNAMCCRY

After typing in line 600 but before pressing the RETURN key,
that you have misspelled ACCEPT.
notice
and
you pause
retype
then
vyou
which
1line,
the
deletes
("U)
CTRL/U
beginning with the non-printing TAB.
00700
00800

FORMAT (ABIKCR>
TYFE 40+ YORNAMCCRY>

QOY00

R1GO0

FORMAT

A% ‘10 YOU EANT”)<CR>
(707y'HIy

program and
into vyour
900
through
700
You enter lines
'0' in the
The carriage control
1insert.
terminate the
spaced.
double
be
to
output
the
causes
FORMAT statement
XRYOOLCR>

R900
The
900.
1line
At this point, you decide to replace
deleted and initiates an Insert
be
to
it
causes
command
command beginning with line

GOYQ0
01000

00100

FORMAT

TYFE

ASy

D10 YOU’IKCR>

WANT TO RE FRIENDSTZ)KCR>

ENIKCR>

01200
01300

(/0OHI»’

SOKCR>

FORMAT

900.

1 LINES (00900/1) NELETED

When you use the ESCape key to terminate the insert

command

(initiated by the replace command), SOS informs you that one

line

(line 900)

has been deleted.

XRPO0:1L100KCR>

INTRO-4-9

You

decide

CHANGING

YOUR

replace

lines

900

QP00

01000

GOLINES

(0092001201100

Line 900
confirms

FORMAT

PROGRAM

through

(“OHTy
"»

Ay’
sy

1100.

WANT

FRIENIS?’)IKCR>

DELETEDR

is replaced and the
that
three
1lines

command
1is
terminated.
(900
through
1100) have

SOS
been

deleted.

¥N<CR>

505
and

1s
in

You

now asked to renumber
steps of 100.

the

lines

beginning

with

100

GO HLCRY

instruct

SOS

out

your

entire

program.

¥E<CR>

conclude the editing
on the disk.

session,

instruct

SOS

store

vyour

program

FOSKCTZELDAFOR]

Your program
in control.

The

has

been

the

EXECUTION
e EX

stored

above

DSKC:.

program:

ZELUAFORCCR>

FORTRANS:

ZELDA

MAIN.

LINICS

L.OALIING

LLNKXCT

ZELOA

LT85

WORKING!

WHAT

YOUR

EXECUTIONI
NAME?

HAL<SCR>

HIs

HAL

END

CFU

TIME:

WANT

FRIENDS?

EXECUTION

0.10

ELAFSED

TIME:?

EXTT

INTRO-4-10

10.20

The

monitor

1is

now

CHAPTER

FORTRAN-10

INPUT

AND

OUTPUT

DATA

Although FORTRAN-10 is
essentially
the
same
as
standard
FORTRAN, a few minor differences do arise in statements that
involve

The

input

and

output of data.

STATEMENT

READ

the

statement
READ

(u,f)list

where u=device unit number
f=FORMAT

statement

and

number

the
reads data from the device with unit number u (refer to
below) according to the
Numbers,
Unit
Device
on
section
specifications given by FORMAT statement

Example:

00800

READI

OO0

WRITE

FORMAT

35)

IGHRADE

<(13)

STATEMENT

This has
WRITE

where

the

form

(u,f)

1list

u=device

unit number

f=FORMAT

statement

and

number

Example:

01000
01100

WRITE
30

FORMAT

(1s

30)

(8AGy

(STUONTC(I)»I=1y8)ys

IGRALE

13D

NOTE

The ERR option of the OPEN and CLOSE
also
Refer

applicable
to Chapter

to
12

the

READ

INTRO-5-1

and

statements

WRITE

1is

statements.

FORTRAN-10

DEVICE

UNIT

INPUT

AND

OUTPUT

DATA

NUMBERS

In READ and WRITE
statements,
we
must
specify
to
which
device
(Disk,
Line
Printer,
Terminal,
etc.)
we
are
referring.
For the DECsystem-10, the device
wunit
numbers,
u,
are
uniform - they
are
the same on all DECsystem-10s.
The

most

commonly

used

are:

Device

Disk

Number,u

Card

Reader

Line

Printer

Terminal
(For

Unit

complete

list

see

FORTRAN-10

Language

Manual,

Table

10-1.)

Thus, WRITE (5,7)
causes
outnut
terminal;
READ (1,25) causes data
ACCEPT
ACCEPT

be
printed
be read from

on
the

vyour
disk.

STATEMENT

input

where

to
to

data

from

f,list

f=the

FORMAT

the

terminal

statement

you

may

use

number.

Example:
0O%00

NDO&LOO

TYPE

Thus,

"ACCEPT

TYPE

STATEMENT

have

where

FORMAT

(13)

f,list"

output

TYPE

ACCERFT

tyved

TGRADE

equivalent

your

terminal

"READ

(5,f)

list".

FPLACE

TOQ

use

f,list

f=the

FORMAT

statement

number.

Example:

Q0200

QO300

Thus,

"TYPE

TYFE

f,list"

FORMAT

(7ASFEN

equivalent

NICE

"WRITE

(5,f)

SKI!7)

list".

NOTE

To print
carriage

something on your
control character

a line prnter.
your terminal,
QDA200
Q0300

For
use

TYFE
101

terminal, you must
similar to the way

example, to print the word
format statement below:

the

101

FORMAT

INTRO-5-2

HELLQ?)

include
a
you do for

HELLO

FORTRAN-10

The
new

DATA

space
line.

INPUT

before

AND

HELLO

OUTPUT

tells

DATA

the

system

two

ways:

start

FILES

You

may

use

In the

data

files

first method,

one

you let FORTRAN

use

vpredefined

filename.

In the
the

second method,

OPEN

Letting

you choose

the

filename

wusing

statement.

FORTRAN

Use

A Predefined

Filename

There are six Device Unit Numbers for disk files;
whenever
you
use one of them, FORTRAN uses a predetermined filename.
Te device numbers and their filenames are listed below.
Device

Unit

Number

Filename

1
20
21

FOR(QO1l.DAT
FOR20.DAT
FOR21 .DAT

FOR22 .DAT

FOR23 .DAT

FOR24 .DAT

NOTE

If you omit the filename
from
an
OPEN
statement,
FORTRAN
uses
the
filename
<corresponding
to
the
device unit number.

Examples:

QO200

WRITE

(1yl101)

Writes the value of X
1in
the
file
FORO1.DAT,
according
to
FORMAT
statement

00300

READ

Using
OPEN

Your

To use
first
OPEN

(23+109)

Own

your
READ

own
or

statement

OPEN

n is the
the file

101.

Reads the value of Y from
the
file
FOR23.DAT,
according
to
FORMAT
statement 109.

Filename
filename, place
WRITE statement
has

(UNIT=n,

the

an OPEN statement
that accesses the

before
file.

the
The

format:

FILE='filename.ext')

device unit
you want to

number,
use.

INTRO-5-3

and

filename.ext

the

name

FORTRAN-10

INPUT AND OUTPUT OF

DATA

Example:

0200

(UNIT=20y

OFEN

)
FILE='TEST.DAT
Instructs

FORTRAN

oven

on
TEST.DAT
file
the
logical unit number 20.

DOIH0

SEAN (204108) Y

Reads Y from logical unit

file
(The
20.
number
same
name implied 1is the
file name in the
the
as
OPEN
same

with
statement
logical

the
unit

number.)

After the last READ or WRITE statement that accesses a file,
recommended (though not required) that you include a
1is
it
CLOSE statement.
CLOSE

The CLOSE statement has the format:

(UNIT=n,

FILE='filename.ext')

n is the device unit number, and filename.ext is the name of
the

file you are closing.

Example:

QOH00

(UNIT=20y

)
FILE=TEST.DAT

Closes the file TEST.DAT on logical unit number

INTRO-5-4

20.

6
CHAPTER

SOME HELPFUL COMMANDS

TYPE

COMMAND

(PRINTING

OUT

YOUR

PROGRAM)

Usually you will have made many changes in your program.

you
would like the monitor to TYPE out your
terminal as it now stands, command 1t to:
.TYPE

program oOn your

filename.extension<CR>

Example:
+TYFPE

ASFEN.FORKCR>

Q0100
Q0200

THIS

FORMAT

Q0300

IS AN EXAMFLE.
TYFE 10

ASFEN IS A NICE FLACE TO SKI!7)

ENII

20400
¢+

DIRECT COMMAND

DIR

(LISTING ALL THE

The DIRECT command
programs

and

files

causes

stored

STORED PROGRAMS AND

the

monitor

in disk

files

1list

under

FILES)

all

your

the

account

number.
It also lists the length of each program or file 1in
terms
of
DECsystem-10
disk
blocks
(a
disk block is 640
characters) and the data on which each
was
created.
This
command may be

abbreviated

DIR.

Example:
+ NI KR<CR>

ASFEN

ASFEN
ASFEN
NEW
QAUAT
NEW
AUAT
GNOW
QUAD

REL

QA0OR
FOR
QOR
REL
FOR
QAOK
FOR
FOR

1
1
2
3
2
2
1
2

055

0SS
Q55
w055k
085
w059
w055
=055
Q85

18-NOV-76

18-NOV~-76
18~NOV~76
18-~-NOV~-76
18-NOQV-76
18-NOV--76
18-NOV-76
18-NOV~76
18~NOV-76

NSKEC$

[272240]

TOTAL OF 15 BLOCKS fN 9 FILES ON DS8KC?: [275240]

These files belong to the programmer(s)
27,240.

INTRO-6-1

with account

number

SOME

HELPFUL

COMMANDS

You may find that files you did not create are also
listed.
These
may
be programs and files created by the computer in
editing and compiling your program.
The compiled program 1is
contained
in a file named "filename.REL" where the filename
is the same one that you used.
If
you
have
edited
vyour
program
there
will be a program whose name is identical to
yours except that it has a Q as
the
first
1letter
of
the
extension.
This is a backup file containing your program as
it existed prior +to your most recent editing
of
1it.
Each
time
vyour orogram is edited, the program immediately before
editing becomes the backup, and the previous backup - 1f
it
existed - is lost.
1In the foregoing example, the only files
explicitly created were ASPEN.FOR,
NEW.FOR,
SNOW.FOR,
and
QUAD.FOR.
The backups are ASPEN.QOR, NEW.QOR, and QUAD.QOR.
SNOW.FOR has not been edited, so it has no backup.
DELETE COMMAND

DELETE

(ERASING A PROGRAM OR FILE)

To erase a file from the disk,
.DELETE

command the monitor

to:

filename.extension<CR>

Example:

JDELETE ASFEN.FORCCR>
FILES DELETEIDS
. FOR
ASFEN
01 RLOCKS FREED

RENAME COMMAND

RENAME

(GIVING A PROGRAM OR FILE A NEW NAME)

file use

To rename a

the command

.RENAME newfilename.extension = oldfilename.extension<CR>
Example:

« RENAME

EXAMF FOR=8N0OW.FORKCR>

FILES RENAMEL:?
. FOR
SNOW

This will

cause

the

name

SNOW.FOR

changed

EXAMP.FOR

CTRL/O

(SUPPRESSING

PRINTED OUTPUT)

CTRL/O ("0O) stops printed output on the terminal The program
sending
the
output
CONTINUES
TO
RUN.
Use
CTRL/O, for
example, to stop the message of the day during LOGIN
or
to
stop
the
monitor as it TYPEs a program you have asked for.
CTRL/O is typed by holding the Control (CTRL) key down while
typing

the

letter

INTRO-6-2

SOME

HELPFUL

COMMANDS

Example:

¢ TYFE

ASFENFORCCR>

DOLO0

COTHIS

40200

TYFE

QOIA0

EXAMEFLE.
10

Although CTRL/C also stops output on the terminal,
stops

program

also

execution.

Complaints to the Computer - the "Court of Last Resort”
GRIPE

Wnen all else fails and you must gripe
the computer by commanding the monitor
e

to someone,
to:

GRIFECCRY

The computer will
YEST

respond with:

(DEFRESS

ESCAFE

KEY

WHEN

Now enter your gripe and press the
finisned.
Remember
that
typing

THROUGH)

ESCape key when you
have
ESCape
<causes a $ to be

printed.
Example:

GRIPE

GRIFECCRD

YEST
THIS
THANK

(NEFRESS ESCAFE KEY WHEN THROUGH)
CONSOLE I8 ALMOST OUT OF FAFER.$
YQOU

INTRO-6-3

CHAPTER
SAYING

KJOB

COMMAND

GOODBYE

7
THE

COMPUTER

(LOGGING-0UT)

To say goodbye
(K111J0B)
:

the

computer,

command

the

monitor

KJOB

type CTRL/C

("C).

¢ [LIOB<KCR>

KJOB

The monitor

will

respond

with

CONMFLTRM?
KILL

Should you now decide to abort the logout,

If
you
still wish to logout, you must instruct the monitor
to kill, preserve, or save each of your disk
files.
If
a
file
1is
killed,
it
1is
erased
from the computer memory;
saved and preserved files, on the other hand,
are
retained
in
the
computer memory.
Preserve and save are essentially
alike except in the matter of protection against inadvertent
loss
or
destruction.
Preserve, unlike save, protects your
files from accidental destruction by another user who shares
your
account
number.
This may occur if, for instance, the
other user fails to
recognize
the
name
of
your
program
during
his
1logout
and,
failing
to
see any need for its
preservation, kills it.
To take advantage of the protection
afforded
by the preserve file status, it is best to respond
to

the

CONFIRM with

CONFIRM:

the

letter

<CR>

This will automatically preserve any files that have already
been
preserved
during
a
previous logout.
After you have
typed in the letter
U
and
pressed
the
RETURN
key,
the
monitor
will
1list the name and storage information of each
unpreserved file stored in your
disk
area,
pausing
after
each
name
for
vyour
response.
Following the name of each

file you must
a

o)
C

respond by typing one of the

g’

SAVE

if you wish

kill

e’ N’

PRESERVE

P
S

to
to

it,

and

Please
space

preserve
save 1it.

remember
on

the

saved or

the

three commands:

file,

preserved

files occupy valuable

disk.

In general, the only
files
you
need
preserved
have
the
extension
FOR.
If
you have no further changes to make 1in
your program, you may preserve the compiled version
this
will

have

the

extension

REL.

INTRO-7-1

SAYING

GOODBYE

THE

COMPUTER

NOTE

The DECsystem-10 offers the option of detaching
the
terminal from your job, thereby freeing the terminal
and the telephone line for another task
while
vyour
program
is
executing.
(This option is, of course,
only used for programs with
long
execution
times;
for
details
see
the DECsystem—-10 Operating System
Commands
Manual.)
Therefore,
TURNING
OFF
THE
TERMINAL OR BREAKING THE TELEPHONE CONNECTION TO TiHE
COMPUTER DOES NOT END
COMPUTER CLOCK;
ONLY

YOUR JOB, NOR DOES IT
THE COMMAND KJOB WILL

STOP THE
DO THIS.

If you should inadvertently hang
up
without
wusing
KJOB, the computer clock, thinking that you have not
yet
completed
vyour
job,
will
keep
ticking
and
CHARGING
YOU FOR TERMINAL TIME.
So please remember
to USE KJOB BEFORE LEAVING
THE
TERMINAL.
If
vyou
should
be
accidentally
disconnected,
always call
again and end your Jjob properly.
(See
page
INTRO
7-3.)

Example

+ RJOR<CR>
U<CR>

CONFIRKM:
NSKAL
NHREGS

BLKS

H<CR>

ASFEN

+REL

~QEGx

NEW
QUAD
EXAME

« QOK
. REL.
JFOR

QGG
SN
nOBG
QNG
SR ORI
QGG
OSG
QGG

O« BLLKS
e BLKS
e BLKS

¢+
¢+
¢

G BLKS
9« BRLKS
e BLLKS
a9 RLKS

¢
¢

¢+
+

K<CR>
H<CR>
S<CR>
K<CR>
F<CR>
F<CR>
K<CR>

¢+

F<CR>

ASFEN

+QOR

QUALD
SNOW
QUAL
NEW
ASFEN

. QOR
L FOR
FOR
+ FOR
+FOR

G+ BLKS

OSG

BLKS

K<CR>

NOKR

JOR 25y

USER

[2752401

DELETED 4 FILES
SAVED FILES (30
RUNTIME

K/F

32.34

K/F

Command

For

fast

LOGGED OFF TTY106

1430

18-NOV-76

(20 RBLOCKS)
RLOCKS)

GEC

(Fast

Logout)

logout

in which

all

programs

and

files

are

saved,

use

e K/F<CR>

Although this form
being
fast,
vyou
keep

nor

kill

those

of the KJOB command has the advantage
cannot
preserve the programs you wish
you

longer

INTRO-7-2

need.

of
to

SAYING GOODBYE TO THE

COMPUTER

Example:

« KZF<CR>

JUB 25 ¢USERE2792407 LOGGED OFF TTYL106 1432 18-NOV-74
FILES

SAVED ALL

FUNTIME

1.358

(30 RLOCKS)

HEC

(Getting Assistance)

HELP Command

and

To get assistance during logout, type H (for Help)

monitor

ATTACH

the

respond.

will

WHAT TO DO IF YOU ARE DISCONNECTED FROM YOUR JOB

(ATTACH)

it will
anyone,
Although this can happen to
lines connecting
telephone
happen when the
If necessary,
computer break that connection.

most often
vyou and the
redial the

telephone

number to the computer.
will

the computer

Under normal conditions,

print:

FLEASE LOGIN

OR ATTACH

You will wish to attach yourself to the job on which you had
this you must know 1its job number.
To do
been working.
For example, in the
This is given after your LOGIN command.
is 25.
number
job
the
1-3,
INTRO
page
on
LOGIN example
You may attach to a job by using your account number
.ATTACH job number

[account number]

The programmer with account number 27,240 may attach to
25

job

typing:

ATTACH 2%

[2792401<CR>

If the programmer with this account number 1is the

owner

originator of Jjob 25, the monitor asks for his password.
As during
Otherwise, access to the program 1is denied.
If the password is
LOGIN, the password 1is not printed.

accepted, the monitor prints a period and the programmer now
is

attached

to his

job.

Example:

ATTACH 2%
FASSWORIE

[27y5y2401<CR>
<CR>

NOTE

Project-Programmer
Account numbers are often called
the account
command,
ATTACH
the
In
(PPNs).
Numbers

If
number must be enclosed in square brackets [ ].
not have keys labeled [ and ],
does
terminal
your
and
[,
bracket,
square
1left
use SHIFT/K for the
SHIFT/M for the right sguare bracket, ].

INTRO-7-3

SAYING

FORGOT

GOODBYE

THE

COMPUTER

YOUR JOBNUMBER? (5YS)

You have thrown
Suppose you have forgotten your job number.
LOGIN, or perhaps you are using a Visual Display
away vyour
(CRT) terminal and the LOGIN has long since disappeared from
You may find out which Jobs are
now?
What
screen.
the
run under your

being

.S5YS

[account

account number by typing:

number]<CR>

Example:

c0YS

LR7v32401<CR>

¢ BLJOR<CR>

SATTACH

DET

1274240 1<CR>

FaSSWORT

<CR>

to
wishes
27,240
Here, the ovrogrammer with account number
out which jobs are logged in under his account number.
find
account
under
The monitor answers that job 25 is logged in
number 27,240 and that this job is DETached from a terminal.
Then the programmer

ATTACHes to job 25.

The SYS command may be given whether

not

the user is not logged in,
If
1in.
logged
automatically ends with the KJOB command.

INTRO-7-4

the

user

1is

the 5YS command

CHAPTER 8
EXAMPLES

Example

(Executing a Program More than Once):

This program computes the roots of the quadratic equation

+bx+c=0.

Note that FORTRAN statement labels may be in any order and also that
carriage control characters are necessary for each of the printing
FORMAT

statements.

cTYFE

D
. FOR<CR>
QUA

ODLO0
D200

NO300

C
C
C

00400

DOHO0

DO700

OEQ0

QO8O0
DDP00
01000

01100

01200
01300

01400

013500

10
(:

C
C

01600

(1800
01900

01700

02000
02100
02200

02300

O2H00

02900

02400

02600
02700
02800

C
30

N3000

THIS FROGRAM COMPUTES THE ROOTS OF A
QUADRATIC EQUATION OF THE FORM?
AX
WRITE

FORMAT

80)

(/0GIVE COEFFICIENTS”)
C

CALCULATE THE DISCRIMINANT
NISC = RXR - 4%AXC

0 THE KIGHT THING ACCORDING TO THE SIGN OF DnISC
IF

(DnIsc)

20y

30»

FOSITIVE DNISCRIMINANT
SROOT = SQART
NENOM = 2XA

(DISCH

ROOT1 = (~R 4+ SROOQT) / DENOM
ROOT2 = (~R - SROOT) / LENOM
WRITE (%5 50) ROOTL» ROOT2

FORMAT ¢/ ROOTS ARE’s F10.2y

GO TQ

FORMAT
GO TO

D3300

WRITE

03500
03600

100

STOF
NI

7 ANDIVy F10.2)

100

ZERD DISCRIMINANT
ROQT = ~R / (2%A)
WRITE (5. 60) ROOT

03400

€

REA (3y 10) Ay
FORMAT (F10.2)

03100

03200

(7 ROOT IS’y

FL10.2)

100

NEGATIVE DISCRIMINANT

FORMAT

(5y

70)

(/ ROOQTS ARE COMFLEX’)

In the second execution the
Below, this program is EXECUTEd twice.
QUAD are missing because the program has already been
FORTRAN:

words

INTRO-8-1

EXAMPLES

Dbe
repeated.
compiled, making it unnecessary for the compile step to
(See page INTRO
program is simply loaded into core and exec ated.
The

3-1.)

QUAD. FOR<CR>
QUATI

EXECUTE
FORTRAN:
MALN.

LLINK?S
CLNRKXCT
GIVE

L.OADTING
Qual EXECUTIONI

COEFFICIENTS

2, <CR>

. <CR>
~10
12, <CR>

2,00

AND

3,00

ARE

ROOTS
STOF

EXECUTION
TIMES: 0.13
ELAFPSED

END

CHU

TIME:

18.95

TIMES:

18.30

EXIT

QUADN.FOR<CR>

CEXECUTE
LINKS

CLNKXCT

QUAD

GIVE

EXECUTIONI

COQEFFICIENTS

%« <CR>
-3

<CR>

10 .<CR>

ROOTS

ARE

COMFLEX

STQF

ENDC
CFPU

OF EXECUTION
TIME: 0.12
ELAFSED

EXTT

Example

(Reading A

Disk

File):

Student grades are recorded on a disk
file
named
STDGRA.DES.
Each
record
has
a student name (40 characters) and his numerical grade (a
read
the
grades
and
3-digit integer).
The following program
will
compute the mean and standard deviation.

00100

THIS

Q0200

STANDARD

PROGRAM

00300

00400

OFEN

OO0

NUMRER

Q0600

SUM

00700

SUMSAR

(UNIT==1,
=

READ

0?00

FORMAT

NUMEER

01200

SUMSAR

01300

100

MEAN

STUDRENT

AND

GRADES

FILE=STIHGRA.DES’)

=
=

(1y

01000
01100

SUM

THE

00800

01400

COMFUTES

DEVIATION

=
TO

10,

(40Xy

END=100)

IGRADE

I3)

= NUMEER + 1
SUM + IGRADE

SUMSQR

IGRAUEXIGRADE

AMEAN

SUM/NUMEER

01300

VARIAN

01600

STHEV

Q1700

TYPE

30y

{(SUMSAR
SAKT

(SUMXSUM)

(VARIAN)

NUMRBERy

AMEANy

INTRO-8-2

HTHEV

/NUMEER)

(NUMRER-1)

EXAMPLES

Q1900

13 /

FORMAT (S ONUMRER OF STUDENTS = ‘v

01800

MEAN GRADE =

7"»

Fé6.2 /

1/ STANDARD DNEVIATION = 7y Fé.2)
CLLOSE (UNIT =1y FILE=/STOGRA.DES)

02000
02100

‘

END

02200

X GRADE FOR<CR>
FORTRANG GRADE
MATM.

L. ENKS

CLNEXCT GRADE EXECUTIONI

NUMERER OF STURENTS =

80.29
MEAN GRADE =
STANDARD NEVIATION =
OF

END

EXECUTION

0.23

SEUOTIMES

17
10.45

ELAFSED TIME:

1.00

EXIT
¢

and,
We are opening a disk file, reading the grades stored 1in 1it,
Note that the logical
(See lines 400 and 2100.)
closing the file.
is the
unit number given in the OPEN and CLOSE statements (UNIT = 1)
same as that given in the READ statement (line 800) and refers to the
device disk.

There 1s a
Execution starts at statement 400 (the OPEN statement).
The last statement executed
controlled loop at statements 800 - 1300.
is

the END statement at

CONTINUATION

2200.

LINES

Lines 1800, 1900, and 2000 are one FORTRAN statement, lines 1900 and
Since TABs have been used at
2000 being continuations of line 1800.
the beginning of each line to skip over all or part of the 1label
field, a way must be provided to inform the computer that the line 1is
a continuation line.

The rule is:

If the first character

(after the

TAB)

between 1 and 9, then the line is a continuation line.
Example

any

number

(Writing A Disk File):

The following is the program that created the data file STDGRA.DES.
Notice that in the OPEN, WRITE, and CLOSE statements (lines 500, 1100,
IUNIT
and 1400) the device unit number is an integer variable, IUNIT.
has been given the value 1

(line 400)

before it is used.

508

FILE?:

WOE.FOR<CR>

E0IT:

WOE.FOR

¢ ¥<CR>
XEQ

00100

00200

00300
00400

00500
00600
00700

C THIS FROGRAM ENTERS STUDENT GRADES

C ENTER GRADE OF -1 AFTER LAST STUDENT GRADE TO END
DIMENSION STUDNT
TUNIT=1

40
10

(8)

OFEN (UNIT=IUNITy FILE='STDOGRA.DES’)
ACCEFT 10y (STUDONT(I)sI=1+8)
FORMAT

(8A3%)

INTRO-8-3

EXAMPLES

DOEODN
DOYO0

Koo 84

ACCERT

20y

FORMAT

<13

(TGRADE

TGRADE

D51QO0

01100

WRITE

(IUNITy

01200

FORMAT

(8A%y

1400

1500

STOF

3] &O0

EQe

~1)

30)

100

(STUINTC(I)yI=1+8)y

IGRADE

13)

(UNIT=IUNITy

THIS

THE

FILE=’'STHOGRA.IES
)

ENDV

After

this

orogram

listed

command

(see

s X

the

has

DIRECT

page

been

executed,

command

INTRO

(see

page

7-1).

WOE FOR<KCR>

FORTRAN:

WOE:

MS
N
ENEK
S

LOANING

FLNEXCT

WOE

Gk
QR GE

EXECUTIONI

CLINTONLSCR>

B2<CR>

ELBRIDGE

GERRY<CR>

/73<CR>
LaNTEL

TOMFIINS<CR>

Ha<CR>
JOHN

CALHOUN<SCR>

QO<CR>

RICHARI

JOHNSQAN<SCR>

79Y<CR>

GEQRGE.

UALLAS<CR>

YU<CR>
WILLTAM

KING<CR>

LY<CR>

BRECKINRIDGE<CR>

JOHN

77<CR>
MANNIEAL

HAML ITN<CR>

65 <CR>
BLHUYLER

COLIFAX<CR>

/7<CR>

WILSOM<CR>

HENRY

7/ /7<CR>

WILLTAM

WHEELER<CR>

Y&<CR>
CHESTER

ARTHUR<CR>

B8 <CR>
LEVI

MORTON<CR>

Y1 <CR>
GARRKET

HORART<CR>

89 <CR>

CHARLES

DAWES<CR>

Y3<CR>

CHAKLES

CURTIS<CR>

73<CR>
<CR>

~1<CR>

THIS

THE

END

CFU

TIME:S

END

EXECUTION

Q.92

ELAFSED

TIME:

4:21.,33

EXTT

INTRO-8-4

the

file

INTRO

6-1)

STDGRA.DES

and

during

will

the

KJOB

EXAMPLES

Example

This program prepares grade reports for the students whose grades
recorded on the disk
LTYFE

QO100

file STDGRA.DES.

RT
. FOR<CR>
REFO

DO200

OOA00

C FROGRAM TO FREFARE GRADE REFORT
DEMENSTON ANAME(B)

OFEN

(UNIT=1y FILE=/STOGRA.DES”)

00400

CFPRINT

HEADINGS

QO&OQ
QO7/Q0

10
30

FORMAT (707 TXy ‘STUDENT» 27Xy ‘GRADE’)
READ (1ly 20y ENI=S50) (ANAME(I)sI=1,8)s IGRAIE

OOH00

00800

DLO0O

01200
01300

00%00

01100

WRITE

(&Sy

100

FORMAT

(8A%y

FORMAT

WRITE (S5y 40)
GO

‘9

132

(ANAME(I)»I=1+8)» IGRADE

8Ahy

13)

TO 30

CLOSE (UNIT=1)y FILE=’STNGRA.DES’)
ENI OF GRADE REFORT’
STOF 7
ENI

01400

JEX REFORT.FOR<CR>
FORTRANG REFORT
MALN.

LINKCS
CLNRXCT

LOALDING
REFORT EXECUTIONI

GRAIE
83
73
38
80
79
95
69
77
65
77
77
Y6
88
?1
89
?3
75

STUNENT
GEOQRGE CLINTON
ELBRRIDGE GERRY
NANTEL I'. TOMFRKINS
JOHN CALHQUN
RICHARD M. JOHNSON
GEORGE DALLAS
WILLIAM R+ KING
JOHN BRECKINRIDGE
HANNIERAL HAMLIN
SCHUYLER COLFAX
HENRY WILSON
WILLIAM WHEELER
CHESTER ARTHUR
LEVI F+ MORTON
GARRET HORART
CHARLES DAWES
CHARLES CURTIS
NI

END

GRADE REFORT

EXECUTION

CFU TIME:

0.68

ELAFSED TIME:

1:134.77

EXTT

INTRO-8-5

are

EXAMPLES

Example

(Trying

Read

A Non-Existent

File):

Now DELETE the data file containing the students' grades,
STDGRA.DES,
and
then
EXecute
REPORT.FOR
(the
program in Example 4).
The READ
statement in line 700 cannot be executed since the file
to
which
1t
refers does not exist.
The execution is thus aborted.
JOELETE

FILES

STHGRA.DES<CR>

DELETED?

STOGRA
. ES

RLOCKS

+EX

FREED

REFORT,.FOR<CR>

LLINK?S

FLNKXCT

REFORT

EXECUTIONI

STUDENT
GRADE
AFRSDAT ATTEMFT TO READI REYOND VALID INFUT
UNIT=1 DOKISTOGRALOESLZy
2401200555 /ACCESS=SEQINOQU/MODE=ASCTL

NAME.

(L.0C)

wiee= o CALLER

IN.

(402703)

JOR

END
CFU

CLOC)

MAIN.+11(220)

ARORTEI

OF EXECUTION
TIMES: 0,33
ELAFSED

TIME:D

1.22

EXIT

INTRO-8-6

“EARGS:

LARG

<4355

LUTUIU]

TYFES

PART

FORTRAN-10

Language

Manual

The FORTRAN-10 Language Manual reflects the software as of Version 5
of the FORTRAN-10 Compiler, Version 5 of the FORTRAN-10 Object Time
System (FOROTS), and Version 5 of the FORTRAN-10 Debugging Program
.
(FORDDT)

CONTENTS

Page

1-1

PROLOGUE

CHAPTER

\O)

Line-Sequenced

DATA

TYPES,

wbdhpDDDDDDDDDDDD -

oo
Wi -

L]
[}
o
e

[]
[]
L]

[

SYMBOLIC

ARRAYS

TYPES

Integer
Real

Constants

Double-Precision
Complex
Octal

Constants

Logical
Literal

Constants

Constants
Statement Label Constants
SYMBOLIC

NAMES

[]

ARRAYS

Array Element Subscripts
Dimensioning Arrays
Order

ARITHMETIC

Stored

Array

Elements

[]

[)
o
e

wnH+-

Expressions

EXPRESSIONS

Parenthesized
Hierarchy

Mixed

Arithmetic

EXPRESSIONS

Relational
EVALUATION

EXPRESSIONS

Rules for Writing
Expressions
LOGICAL

Mode

Subexpressions
Operators

Expressions

p—

WwWww
e

|
onUTtOn

CONSTANTS,
AND

VARIABLES

STATEMENTS

CONSTANTS

L~ Y

[]

®
e

S -~

[]

Input

FORTRAN-10

EXPRESSIONS

wWwwwWwwwN

CHAPTER

DATA

WWWWwWwWwwwwwwuwwwww

VARIABLES,

Types

®
®
W
L]
[]
|]

°
[]

SHEWWLwwwwwdoND

TYPES

Initial and Continuation Line
Multi-Statement Lines
Comment Lines and Remarks
Debug Lines
Blank Lines
ORDERING

CHAPTER

Field

Remarks

LINE

Statement

Numbers

Line Continuation
Statement Field

FORMAT

and

AND

Field

Label

NAMES,
!

DEFINITION,

Statement

p—

STATEMENT,

SET

CHARACTER

LINES

NN
-

[NOTN
JO I \O)

AND

WWWWWwWwWwWwwwwwwwww
N
A
I
N
I
HOWwoN~JoouubdwwhbdhdH+=

CHARACTERS

CHAPTER

BACKGROUND

CONTENTS

Use of

(CONT.)

Logical

Operands

in Mixed

Mode

Expressions

U1 O

w -

STATEMENT

SPECIFICATION

STATEMENTS

INTRODUCTION
DIMENSION

STATEMENT

Adjustable Dimensions
TYPE SPECIFICATION STATEMENTS
IMPLICIT STATEMENTS
STATEMENTS

COMMON

Dimensioning

[]

[

OY O OYON
OV OY

Uy U

[]

END

STATEMENTS

INTRODUCTION
STATEMENT
INCLUDE STATEMENT

PROGRAM

LU
WD N

CHAPTER

CONTROL

COMPILATION

CHAPTER

Arrays

COMMON

[}

J O

[]
[]

EQUIVALENCE

oy
OY O

Statements

PARAMETER

EXTERNAL

DATA

CHAPTER

STATEMENT

INTRODUCTION

[]

W N+
D>

[]

o
o

ASSIGNMENT

CHAPTER

STATEMENTS

INTRODUCTION

ARITHMETIC

ASSIGNMENT

STATEMENTS

LOGICAL ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS
ASSIGN (STATEMENT LABEL) ASSIGNMENT
STATEMENT

Permitted
STOP

Operations

STATEMENT

(TRACE)

Option

I/0

STATEMENTS

10.1

DATA

TRANSFER

10.2
10.2.1

TRANSFER

10.2.2

Random

OPERATIONS

MODES

Sequential

Mode

Access

R
NN R
N
[

Transfer

STATEMENT

PAUSE

HIEHHWOOAU
& B WWN N

Statements

Range

Mode

—

Extended

STATEMENT
Nested

O WO WVWWWWIWOWWYWIWOWWOLLWYWOW

STATEMENTS

CONTINUE

CHAPTER

Statements
Statements

p—

o
o
e

w N
N+~

o
e

TO
TO

Arithmetic IF Statements
Logical IF Statements
Logical Two-Branch IF Statements
DO

GO
GO

o
o

Computed
Assigned

w N

TO CONTROL STATEMENTS
Unconditional GO TO Statements

bR WLWLWWWNDNDDODND
s

STATEMENTS

INTRODUCTION

W W W WWWWOWOWWOWOWOOLO

CONTROL

NS0

CHAPTER

10-1

10-1
10-1
10-1

CONTENTS

(CONT.)

Page

10.2.3

10.3

10.3.1

10.3.2
10.3.3

10.3.4
10.3.4.1

10.3.5

Append Mode

I/0 STATEMENTS,

BASIC FORMATS AND

COMPONENTS

I1/0 Statement Keywords

FORTRAN-10 Logical Unit Numbers
FORMAT Statement References

Random

10-7

The Specification of Records for
Access

10.5

READ STATEMENTS

ARGUMENTS

END-OF-FILE

Sequential Formatted READ Transfers
Sequential Unformatted Binary READ
Transfers

10.5.4

10.5.5

10.5.6
10.6
10.7
10.8

10.8.1
10.8.2
10.8.3
10.8.4

Sequential

List-Directed READ

10.8.6

CHAPTER

10-12

10-13
10-13

SUMMARY OF READ STATEMENTS

Transfers

10-13
10-14

REREAD STATEMENT
WRITE STATEMENTS

10-16

Random Access Unformatted READ

Sequential
Sequential
Sequential
Sequential

10-114

10-16
Formatted WRITE Transfers
10-16
Unformatted WRITE Transfer
List-Directed WRITE Transfers 10-17
NAMELIST-Controlled WRITE

Random Access Formatted WRITE Transfers

Random Access Unformatted WRITE
SUMMARY OF WRITE STATEMENTS
STATEMENT

10.11
10.12
10.13
10.14

PRINT STATEMENT
PUNCH STATEMENT
TYPE STATEMENT
FIND STATEMENT

Formatted ACCEPT Transfers
ACCEPT Transfers Into FORMAT Statement

ENCODE AND DECODE STATEMENTS

10.15.1

ENCODE

Statement

10.15.2

DECODE

Statement

10.15.3

10-11

Random Access Formatted READ Transfers

10.15

10-11

Transfers

10.10

10.10.1
10.10.2

10-10

10-12

Sequential NAMELIST-Controlled READ

Transfers

10.9

10-8
10-10

Transfers

10.8.5

10-6
10-6

List-Directed I/0
NAMELIST I/0 Lists
OPTIONAL READ/WRITE ERROR EXIT AND

10.5.3

10-2
10-3
10-3
10-3

I/0 List
Implied DO Constructs

10.3.6
10.3.7
10.4

10.5.1
10.5.2

10-2

Example of ENCODE/DECODE Operations
I/0 STATEMENTS

10-17

10-17
10-17

10-18
10-18
10-18
10-19
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-21

10-22
10-23
10-23

10-23
10-25

10.16

SUMMARY OF

NAMELIST STATEMENTS

11-1

11.1
11.2

INTRODUCTION
NAMELIST STATEMENT

11-1

11.2.1
11.2.2

NAMELIST-Controlled Input Transfers
NAMELIST-Controlled Output Transfers

iii

11-1
11-2
11-3

CONTENTS

(CONT.)

Page

CHAPTER

CONTROL

12.1

INTRODUCTION

12.2
12.2.1

OPEN

12.2.2

CHAPTER

FILE

AND

Summary of
FORMAT

13.1
13.1.1
13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2

INTRODUCTION

13.2.4
13.2.5
13.2.6
13.2.7
13.2.8
13.2.9
13.2.10
13.2.11
13.2.12
13.3

FORMAT

CHAPTER

12-1

STATEMENTS

OPEN

and

OPEN/CLOSE

Statements

Statement

Options

12-2

12-10

13-1

STATEMENT

FORMAT

13-1

Statement,

General

13-1

Form

13-2

DESCRIPTORS

Numeric Field Descriptors
Interaction of Field Descriptors

13-4

With I/0 List Variables
G, General Numeric Conversion Code
Numeric Fields with Scale Factors
Logical Field Descriptors

13-6

Variable Numeric Field Widths
Alphanumeric Field Descriptors
Transferring Alphanumeric Data
Mixed Numeric and Alphanumeric Fields
Multiple Record Specifications
Record Formatting Field Descriptors
FOR

CONTROL

13-10
13-10

13-11

13-12
13-14
13-14

13-15

PRINTING
13-16

RECORDS

DEVICE

13-7
13-7

13-16

S Format Descriptor
CARRIAGE CONTROL CHARACTERS
ASCII

CHAPTER

for

13.2.3

12-1

Options

12-1

STATEMENTS

14-1

STATEMENTS

14.1

INTRODUCTION

14-1

14.2

REWIND

STATEMENT

14-1

14.3
14.4
14.5

UNLOAD

STATEMENT

14-2

BACKSPACE

14.6
14.7

SKIP
SKIP

14.8
14.9

BACKFILE

SUBPROGRAM

15.1

INTRODUCTION

15.1.1

15.2
15.3

END

FILE

14-3

STATEMENT

STATEMENT
STATEMENT

Dummy

14-2

STATEMENT

RECORD

SUMMARY

14-2

STATEMENT

DEVICE

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

and

Actual

STATEMENT

FUNCTIONS

INTRINSIC

FUNCTIONS

Arguments

(FORTRAN-10

DEFINED

FUNCTIONS)

EXTERNAL

FUNCTIONS

Basic External Functions
Defined Functions)
Generic Function Names
SUBROUTINE

(FORTRAN-10

SUBPROGRAMS

Referencing Subroutines (CALL Statement)
FORTRAN-10 Supplied Subroutines
RETURN

STATEMENT

Referencing

AND

Subprograms
MULTIPLE SUBPROGRAM
STATEMENT)

MULTIPLE

External

RETURNS

FUNCTION

ENTRY

POINTS

(ENTRY

CONTENTS

BLOCK

CHAPTER

(CONT.)

SUBPROGRAMS

DATA

INTRODUCTION

STATEMENT

DATA

USING THE

RUNNING THE

SET

| ]

OO0
~J O U Wb

Optimization

Test

Replacement

Uninitialized Variable Detection
Function References

Programming Techniques for Effective

Optimization

INTERACTING WITH NON-FORTRAN-10 PROGRAMS
FILES

Calling Sequences
Accumulator Usage

Argument

Lists

Argument

Types

Description of

Wwwwww

OOO0O0Oa0n

AND

use with

FORTRAN-10

Mixing FORTRAN-10 and F40 Compiled

Arguments

Converting Existing MACRO-10 Libraries
for

Interaction with COBOL-10

[

o ole
o)

Programs

Calling FORTRAN-10 Subroutines from
COBOL-10

Programs
\'4

Removal of Inaccessible Code
Global Register Allocation

Improper

W N

[

| ]

[]

OO0 O0O00N

Loops

Constant Folding and Propagation
I1/0

Strength

Removal of Constant Computation From

OO0O00On0

I
I
B
OO0 0Oa0n
W

w N

Elimination of Redundant Computations

(N
LU

j—

Dimensioning of Formal Arrays
FORTRAN-10 GLOBAL OPTIMIZATION
Optimization Techniques

L}
[]

~NSNoOY O s W

OO0OOOOOO0O0O00O000n
[]
L]

[]
s

Numbers

Writing FORTRAN-10 Programs for
Execution on Non-DEC Machines
Using Floating-Point DO Loops
Computation of DO Loop Iterations
Subroutines - Programming Considerations
Reordering of Computations

Reduction of Operator

@]
|

GENERAL PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS
Accuracy and Range of Double-Precision

ON@

PROGRAMS

WRITING USER

ONONENN®

APPENDIX

)

WITH LINK-10

Summary

CREATING A REENTRANT FORTRAN PROGRAM

Message

OOOOOO(PO
(I
I

N
[

Fatal Errors and Warning Messages

ERROR REPORTING

Do wmmwowmow®

/DEBUG Switch

COMPIL-Class Commands
READING A FORTRAN-10 LISTING
Compiler-Generated Variables

The

—

[]
|J

COMPILER

Switches Available with FORTRAN-10

HHRFROWL
S WHF

COMPILER

0O MO Jd~JJO

owwomw

APPENDIX

B W WWRN N

ASCII-1968
w

CHARACTER CODE

APPENDIX

BLOCK

CONTENTS

FORSE-Accepable

Form

ERROR

SOFTWARE

REQUIREMENTS

FOROTS

PROCESSING

INPUT/OUTPUT FACILITIES
Input/Output Channels

—

AND

FEATURES

wwhho
K-

O
-

HARDWARE

Restrictions

FOROTS

APPENDIX

General

OOO0O0OO0

C.3.10.3

Used

Internally

YOI )

(WO

File

(WO

(6, I ST S

wiwlwlw

FOROTS

Access

Modes

Sequential Transfer Mode
Random Access Mode
ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF DATA FILES

AND

THEIR

—

|]
[

[)

L4
L]

[]
®

—

N
W

[J
[]

[ ]

ULt ULt
oo
SO

wivlvivlvEvlvRvlwlw

FORMATS

ASCII Data Files
FORTRAN Binary Data Files
Format of Binary Files
Mixed Mode Data Files
Image Files
USING

FOROTS

FOROTS Entry Points
Calling Sequences
MACRO Calls for FOROTS Functions
Formatted/Unformatted Transfer
Statements, Sequential Access Calling
Sequences

NAMELIST

I/0

Sequential

Access

Calling

Sequences

Array Offsets and Factoring
I1/0 Statements Random Access

Calling

Seguences

Calling Sequences for Statements
Use Default Devices
Statements to Position Magnetic
Tape

OPEN

and

FUNCTIONS

FACILITATE

LOGICAL/PHYSICAL

DEVICE

FORDDT

@ m

INPUT

FORMAT

Variables and Arrays
Numeric Conventions

Statements

Statements,

Calling Sequences
Memory Allocation Routines
Software Channel Allocation
De-allocation Routines

APPENDIX

Which

Units

List Directed Input/Output
Input/Output Data Lists

U?UU

=
=

Calling COBOL-10 Subroutines from
FORTRAN-10 Programs
LINK-10 Overlay Facilities
Conventions
FOROTS/FORSE Compatibility
FORTRAN-10/F40 Data File Compatibility
Converting FOROTS Data File to

O
= O

WWwwww

OO0O00O0

C. 3.8.2

(CONT.
)

and

OVERLAYS

ASSIGNMENTS

(CONT.)

[]

[]
L]
o

RTINIT

D W N

LOCK

CONECT

[]

RTSLP

RTWAKE

DISMIS

= = =

VWD KHO

L]
[]

STATI

[]

STATO

[]

BLKRW

RTREAD

DISCON

[)

Levels

RTSTRT

RTWRIT

[

Interrupt

Priority
Masks
SUBROUTNES

UNLOCK

GETCOR, A Temporary Subroutine

FOROTS ERROR MESSAGES RETURNED BY ERRSNS

TABLES

FORTRAN-10 Character

N
N

Set

Constants

W W

FORTRAN-10 Statement Categories

> b D
|
|
300
W
0

TABLE

Use of Symbolic Names

Arithmetic Operations and Operators
Type of the Result Obtained From
Mixed Mode Operations

Permitted Base/Exponent Type Combinations
Logical

Operators

Logical Operations, Truth Table
Relational Operators and Operations
Hierarchy of FORTRAN-10 Operators
Rules for Conversion in Mixed Mode

Assignments

FORTRAN-10 Logical Device Assignments
Summary of

READ Statements

vii

N ooooouvuumuuude
e WwWWwWwWwWLwdDNDDDODDD

Modes

FORRTF

Core

’—l

INTRODUCTION

USING

WWWWWWWwWwWwWwWwwWwWwwww
NN

[}

[]

e X2 ko ko koK K2 K2 K K2 K2 K2 K2 K2 K2 K2 N2 R N2 R M2 B

SOFTWARE

REALTIME

FORTRAN-10

C)C)G)C)C)C)G)C)QC)CRC)OGOOOOG)OG)C)
(N
NN
Y O
NS AN N
BN
B
|

COMPILER MESSAGES

—

p—

MESSAGES

FORDDT

FORTRAN-10 /OPTIMIZE SWITCH

FORDDT COMMANDS
ENVIRONMENT CONTROL

momoEoDEoEMmEmmE

FORDDT

STARTING

LOADING AND

SCOPE OF NAME AND LABEL REFERENCES

w
—

[

mmEmmom
|
. @,

(Voo oBEN B o WU Y- N USIN S I O I

Commands

FORDDT AND THE FORTRAN-10 /DEBUG SWITCH

APPENDIX

TUTORIAL

USER

Basic

APPENDIX

Statement Labels and Source Line Numbers
NEW

(I
= 00 00 ~J~JWwwWw

A,
o))
Q
M

CONTENTS

Summary

(CONT.)

of WRITE

Statements

Summary of

FORTRAN-10

OPEN/CLOSE

Statement

I/O Statements
Arguments

FORTRAN-10 Conversion Codes
Action of Field Descriptors

Data

Sample

Numeric Field Codes
Descriptor Conversion

of
Data According

Precision

Control

Real and Double
to Magnitude
Characters

FORTRAN-10

Summary of

FORTRAN-10 Device

Control

Statements

==
W RN
N

C)L‘UOU(POOwUJE—‘
|IL|J'|

Intrinsic

oy
!

Defined
15-4

15-10
15-19
B-2

/DEBUG Switch
and Type Codes
Upward Compatibility (FORSE TO FOROTS)
Downward Compatibility (FOROTS TO FORSE)
Function Numbers and Function Codes
FORTRAN Device Table

Modifiers

B-3

Argument

Types

C-12

Commands

Table

Error

Messages,

FOROTS

Code

Format

and

Full

Format

I/0

Returned
[N}

(FORTRAN-10

Basic External Functions (FORTRAN-10
Defined Functions)
FORTRAN-10 Library Subroutines
FORTRAN-10 Compiler Switches

Message

us)
|

Functions

Functions)

Error

Messages

and

ERRSNS

Values

Arithmetic

Messages

viii

and

Library

Error

C-24

C-26
D-30

D-33
E-1

CHAPTER

PROLOGUE

BACKGROUND

1.1

The FORTRAN-10 language set is compatible
with
and
encompasses
the
FORTRAN,
Standard
National
"American
1in
described
set
standard

also
FORTRAN-10
X3.9-1966" (referred to as the 1966 ANSI standard).
standard set that
the
to
additions
and
extensions
many
provides
its
1increase
and
FORTRAN-10
of
usefulness
the
enhance
greatly

language sets implemented by other major
FORTRAN
compatibility with
In this manual, the FORTRAN-10 extensions and
computer manufacturers.
additions to the 1966 ANSI standard set are printed with gray shading.

A
FORTRAN-10
source
program
consists
of
a
set
of
statements
constructed
using
the
language elements and the syntax described in
this manual.
A given FORTRAN-10 statement will perform any one of the
functions:

following

It will cause operations such

and

to be

branching

It will specify

processed.

It will

the

out.

type

and

division,

multiplication,

carried

format

specify the characteristics of

of
the

the

data

being

source orogram.

FORTRAN-10 statements are composed of keywords, i.e., words
that
are
recognized
by
the
compiler, used with elements of the language set:
constants, variable, and expressions.
There are two
basic
types
of
executable and nonexecutable.
FORTRAN-10 statements:

program;
the
of
action
the
specify
statements
Executable
statements describe the characteristics and arrangement
nonexecutable
of
kind
the
and
of data, editing information, statement functions,
The compilation of
may be included in the program.
that
subprograms
executable statements results in the creation of
executable
code
in
Nonexecutable statements provide information only
the object program.
to

the

compiler;

manual,
this
In
each
categories,
name,
are

definition,

given

in Table

they do not

create

executable

code.

12
1into
grouped
are
statements
FORTRAN-10
the
The
1is described in a separate chapter.
which
of

and

chapter

reference

for

each

statement

Category

Constant
(s)

Numeric

Integer,
,

Truth Values

octal
Logical

real,

Types

double-precision,
|

complex,

and

DATA TYPES, CONSTANTS, SYMBOLIC NAMES, VARIABLES, AND ARRAYS
1Integer

3.2.1

Constants

An integer constant is a string of from one to eleven digits that
(a number without a fractional
represents a whole decimal number
(-2**35)-1 to
Integer constants must Dbe within the range of
part).
(+2**35)-1

(-343597383567 to +3435973383067).

Positive integer constants

may optionally be signed; negative integer constants must be signed.
You cannot use decimal points, commas, or other symbols on integer
Examples of wvalid
constants (except for a preceding sign, + or -).
constants

integer

are:

345
+345

-345

Examples of

invalid

(use of decimal point)
(use of comma)

+345.
3,450

(use of decimal point;

34.5

Real

3.2.2

integer constants are:

not a whole numbper)

Constants

A real constant may have any of the following forms:

a string of decimal digits followed
A basic real constant:
followed optionally by a
point
immediately by a decimal

decimal

e.g.,

1557.42.

immediately by a decimal
A basic real constant followed
(exponential notation)
notation
E
in
written
exponent
integer
form,

fraction,

2.9.,

1559.E2.

(no decimal point)

An integer constant

followed by a

integer exponent written in E notation, e.g.,

1559E2.

be
however, each will:
Real constants may be of any size;
digits).
decimal
9
to
(7
bits
27
of
precision
the
fit

decimal

rounded

to approximately eight
is maintained
Precision for real constants
the absolute precision depends upon the numbers
significant digits;
involved.

form
E notation
in
constant written
The exponent field of a real
it must be either a zero or an integer
(blank);
empty
cannot be
and
The magnitude of the exponent must be greater than -38
constant.
(i.e., =38<n< + 38). The following are
than +38
less
to or
equal

examples of valid real constants.

The

~98.765
7. 0E+0
. 7E-3
SE+5

(7.)
(.0007)
(500000.)

50115.
50.E1

(500.)

following are examples of
72.6E75

.375E
500

(exponent

invalid

too large)

real constants.

(exponent incorrectly written)
(no decimal point given)

DATA TYPES,

CONSTANTS,

SYMBOLIC NAMES,

VARIABLES,

AND ARRAYS

constants

written

Double-Precision Constants

3.2.3

Constants of this type are similar to
the

form;

notation

direct

real

1in

differences between these two constants

are:

magnitude,
their
on
depending
Double-precision constants,
precision to either 15 to 17 places (system with a KAlQ
have
KL10
or
KI10
a
Processor) or 16 to 18 places (system with
the 8-digit precision obtained for
than
rather
Processor),

real

constants.

constant

double-precision

Each

storage

two

occupies

locations.

The letter D, instead

constants

identify a decimal

1is

wused

exponent.

double-precision

in
=zero)
(even of
an exponent
You must use both the letter D and
The exponent need only be signed
writing a double-precision constant.
equal
and
1its magnitude must be greater than -38
if it is negative;
The range of magnitude
=38<n +38).
(i.e.,
than +38
1less
to or
permitted a double-precision constant depends on the type of processor

present

and

run).

in your system (on which the source program is to be compiled
The permitted

ranges

Range

Processor

KA10
KI10 or

The

are:

1.97 X 10**(-31)
0.14 X 10**(-38)

KL10

to 3.4 X 10**(+38)
to 3.4 X 10**(+38)

following are valid examples of double-precision constants.
7.9D03
7.9D+03
7.9D-3
79D03
79D0

(=
(=
(=
(=
(=

7900)
7900)
.0079)
79000)
79)

The following are invalid examples of double-precision constants.
7.9D99

7.9E5

3.2.4

Complex

(exponent

("E"

too

large)

denotes a single-precision constant)

Constants

integer,
of
pair
You can represent a complex constant by an ordered
real, or octal constants written within parentheses and separated by a
are
2.297)
(8.763E3,
and
-.70712)
(.70712,
example,
For
comma.
complex

constants.

In a complex constant the first

(leftmost)

real constant of

the

pair

the second real constant
the number;
of
vpart
real
the
represents
and
real
the
Both
number.
the
of
represents the imaginary part
imaginary parts of

a complex constant can be signed.

The real constants that represent the real and imaginary
parts
of
a
1locations in the
storage
consecutive
two
occupy
constant
complex
object

program.

DATA TYPES, CONSTANTS, SYMBOLIC NAMES, VAR'IABLES, AND ARRAYS

DATA TYPES, CONSTANTS, SYMBOLIC NAMES, VARIABLES,‘AND ARRAYS

The

Constants

Logical

3.2.6

values

Boolean

truth

and

falsehood

are

represented

.TRUE. and
FORTRAN-10 source programs as the logical constants
.FALSE.. Always write logical constants enclosed by periods as in the
preceding sentence.

Logical quantities may be operated on in arithmetic and 1logical
Only the sign bit of a numeric used in a logical 1IF
statements.
statement is tested to determine if it is true (sign is negative) or
false

(sign is positive).

3.2.7

Literal

Constants

A.literal constant may be either of the following:‘

Hollerith

alphanumeric

1literal,

which

string

1is written as a

and/or special characters preceded by nH (2T ey

a
represents
n
letter
the
nH,
In the prefix
nHstring).
characters
of
exact number
the
specifies
that
number
H
letter
(including blanks) that follow the letter H; = the

a Hollerith literal.
identifies the literal as

are examples of Hollerith literals:
2HAB

14HLOAD TEST
6H#124-A

#124

The following
|

DATA TYPES,

3.3

CONSTANTS,

SYMBOLIC NAMES,

VARIABLES,

AND ARRAYS

SYMBOLIC NAMES

Symbolic

names

six

characters.

symoolic

The

may con

name

following

must

alphapetic

are

examples

of legal

are

examples

character.

symbolic

names:

Al2345
IAMBIC
ABLE

The

following

You

names:

(symbol

used

first

character)

1AB

(number

used

first

character)

use

symbolic

$#AMBIC

source

illegal

symbolic

program;

symbolic

names

Table

3-2

name

and

identify

lists

text

reference

Use

Symbolic

Can

Names

Variables

Arrays

3.
4.

Array elements.
Functions

5.
6.

Subroutines
External library
functions

COMMON

names

items,

for

each.

PI,
TAX

For
CONST,

Example

See Section

LIMIT

3.4
3.5

CALCSB, SUB2, LOOKUP
'SIN, ATAN, COSH

3.5.1
15.2

15.5
15.4

|
|

DATAR,

example

For a Detailed
- Description

TAX (NAME, INCOME)
MYFUNC, VALFUN

FORTRAN-10

with

Names

items

together

3-2

Symbolic

block

Table

Identify

specific

these

COMDAT

3-06

6.5

DATA TYPES,

CONSTANTS,

SYMBOLIC

NAMES,

VARIABLES,

AND

ARRAYS

VARIABLES

3.4

A variable is a datum (storage

1location)

that

identified

symbolic
name
and
1is
not a constant, an array or an array element.
Variables
specify
wvalues
that
are
assigned
to
them
by
either
arithmetic
statements (Chapter 8), DATA statements (Chapter 7), or at
run time via I/O references (Chapter 10).
Before you assign
a
value

to
a variable, it is termed an undefined variable,
reference it except to assign a value to it.
If you reference an undefined variable,

will

be obtained.

and you should not

unknown

value

(garbage)

The value you assign to a variable may be either
a
constant
or
the
of a calculation that is performed during the execution of the
result

For example, the statement IAB=5 assigns the constant
object program.
1in the statement IAB=5+B, however, the value
the variable IAB;
to
5
the
at
of IAB at a given time will depend on the value of variable B
time

the

statement was last executed.

The type of a variable is the type of the contents of the
it

identifies.

datum

Variables may be:

1integer

real

logical

double-precision,

complex.

that

You may declare the type of a variable by
wusing
either
implicit
or
explicit
type declaration statements (Chapter 6).
However, if you do
not use type declaration statements, FORTRAN-10 assumes the
following
convention:

Variable names that begin with the
N are normally integer variables.

Variable names that begin with any letter
L, M, or N are normally real variables.

Examples of determining the

type

foregoing convention are given in the

Variable

OTEMP

KA123

AABLE

other

than I,

according

the

table:

Assumed Data Type
Integer

Real
Integer

Real

ARRAYS

An array

Section

3.3

names

variable

following

Beginning Letter

ITEMP

3.5

letters

are

an ordered

symbolic
for

set of data

names

writing

and

symbolic

identified by an array name.

must

names.

conform

Array

to the rules given in

DATA TYPES, CONSTANTS,
SYMBOLIC NAMES, VARIABLES,

Each datum within an array
you

varlables,

assign

may

array

'an

<called

AND ARRAYS

element.

a value to an array element.

with

Before you

undefined;
Dbe
assign a value to an array element it is considered to
If
should not reference it until you have assigned 1t a value.
you
you reference an undefined array element,
will

be unknown

and

unpredictable

the

value

the

element

(garbage)
.

a
Name each element of an array by using the array name together with
subscript that describes the position of the element within the array.

Array Element Subscripts

3.5.1

Give the subscrlpt of an array element identifier w1th1n

either

one

subscript

by commas.
delimited

after the array name.

Write the

parenthesized
|

’

the

number

dimensions

3.5.2)

specified for the

A subscript can be any compound expression

(Chapter 4),

for example:

that
Subscript quantities may contain arithmetic expressions
addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and
involve
and
(A+B,C*5,D/2)
example,
For
exponentiation.
(A**3, (B/4+C) *E,3)

(Section

array.

subscript '1mmed1ate1y

The general form of an array element name 1is AN

(sl, S2,...5n), where AN is the arr
n number of subscript quantities.

equal

parentheses,

or a set of subscript gquantities

quantity

are valid

subscripts.

Subscripts may contain array element identifiers
nested
to
any
level
as
subscripts.
For example,
1in the subscript
C(I(J(K(L))) ,A+B,C) the first subscrlpt quantity
given
1is
a
nested

3- level

subscript.

Here are examples of valid array element subscripts:5
1.

1IAB(1,5,3)

ABLE(A)

DATA TYPES, CONSTANTS, SYMBOLIC NAMES, VARIABLES, AND ARRAYS
3.5.2

Dimensioning Arrays

You must declare the size

enable

FORTRAN-10

(number of elements)

of an array 1in order to

to reserve the needed amount of locations in which

to store the array.
Arrays are
stored
as
a
series
of sequential
storage
locations.
Arrays, however, are visualized and referenced as
if
they
were
single
or
multi-dimensional
rectilinear
matrices,

dimensioned
on
a
row,
column,
and "plane basis.
For example,
following figure represents a 3-row, 3-column, 2-plane array.

the

3 ROWS +

\,V

3 COLUMNS
10-1058

You specify the size of an array by an array declarator written
as
a
subscripted
array
name.
In
an
array
declarator,
however,
each
an
either
subscript quantity is a dimension of the array and must be
integer variable or

For example,

declarators.

integer

TABLE(I;J,K)

and

constant.

MATRIX

(10,7,3,4)
.

are

valid
|

array

The total number of elements that comprise an array is the product ' of
the
dimension quantities given in its array declarator.
For example,
=
(2 X 3 X 4
the array IAB dimensioned as IAB (2,3,4) has 24 elements
S
|
|
24) .

You
use
dimension
arrays
only
in
the specification & statements
DIMENSION,
COMMON,
and
type
declaration
(Chapter 6).
Subscripted
are array
statements
foregoing
in any of the
array names appearing
declarators;
subscripted
array
names
appearing
1in
any
other
statements are always array element identifiers. In array declarators
the
position
of a given subscript quantity determines the particular
1t
that
plane)
or
column,
row,
(e.g.,
array
the
dimension of
The first three subscript positions specify the number of
represents.
rows,
columns
and
vplanes
that
comprise,
the
named
array

DATA TYPES, CONSTANTS, SYMBOLIC NAMES, VARIABLES, AND ARRAYS
Specifies the Array(s)

The Dimension Declarator

TABQ)

TAB (2,2)
A

12,1122

NOTE
FORTRAN-10
dimensions

3.5.3

permits
any
number
an array declarator.

Order of Stored Array Elements

The
The

elements of an
value
of the

order.
minimum
and maximum
values
most
rapidly.
The
value
of
the
1last
given
subscript
quantity increases
to its maximum value least rapidly.
For
example, the elements of the array dimensioned
as I(2,3) are stored in

the

following order:

I(1,1)

1I(2,1)

In the following
(B(3,3,3))
are
bottom.

array
first

are arranged in storage in
ascending
subscript quantity varies between its

1(1,2)

(2,2)

(1,3)

list, the elements
stored
row by row
-

(2,3)

of
the
from left

three-dimensional
array
to right and from top to

CB(1,L,1)

B(2,1,1)

_-B(121) B(221)
~-+B(1,3,1)

B(2,3,1)

BG,1,1) —-

BG2D -B(33,1) -~

“SEQL) BGi)___BGLY)
L+B(122) B(222) B(322) -~

ETRasY) Be3)_BGAD
-

L+B(1,13) B(213) BG13) -~
SSB13) 029
629 -]
L-+ B (1,3,3)

Thus B(3,1,1)

B(233)

B(333)

is stored before B(1,2,1), and so forth.

CHAPTER 4

4.1

EXPRESSIONS

ARITHMETIC EXPRESSIONS
either

may
Arithmetic expressions

simple

compound.

arithmetic expressions consist of an operand that may be:

Simple

1. ‘a.constant
2.

a variable

an array elehent

4.
5.

a funcfiiOn reference'(seé-Chapter 14 for desctiption), or
or

arithmetic

parentheses.

logical
|

written

_exptession

within

Operands may be of integer, real, double precision, complex,
|

type.

The following are valid examples of simple arithmetic expressions:
(integer constant)
(integer variable)
(array element)
(function reference)

105
IAB
TABLE(3,4,5)
SIN (X)

(A+B)

(a parenthetical expression)

A compound arithmetic expression consists of two or more operands
Table 4-1 lists the arithmetic
combined by arithmetic operators.
operations permitted in FORTRAN-10 and the operator recognized for
each.

Table

4-1

Arithmetic Operations and Operators

Operation
1. Exponentiation
2. Multiplication

3. Division

4, Addition
5. Subtraction

Operator

Example

*%
*

A**B or
A*B

+
-

A/B

A+B
A-B

EXPRESSIONS

Rules

4.1.1
Observe

the

for

Writing

following

Arithmetic

Expressions

rules

structuring

compound

arithmetic

expressions:
1.

The operands comprising a compound arithmetic expression

may

combinations of data types

the

result

different

each.

types.

Table

4-2

and

the

illustrates

type

all

assigned

permitted

NOTE

An expression cannot contain
operators.

For

example,

permitted.

two

the
|

adjacent

and

expression

unseparated

A*/B

1is

not

All operators must be included;
no operation
1s
implied.
- For
example,
the
expression
A (B)
does
not
specify
multiplication although this is implied
in standard algebraic
notation.
The
expression - A*
(B)
1is required to obtain a
multiplication
of the elements.
'

When you

use

exponentiation,

the

base

quantity

and

its

exponent
may
be
of
different
types.
For
example,
the
expression ABC** 13 involves
a
real base
and
an
1integer
exponent.
The permitted base/exponent type combinations and
the type of the result of each combination are given in Table
4-3.

EXPRESSIONS

Table

4-3

Permitted Base/Exponent Type Combinations

Exponent Operand

Base Operand

Complex

Double

Integer

Real

Integer

Real

Double
Precision

Double
Double
Double
Precision|Precision|Precision

Complex

4.2

LOGICAL

Complex

Precision

Complex

Double
Precision

Complex

Double

Precision

Complex

(Undefined)

EXPRESSIONS

Simple 1logical
Lojical expressions may be either simple or compound.
expressions consist of a logical operand, which may be a logical type:
1.

constant

wvarilable

array element

function reference

another expression written within parentheses.

(see Chapter

15),

Compound logical expressions consist of two or more owerands

logical

combined

operators.

Table 4-4 gives the logical operators permitted by

description of the operation each provides.

FORTRAN-10

and

EXPRESSIONS

Table 4-4
Logical Operators

Operator

. AND.

.OR.

AND operator.

Description

Both of the logical operands

this operator must be true

Inclusive OR operator.

operands

combined

to produce

a true

combined
result.

If either or both of the
are true,

.OR.

logical

the result will be

true.

as a
wused
1is
Complementation operator. This operator
that specifies complementation (inversion) of the
prefix
The
it modifies.
that
expression)
or
item (operand
original item, if true by itself, becomes false, and vice

.NOT.

versa.

P and
where
Q,
P .OP.
Write logical expressions in the general form
1is any logical overator but ".NOT.".
logical operand and .0OP.
QO are
you
operand;
operator complements the value of a logical
The .NOT.

must

write

it immediately before the operand that it modifies, e.g.,

.NOT.P. Table 4-5 is a truth table illustrating all possible 1logical
combinations of two logical operands (P and -Q) and the resultant of

When an operand
complex,

only

each combination.

1logical

the high-order

~specified logical operation.

The assignment of a .TRUE.

double-precision

value to a given operand

1is

1is
expression

word

or a .FALSE.

the

operand is used in the

based only on the sign of the numeric representation of the operand.

EXPRESSIONS
Table

Logical

Wwhen P is

»=’"Then the Expression:

—————

.NOT.P

'4—-ef_}

False

True
True
False .

| |

A
| True‘ |
False
True -

True
True
True
False'
True
- False | 1
~ False
|
False |

False

True

True
False
False

o
P .AND, Q
| |
P .AND, Q
| P .AND. Q |
.AND.

'-vIs:
-

.NOT.P

False

Truth Table

And»Q is:
-

True

4-5

Operations,

- False

True
»
p .OR. Q
|
P .OR; Q0
- True
True
~-.
B PV.OR. Q
| False
P .OR. O |
|

Examples

Assume

the following

variables:

Variable

REAL,
I,J,K

RUN

L, A,
CpPX,C

DP,D

of valid logical
Examples
variables

Type

are:

L.AND.B

L.AND.A.OR..NOT.
(I-K)

~
-

Real
Integer

Double Precision
Logical
Complex

expressions
'

consisting' of
.

the

foregoing

EXPRESSIONS
Logical functions are performed on the full
36-bit
Dbinary
processor
representation
of
the
operands
1involved.
The result of a logical
operation
is
found . by
verforming
the
specified
function,
simultaneously,
for each of the corresponding bits in each operand.
For example,
<consider
the
expression
A=C.OR.D,
where
C="456
and
D="201.
The operation performed by the processor and the result is:

Bits
0
Operand C 0
Operand D 0
Result A
0

1—24
Q——— 0
Q————
O
Q— 0

25
0
0
0

26
O
0
0

27
28
1
0
0
1
1 1

29
0
0
0

30
1
0
1

31
0o
0
0

word

32
1
0
1

33
1
0
1

34
1
0
1

35
0
1
1

Table 4-5 also illustrates all possible logical
combinations
of
two
one-bit
binary
operands
(P
and
Q)
and
gives
the result of each
combination.
Just read 1 for true and 0 for false.
.

4.2.1

Relational

Expressions

- “Relational expressions
relational
operator.

to test,

consist
of two
expressions
combined
by
a
The relational operator permits the programmer
quantitatively,
the
relationship
between
two
arithmetic

expressions.

The result of a relational expression
false

is always a

logically

value.

true

In FORTRAN-10,

you may write

‘mnemonic

enclosed

symbolic

forms

within

relational operators either

periods, e.g.,

.GT., or

as a 2-letter

Table 4-6 lists
both the
mnemonic an
the FORTRAN-10 relational operators and specifies

the type of quantitative test performed by each operator.
4-6

- Table

Relational

Operators

and Operations.

Relation Tested

Mnemonic

.GT.
.GE.

.LT.
.LE.
.EQ.
.NE.

Greater than
Greater than or equal
Less than
Less than or equal to
Equal to
Not equal to

EXPRESSIONS

Write relational expressions in the general form A(l)

A represents an arithmetic operand and

.OP.

You may mix arithmetic operands of
type
precision in relational expressions.

.OP.A(2),

where

1is a relational operator.

1integer,

real,

and

double

You may compare complex operands using only the operators .EQ. (==)

.NE.

(#).

and

Complex quantities are equal if the corresponding parts of

are

both words

equal.

Examples

Assume

following variables:

the

Variables

REAL, RON
I,JdJ,K

DP,D
L,A,B

CpX,C

Type

Real
Integer

Double Precision
Logical
Complex

Examples of valid relational expre551ons con51st1ng of
varlables

the

foregoing

are:

(REAL) .GT.10
5
==

C.EQ.CPX

Examples of 1nva11d relatlonal expre551ons con51st1ng of the foreg01ng
variables

are:

(REAL) .GT 10 (cldsing period‘missing from operator)

Examples of valid expressions that use

operators to combine

the

.AND.

(I.AND.K)#

( (REAL) .OR. (RON))

—

(I.GT. 1
( (I*RON

(I/J)) .OR.K

PX.OR.RON

Dboth

1og1ca1

fore901ng varlables are:

and

relational

EXPRESSTIONS

4.3

EVALUATION

The following
expression:

EXPRESSIONS

determine

0of

order

computation

the

an established hierarchy for
the
relational, and logical operations

the

4.3.1

use

the

FORTRAN-10

parentheses

location

Parenthetical

operators

within

execution
and

arithmetic,

expression.

Subexpressions

In an expression, all subexpressions written
within
parentheses
are
evaluated
first.
When
parenthetical subexpressions are nested (one
contained within another) the
most
deeply
nested
subexpression
is
evaluated
first,
the
next
most
deeply
nested
subexpression
1is
evaluated
second,
and
so
on,
until
the
wvalue
of
the
final
parenthetical
expression is computed.
When more than one operator is
contained by a parenthetical subexpression, the required
computations
are
performed
according
to
the
hierarchy
assigned
operators
by
FORTRAN-10

(Section

4.3.2).

Example:

The

separate

computations

A+B/((A/B)+C)-C
1.

R1=A/B

2=R1+4C

R3=B/R2

R4=R3-C

R5=A+R4

WHERE:

THROUGH

COMPUTATIONS

4.3.2

performed

evaluating

the

expression

are:

REPRESENT

THE

INTERIM

AND

FINAL

RESULTS

THE

1is

assigned

the

PERFORMED.

Hierarchy of Operators

The following hierarchy
(order
classes of FORTRAN-10 operators:
first,

second,
third,

operators,
relational operators,
1logical operators.

execution)

arithmetic

and

EXPRESSIONS

Table 4-7

specifies

the

With the

exception

operators of the

aésigned

precedence

foregoing classes.

'integer

division

and

individual

the

exponentiation,

all

subexpressions involving operators of
or
expressions
on
operations
algebraically
that is
1in any order
equal precedence are computed
correct.

A subéxpression of a given expression may be computed

order.

any

the expression (F(X) + A*B), the function reference
in
example,
For
may be computed either before or after A*B.
Table

Hierarchy of

Class

Level

| EXPONENTIAL

”FirSt'

ARITHMETIC
|

RELATIONAL

N
|

| Second
|

4-7

FORTRAN-10

Symbbl or Mnemonic

—(unary minus) and + (unary plus)

Third

Operators

+,-

Fourth

k,/

LE.,.EQ.,.NE.

Fifth

Sixth

Seventh | .

.NOT.

.AND.

Eighth

LOGICAL
i

Operations specifying integer division
are
evaluated
from
left
to
right.
For
example,
the expression I/J*K is evaluated
as if it had
evaluation process
left-to-right
But this
been written as (I/J)*K.

can

not equal

overridden

by parentheses.

I/(J*K),which

I/J*K(evaluated as(I/J)

*K)

does

is evaluated as written here.

When a series of exponentiatioh operations occurs in an expression, it

the expression
is evaluated in order from right to left. For example,

A**2*%*B jis evaluated

in the

following order:

first Rl = 2**B (intermediate result)

second

R2 =

A**R]1

(final

result).

Similarly,
here
too,
parentheses
alter
the
evaluation
expression . (A**2)**B is evaluated in these two steps:
first R1 = A**2 (intermediate result)
second

R2 =

R1**2

(final

result)

the

EXPRESSIONS

CHAPTER

COMPILATION CONTROL‘STATEMENTS

5.1

INTRODOUCTION

You use compilation control

and

specify their

statements to

termination.

identify FORTRAN-10 programs

Statements
of this type do not

affect either the operations performed by the object
program
manner
in which the object program is executed.
The
th
control

statements described
and

END

in this chapter

statement.

are:.

or
the
ilati

COMPILATION CONTROL STATEMENTS

5.4

END

STATEMENT

Use this statement to signal FORTRAN-10 that the

physical

source program or subprogram has been reached.
END is
statement.
The general form of an END statement is:

end

a nonexecutable
o

END

The following rules govern the use of the END statement:
1.

This statement must be the

You

source

may

or
program

label

last

subprogram.

END

statement.

physical
,

statement of a
|

CHAPTER 6
SPECIFICATION

6.1

STATEMENTS

INTRODUCTION

Use specification statements
storage

allocations,

specification

specify

the

and data arrangement.

statements:

DIMENSION

Statements that explicitly spec1fy

type

characteristics,

There are seven types of

type,

such

REAL

INTEGER

COMMON

EQUIVALENCE

EXTERNAL

Specification statements are nonexecutable and conform to the ordering

guidelines described

6.2

DIMENSION

in Section 2.4.

STATEMENT

to
needed
information
with
DIMENSION statements provide FORTRAN-10
the space required for source program arrays.
allocate
identify and
array
as
names
array
subscripted
of
number
You may specify any
The general form of a DIMENSION
declarators in a DIMENSION statement.
statement

DIMENSION S1,

form:

S2, ...,Sn

- where Si is an array declarator.
following

‘

Array declarators
are names
-

the

name (max,
... ,max)

min:max
where name is the symbolic name of the array, and each
pper bounds of an array dimension.
represents the

value

SPECIFICATION

STATEMENTS

Examples
DIMENSION

EDGE

DIMENSION

TABLE

(where

IAB,

and

are

NET

(5,10,4),

type

integer).

TABLE

(567)

6.3

TYPE

SPECIFICATION

SPECIFICATION STATEMENTS

STATEMENTS

Type specification statements declare
explicitly
the
data
type
of
variable,
array,
or
function symbolic names.
You may give an array
name in a type statement either alone (unsubscripted) to
declare
the
type
of all its elements or in a subscripted form to specify both its
type and dimensions.

Write-type specification statements in the following form:

typé4list
type may be

any one

INTEGER

REAL

DOUBLE PRECISION

COMPLEX

LOGICAL

the

following

declarators:

NOTE

order

statements

the data

compatible

used

type

by other

size

with

the

type

manufacturers,

modifier,

*n,

1is

accepted
by FORTRAN-10.
You may append
this size modifier to
the
declarators,

causing
some to elicit messages warning
users
of
the
form
of
the
variable
specified by FORTRAN-10:

where

- SPECIFICATION

Declarator

Form

Full

STATEMENTS

Variable

Specified

INTEGER*2
INTEGER*4
LOGICAL*1

Full
Full

word integer with
word integer
word logical with

LOGICAL*4

Full

wrd

loglcal

REAL*4

Full

word

real

REAL*8

Double-precision

COMPLEX*8

Complex

COMPLEX*16

Complex

In addition,
type
size

variables,

with
you

,
warning

message

real

warning
may

message

append

modifier

arrays,

warning~message

the

data

individual

function

names.

Its
effect
1s
to
override,
for
the
particular element,
the
size
modifier
(explicit
or
implicit)
of the primary
type.

For

example,

REAL*4
‘A

and

B*8,

C*8(10),

are single-precision

word)

real,

double-precision

and

(two

full

. (one

.and

full

words)

are

real.

The list consists of any number
of variable, array, or function
names
that
are to be declared the specified type.
The names listed must be
separated by commas and can appear in only one type statement w1th1n a
program unit.
Examples
INTEGER

REAL

A,
M,

B, TABL
ARRAY

+5)

NOTE

-and functions of a
which
are
not
typed
either implicitly
or
explicitly
by
a
specification
statement,
are
typed by
FORTRAN-10 accordlng
to
the
following
conventions:

Variables,
source

arrays,

program,

Variable
function
letters

names,
names

integer..

~Variable
function
letter
N

If a name that
appears
in
a
refers

generic

are

names,
names

other
type

than

names,

array

that

with

the

are

type

‘names,

and
any

array

that
I,

and

begin
N

begin
J, K,

with
L,

real.

is the same
conflicting

user-defined

predefined
statement,
it loses

as a predefined
FORTRAN-10
function
name
type statement, it is assumed that the name
routine of the given type.
If
you
place
a

FORTRAN-10
its generic

function
name
properties.

explicit

type

SPECIFICATION STATEMENTS

6.5

COMMON

STATEMENT

The COMMON statement enables you to
establish
storage
that
may
be
shared
by
two
or
more
programs and/or subprograms and to name the
variables and arrays that are to occupy the common storage.
The
use

of common storage conserves storage and provides a means to implicitly
transfer arguments between a calling program and a subprogram.
Write
COMMON statements in the following form:
|

COMMON/Al/V1,V2,...,Vn.../An/V1,V2,...,Vn
where the enclosed letters /Al/, cess /An/
represent optional
constructs (referred to as common block names when used).

name

SPECIFICATION

STATHEMENTS

The list (e.g., V1,V2...,Vn) appearing after each name construct lists
the
names
of
the variables and arrays that are to occupy the common
area identified by the construct.
The items specified
for
a
common
area
are
ordered
within
the storage area as they are listed in the
COMMON

statement.

Either label COMMON storage areas or leave them blank (unlabeled).
If
the
common area 1is to be labeled, g9ive a symbolic name within slashes
immediately before the list of items that is to occupy the names area.
For

example,

the

statement

COMMON/AREAl/A,B,C/AREA2/TAB(13,3,3)
establishes
block names
the

same

two labeled common areas (i.e., AREAl and
bear no relation to internal variables or

name.

common

two

that

AREA2).
Common
arrays that have

area

1is

sSequential
to

occupy

declared

slashes

blank

(//)

common.

unlabeled,

give

immediately before
For

example,

the

either

the

nothing

list

items

statement

COMMON/AREAl1/A,B,C//TAB(3,3,3)
establishes
one
Unlabeled common

1labeled
(AREA1l)
and
one
unlabeled
area 1s also called "blank common".

A given labeled common name may appear more
COMMON statement and in more than one COMMON
program

common

area.

than
once
in
the
statement within the

same
same

subprogram.

Each labeled common area is treated as a
separate,
specific
storage
area.
The contents of a common area, i.e., variables and arrays, may
be
assigned
1initial
wvalues
by
DATA
statements
in
BLOCK
DATA
subprograms.
Declarations
of
a
given
common
area
1in
different
subprograms must contain the same number, size, and order of variables
and arrays as the reference area.
Items

statements

During

placed

a blank common area
the source program.

throughout

compilation

source

may

program,

also

given

FORTRAN-10

COMMON

will

string

together
all
items listed for each labeled common area and for blank
common areas 1n the order in which they appear in the
source
program
statements.
For example, the series of source program statements:

COMMON/ST1/A,B,C/ST2/TAB(2,2)//C,D,E

COMMON/5T1/TST(3,4)//M,N

COMMON/3T2/X,Y,2//0,P,Q
has

the

same

effect

the

single

statement

cOMMON/ST1/A,B,C,TST(3,4)/SsT2/TAB(2,2) ,X,Y,2//C,D,E,M,N,0,P,0Q
All items specified for blank common are placed into one area.
Items
within
blank
common
are
ordered
as
they are given throughout the
source program.
Common block names must be unique with respect to all
subroutine, function, and entry point names.
The

largest

definition

given

common

area

must

loaded

first.

SPECIFICATION

6.5.1

Dimensioning

Arrays

COMMON

STATEMENTS

Statements

Subscripted array names may be given in
COMMON
statements
dimension declarators.
However, variables cannot be used as
quantities in a declarator appearing in a COMMON statement;
dimensioning 1s not permitted in COMMON.
Each

array

name

given

COMMON

statement

must

as
array
subscript
variable

dimensioned

either

by
the
COMMON
statement or by another dimensioning statement within
the program or subprogram that contains the COMMON statement
but
not
both.
Example

cCoMMON /A/B(100),
COMMON

6.6

C(10,10)

X(5,15) ,Y(5)

EQUIVALENCE

STATEMENT

The

EQUIVALENCE statement enables you to
control
the
allocation
of
shared
storage within a program or subprogram.
This statement causes
specific storage locations to be shared by two or
more
variables
of
either
the
same or different types.
Write the EQUIVALENCE statement

the

following

form:

EQUIVALENCE(V1,V2,...,Vn), (Wl,wWw2,...,Wn), (X1,X2,...,Xn)

where each parenthetical list contains
the
names
of
array
elements
that
are
to
share the same storage
example, the statements
EQUIVALENCE

(A,B,C)

EQUIVALENCE

(LOC,SHARE(1l))

specify that the variables named A, B, and C are
to
storage location, and that the variable LOC and array
are to share the same location.
The relationship of equivalence is
following statements have the same

share
the
same
element SHARE(1)

two

When you use array elements in EQUIVALENCE statements, they must
either as many subscript quantities as dimensions of the array or
one subscript
quantity.
In
either
of
the
foregoing
cases,
subscripts
must
be
integer
constants.
Note
that the single
treats the array as a one-dimensional array of the given type.

have

You

(A,B), (B,C)

EQUIVALENCE

(A,B,C)

may

use

the

EQUIVALENCE

following
l.

rules
You
to

items

given

and

statement

are

cannot
be

for

and
For

the

EQUIVALENCE

transitive;
effect:

wvariables
locations.

EQUIVALENCE
COMMON

example,

1list

statement

1in

only
the
case

both

the

providing

the

observed:
set

two

equivalent

quantities
one

declared

another.

COMMON

statement

STATEMENTS

SPECIFICATION

Quantities placed
in a common aréa by means
of an EQUIVALENCE

statement

are permitted

forwards.

For

example,

to extend

the

end of

the

common

the statements

area

COMMON/R/X,Y,%
DIMENSION A(4)'“
EQUIVALENCE (A,Y)

cause the common block R to extend from Z to A(4) arranged as
follows:

1)
2)

(shared
(shared

location)
location)

You cannot use EQUIVALENCE statements that cause the start of
a
common
block
to be extended backwards.
For example, the
o

sequence

invalid

COMMON/R/X,Y,Z

DIMENSION A(4)
EQUIVALENCE (X,A{(3))

would require A(l)
of

block R

1in

following diagram:

A(l)

A(3)

A(4)

and A(2)

to extend the

a backwards direction as

starting

1location

illustrated by the

A(2)

6.7

STATEMENT

EXTERNAL

Any subprogram name

to be used

as an argument

EXTERNAL

declares

names

subprogram

must

appear

1in an EXTERNAL statement

statement

distinguish

them

EXTERNAL statement

from

in the

other

variable

following

another

subprogram

in the calling subprogram.

form:

array

names.

names

The

Write the

EXTERNAL namel,naméz,...,namen
where each name listed is

desired,

declared

to be

subprogram

these subprogram names may be FORTRAN-10 defined

You

may

also

use

(&)

within

EXTERNAL

subprograms

EXTERNAL

FORTRAN-10

by prefixing

*SIN,

statement.

&COS

defined

function

the names by an asterisk
For example,

names

(*)

name.

functions.

for

your

an ampersand

SPECIFICATION STATEMENTS
declares SIN and COS to be user subprograms.

(If a prefixed

name

‘not a FORTRAN-10 defined function, then the prefix is 1ignored.)

Note that specifying a predefined FORTRAN-10 function in an EXTERNAL
statement without a prefix, i.e., EXTERNAL SIN, has no effect upon the
If the
of actual argument lists.
usage of the function name outside

name has generic properties, they are retained outside of the actual
(The name has no generic properties within an argument
argument list.
o

list.)

The names declared

in a program EXTERNAL

statement Care

reserved

throughout the compilation of the program and cannot be used in any
other declarator statement, with the exception of a type statement.

CHAPTER
DATA

STATEMENT

INTRODUCTION

7.1

DATA statements are used to supply the initial
values
of
variables,
arrays,
array elements, and labeled common.(l) Write DATA statements
as

follows:

DATA Listl/Datal/,List2/Data2/,...,Listn/Datan/
where the List portion of each List/Data/ pair
1identifies
a
set
of
items
to
be
initialized and the /Data/ portion contains the list of
values to be assigned
the
items
in
the List.
For
example,
the

statement

DATA IA/S/,IB/10/,IC/15/
initializes variable

and

IA to the value

the variable IC to the value 15.

variable

IB to

the

wvalue

10,

The number
of storage locations

you specify in the list of variables must be less than or equal to the

number
of
storage
locations
you
specify in its associated list of
values.
If the list of variables is larger
(specifies
more
storage
locations)
than
its
associated value
1list,
a
warning message 1is
output.
When the value list specifies more storage locations than the
variable list, the excess values are ignored.

The List portion of each List/Data/ set may contain the names
or

variables

variabl

array

The /Data/ portion
numeric,
1logical,

elements,

Refer

to Paragraph 6.5

for

a description of labeled common.
7-1

one

may
contain
one
or
more
constants and/or alphanumeric

'strings.

labeled common

DATA

STATEMENT

You may specify literal data
as
either
a
Hollerith
specification,
e.g.,
BSHABCDE,
or a string enclosed in single quotes, e.g., 'ABCDE'.
Each ASCII datum is stored left-justified and is padded with blanks up
to the right boundary of the variable being initialized.

When you assign the same value to more than one item in List, a repeat
specification
may
be
used.
Write
the repeat specification as N*D
where N is an integer that specifies how many times the value of
item
D
1s
to
Dbe
used.
For
example,
a /Data/ specification of /3*20/
specifies that the value 20 is to be assigned to the first three items
named in the preceding list.
The statement
DATA M,N,L/3*%20/

assigns the value 20 to the variables M, N, and L.

Sample

Statement

DATA PRINT,I,O/'TEST',30,"77/,(TAB(J),J=1,30)/30*5/ The

Use

first

elements

TAB

initialized

array

are

5.0.

DATA((A(I,J),I=1,5),Jd=1,56)/30*%1.0/

conversion

required.

DATA((A(I,J),I=5,10),J3=6,15)/60%2.0/
|

“No

conversion

required.

When a literal string is specified that 1s longer
than
one
variable
can
hold,
the
string will
be stored left-justified across
as many
variables as are needed to hold it.
If necessary, the last
wvariable
used will be padded with blanks up to its right boundary.
Example

Assuming

that

and

are

single-precision,

the

statement

DATA X,Y,Z2/'ABCDEFGHIJKL"'/
will

cause

X
Y

to
to

be
be

initialized
initialized

to 'ABCDE'
to 'FGHIJ'

to be

initialized

'KLPpPY'

When a literal string is
to be
stored
in
double-precision
and/or
complex
variables and the specified string is only one word long, the
second word of the variable is padded with blanks.

DATA

STATEMENT

Example

Assuming that the variable C

is complex,

the statement

DATA C/'ABCDE','FGHIJ'/

1its
and
'ABCDE'
will cause the first word of C to be initialized to
1is
'FGHIJ'
string
The
'PpPPPPY'.
to
initialized
second word to be
ignored.

CHAPTER
ASSIGNMENT

8.1

STATEMENTS

INTRODUCTION

Use assignment statements to assign a specific value to
one or more
program variables.
There are three kinds of assignment statements:

8.2

Arithmetic assignment statements

Logical assignment statements

Statement Label

assignment

(ASSIGN)

statements.

ARITHMETIC ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT

You use statements of this type to assign specific numeric
variables

and/or

statements

the

array

elements.

form

Write

arithmetic

wvalues
.

assignment

v=e

wherev is the name of the wvariable
receive

the

array

element

that

1is

specified value and e is a simple or compound arithmetic

expression.

In assignment statements,

the equal symbol

(=)

does not imply equality

as
it
would
1in algebraic expressions;
it implies replacement.
For
example, the expression v=e is correctly interpreted as "the
current
contents
of
the
1location
identified as v are to be replaced by the

final value of expression e;

the current contents of v are lost.”

ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS

ASSIGNMENT

STATEMENTS

ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS

8.3

Use
and

LOGICAL ASSIGNMENT

STATEMENTS

this type of assignment statement to
array
elements
of
type
logical.

statement

the

form

assign
Write

wvalues
to
variables
the logical assignment

v=e

where v

is one or more variables and/or

a logical

expression.

array element names,

and e

1is

Examples

Assuming that the variables L, F, M, and G are of
following

type

statements are valid:

logical,

the

Statement

Sample

I,=.TRUE.

The

contents

replaced

logical

truth.

F=.NOT.G

The contents of L.
logical

M=A.GT.T

complement

1is

replaced

the

the
G.

If A
M is

is greater than T, the contents
of
replaced by logical truth;
if A is

less

than

equal

the

contents

M
1s
replaced
by logical false.
can also be read: If A 1is greater

This
than

then

1is

true,

otherwise,

false.
=((I.GT.H)
.AND

contents

The

the

contents

true

are

false

replaced

by either

resultant

the

expression.

8.4

ASSIGN

(STATEMENT LABEL)

ASSIGNMENT

STATEMENT

Use the ASSIGN statement to assign a statement label constant, i.e., a
l1-

5dlglt statement number,

statement

ASSIGN

the
n

form

to a variable name.

Write

the ASSIGN

where n represents the statement number

and I

is a variable name.

For

example,
the statement

ASSIGN

2000

LABEL

specifies that the variable
2000.

LABEL repreSents
-

the
|

With the exception of complex and double-precision,
type of variable in an ASSIGN statement.

statement number
you

may

use

Once
a variable has been assigned a statement number, FORTRAN-10
consider
it
a
label
wvariable.
If
a label variable is used
arithmetic statement,
the result will be unpredictable.

any

will
an

ASSIGNMENT

Use

the

ASSIGN

statements

variables

statement

(Chapter

that

statements.

9).

TAX=(A+B+C)
*.05

ASSIGN

conjunction with
The

ASSIGN

verb

assigned
sets

control

statement

label

subsequent
GO
TO
control
are
then
referenced
1in
The following sequence illustrates the use of the ASSIGN

statement:

555

STATEMENTS

555

LABEL

CHAPTER
CONTROL

9.1

STATEMENTS

INTRODUCTION

FORTRAN-10 object programs normally execute statement-by-statement
1in
the order in which they were presented to the compiler.
The following
source program control statements, however, enable you
to
alter
the
normal

9.2

There

sequence

1IF

4.,

CONTINUE

PAUSE

are

statement

execution:

CONTROL

three

STATEMENTS

kinds

Unconditional

Computed

Assigned

statements:

A GO TO control statement causes the statement that it
identifies
to
be
executed next, regardless of its position within the program.
The
following

9.2.1

paragraphs

Unconditional

describe

GO TO

Write GO TO statements
GO

where n is
statement,

each

type

of GO TO

Statements

this

type

the

form

the
1label,
i.e.,
e.g.,
GO
T0
555.

statement
number,
of
an
executable
When executed, an unconditional GO TO

statement transfers control of the program to the
specifies.

statement.

statement

that

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

You may position an unconditional GO
TO
source program except as the terminating

9.2.2
Write

Computed
GO TO
GO

GO TO

statement
anywhere
in
statement of a DO loop.

the

Statements

statements

this

type

the

form

(N1,N2,...,NK)E

where the parenthesized list is a list of statement numbers and
E
1is
an
arithmetic
expression.
You
may include any number of statement
numbers in the list of this type of GO TO
statement;
however,
each
number
you
give
must
be
wused
as
a
label
within the program or
subprogram containing the GO TO statement.

NOTE

comma
may
parenthesized

The value
that
1s
statement

optionally
list.

of the expression E must be reducible
greater
than
0
and
1less
than
or
numbers given in the statement list.

expression
statement

E
is

does

not

compute within

the

to
an
integer
value
equal to the number of
1If the
wvalue
of
the

foregoing

When a computed
GO
TO
statement
1is
executed,
the
expression,
1i.e., E, is computed first.
The value of
position within the given list of statement numbers of
identifies
the
statement
to
be executed next.
For
statement

range,

the

executed.

wvalue
of
its
E specifies the
the number that
example, in the

sequence

CALL

(20, 10,
XRANGE (K)

5)K

the variable K acts as a switch, causing a transfer to statement 20 if
K=1, to statement 10 if K=2, or to statement 5 if K=3.
The subprogram
XRANGE 1is called 1f K is less than 1 or greater than 3.

9.2.3
Write

Assigned
GO TO

GO TO

statements

Statements
of

K, (Ll1,L2,...Ln)

this

type

either

the

following

forms:

where K 1s a variable name and the parenthesized list
of
the
second
form
contains
a
1list
of statement labels, i.e., statement numbers.
The
statement
numbers
you
give
must
be
within
the
program
or
subprogram containing the GO TO statement.
Assigned
preceded
variable

GO TO statements of either foregoing
by an ASSIGN statement that assigns
name represented by K.
The
value

variable
it

which

must
be
used.

in
1In

the

same

statements

K,(Ll1,L2,...Ln)

form must
be
logically
a statement label to the
of
the
assigned
1label

program unit as
written in the

the GO TO
form

statement

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

if K is not assigned
one
of
the
statement list, the next sequential

statement
statement

numbers
given
is executed.

the

1logical,

and

Examples
GO

TO
GO TO

9.3

STATI1
STAT1,(177,207,777)

STATEMENTS

There are three kinds
logical two-branch.

9.3.1

Write

Arithmetic

statements

statements:

arithmetic,

Statements

this

type

the

form

IF(E)L1,L2,L3

where
are

(E)
the

an expression
labels,
1.e.,

enclosed within parentheses and
statement
numbers,
of
three

L1, L2,
L3
executable

statements.

This
the

type of IF statement transfers control of the program to
one
of
given
statements
according
to
the computed value of the given

expressions.

If the value of the expression

Less
than
identified

0,
control
by L1;

Equal
to
identified

0,
by

Greater

than

identified

<control
L2;

control

1is

1is:

transferred

1is

transferred

the

statement

the

statement

the

statement

L3.

You must give all three statement numbers
the expression given may not compute to a

in arithmetic IF
complex value.

statements;

Examples
Sample

IF(ETA)4,

Statement

IF (KAPPA-L(10))
20,

Transfers control to statement 4
ETA
1is negative, to statement 7
ETA is 0, and to
statement
12
ETA is greater than 0.
14,

Transfers control to
if
KAPPA
1s
1less

1if
if
1if

statement
20
than
the 10th
element of array L and to statement
14
if
KAPPA
1is
greater
than or
equal to the 10th element of
array
L.

CONTROL

9.3.2

Logical

Write

STATEMENTS

Statements

statements

this

type

the

form

IF(E)S

where

any

executable

expression

enclosed

in parentheses

and

complete

statement.

Logical IF statements transfer control of the program
either
to
the
next
sequential executable statement or the statement given in the IF
statement, i.e., S, according to the computed
1logical
wvalue
of
the
given
expression.
If
the
wvalue of the given logical expression is
true (negative), control is given to the executable
statement
within
the
IF
statement.
1If the value of the expression is false (positive
or zero), control is transferred to
the
next
sequential
executable
program

The

statement.

statement

executable

you

give

logical

statement

except

Sample

Statement

statement

may be

statement

any

FORTRAN-=10

another

logical

statement.

Examples

(T.OR.S)

X=Y+1

(Z.GT.X(K))

CALL

SWITCH(S,Y)

Performs

replacement

operation

result

Performs
the

(K.EQ.INDEX)

Write

IF
IF

Two-Branch

statements
(E)

N1,

this

(negative),

the

statement

Note

portion

you

IF
N1
If
is

call

1if

true.

unconditional

the

result

true.

tyve

the

form

and

are

statement

false

transferred

(positive

zero),

statement

Nl.

control

the

to
the
1is

value

transferred

N2.

must

number

two-branch

1is

statements transfer control of
the
program
or
N2,
depending on the computed value of
the value of the
given
1logical
expression

control

expression

that

logical

Logical two-branch
either
statement
given expression.

true

the

Statements

where E 1s any parenthetical expression,
labels defined within the program unit.

1if

true.

subroutine
of

Performs

Logical

result

transfer

9.3.3

arithmetic

code

that

was

the

that

statement

control

skipped.

can

immediately

later

following

transferred

the

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

Examples
Sample

9.4

Statement

(LOG1l)

10,20

(A.LT.B.AND.A.LT.C)

STATEMENT

Transfers control

statement

Transfers control

statement

if
LOGl
transfers

31,32

if
A
1is
1less
than both B and
transfers control to
statement
if
A
1is
greater than or equal
either B or C.

DO statements simplify the coding of iterative procedures;
in

the

following

1is
negative;
otherwise
control to statement 20.

C;
32
to

write them

form:

Indexing

Parameters

DO NI

Ml M2,M3

TERMINAL
STATEMENT
LABEL

IVCREMENT
PARAMETER
TERMINAL

INDEX

PARAMETER

VARIABLE
INITIAL
PARAMETER

where

Terminal Statement Label N is the
statement
number
of
the
last
statement of the DO statement range.
The range of a DO
statement is defined as the series of statements that follows
the
DO statements up to and including its specified terminal
statement.

Index Variable I is an unsubscripted variable whose value
1is
defined
at
the
start
of the DO statement operations.
The
index variable is available for use throughout each execution
of the range of the DO statement, but its value should not be
altered within this range.
It is also available for
wuse
1in
the

program

when:

1loop
control is transferred outside the range of the DO
by
a
GO
TO, arithmetic IF or RETURN statement located
within

the

range,

a CALL is executed from within the
DO
statement
that uses the index variable as an argument, and

if an input-output statement with
options
END= or ERR= (Chapter 10)
statement

range.

range

either
or
both
the
appears within the DO

CONTROL

1Initial Parameter M1

assigns

initial
element,

wvalue.
This
or expression.

Terminal

Parameter

many

repetitions

STATEMENTS

the

may

variable,

‘I;

any variable,

its

array

M2 provides
the

index

parameter

the value that determines

statement

range

are

performed.

how

Increment Parameter M3 specifies the value to be added to the
initial
parameter (Ml) on completion of each cycle of the DO
loop.
If M3 and its
preceding
comma
are
omitted,
M3
1is
assumed

equal

An indexing parameter may be any

expression

resulting

either
a
positive
or
negative
value.
The values of the indexing
parameters
are calculated only once, at the
start
of
each
DO-loop
operation.
The
number
of
times
that
a
DO
1loop will execute is
specified by the formula:

MAX ((M2-M1)/M3+1,1)
Since the count is computed at the
start
of
a
DO
1loop
operation,
changing
the
value of the loop index variable within the loop cannot
affect the number of times that the loop is executed.
At the start of
a
DO
loop
operation,
the
‘index
value
1is set to the value of the
initial parameter
(Ml),
and a
count
variable
(generated
by
the
compiler)
1s set to the negative of the calculated count.
At the end

of each DO loop cycle,
added

the

index

the value of the

variable,

If the number of specified

cycle

the loop

One execution of a DO
initial values of the

and

increment

the

parameter

count variable

(M3)

1is

incremented.

iterations have not been performed,

another

initiated.

loop range is always performed regardless of
index variable and the indexing parameters.:

the

Exit from
a
DO
1loop
operation
on
completion
of
the
number
of
iterations
specified
by
the
1loop
count is referred to as a normal
exit.
In a normal
exit,
<control
passes
to
the
first
executable
statement after the DO loop range terminal statement, and the value of
the DO statement index variable is considered undefined.

Exit from a DO loop may also be accomplished by a transfer of
by

range

9.4.]1

statement

the

Nested

within

statement

the DO loop range

(Paragraph 9.4.3).

Statements

One or more DO statements may be contained, i.e., nested,
range of another

statements.

control

to a statement outside the

DO statement.

The

following
-

rules govern
'

within

the

the nesting

CONTROL STATEMENTS

The range of each nested DO statement must be entirely within
the

range

the

containing

statement.

Example

vValid

Invalid

DO 1

DO
1

2
DO

DO 2

The

ranges

nested

The range of
DO 2 is outside
that of DO 1.

statements

cannot

overlap.

ranges

Example

Valid

Invalid

DO 1

DO
1

2
DO

DO 2

DO 3

[

3
DO

—EEEE

The

loop DO 2 and
DO

overlap.

More than one DO loop within a nest of DO loops
may
end
on
the same statement.
When this occurs, the terminal statement
is considered to belong to the innermost
DO
statement
that
ends
on that statement.
The statement label 4 of the shared
terminal statement cannot be used in any GO TO or
arithmetic
IF statement that occurs anywhere other than within the range
of the DO statement to which it belongs.
Example

DO
4

All

DO 4
DO 4

the DO statements

share the same terminal
statement, however, it
belongs

4
DO

CONTROL

Extended

9.4.2

STATEMENTS

Range

The extended range of
a
DO
statement
1is
defined
as
the
set
of
statements
that execute between the transfers out of the innermost DO
statement of a set of nested DOs and the transfer back into the
range
of
this
1innermost
DO
statement.
The extended range of a nested DO
statement is as follows:

DO
1
2
DO

DO3

— (out)

(in)

Extended Range

The

following
1.

rules

govern

the

use

statement

extended

range:

The transfer out statement for an
extended
range
operation
must be contained by the most deeply nested DO statement that
contains the location to which the return transfer is
to
be
made.

A transfer into the range of a DO statement is permitted only
if
the
transfer
1is made from the extended range of that DO
statement.

The

extended

statement.

range

a DO

statement must

not

contain

another

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

The extended range of a DO statement cannot change the
variable or indexing parameters of the DO statement.

You may use and

return from a subprogram within

1index

extended

range.

Permitted Transfer Operations

9.4.3

The following rules govern the transfer of program control
a DO statement

range or

ranges of nested DO statements:

the

at
permitted
1is
A transfer out of the range of any DO loop
any
time.
When
such a transfer executes, the value of the
the
as
controlling DO statement's index variable is defined
current

value.

A transfer into the range of a DO statement is

You may use and return from

is made

range

from the

extended

nested

subprogram

permitted

1if

DO statement.

from

within

the

loop,

extended range loop (in which you leave the loop via a GO
TO,
execute
statements
elsewhere,
and
return
to the
loop).

The following examples

illustrate the

from

the

ranges

nested

transfer

statements:

Transfers

D2
—_—

extended range

5
Invalid

the

loop,

original

within

range

any:

valid

from within

Transfer

D2
D3

operations

permitted

CONTROL

9.5

CONTINUE

STATEMENTS

STATEMENT

You may place CONTINUE
statements
anywhere
1in
the
source
program
without
affecting
the
program
sequence
of
execution.
CONTINUE
statements are commonly used as the last statement of a
DO
statement
range
1in
order
to
avoid
ending with a GO TO, PAUSE, STOP, RETURN,
arithmetic IF,
another
DO
statement,
or
a
logical
IF
statement
containing
any of the foregoing statements.
Write this statement as
12

CONTINUE

Example

In the following sequence, the labeled CONTINUE statement

legal

termination

for

the

range

the DO loop.

provides

ITEM=1,1000

STOCK=NVNTRY (ITEM)
CALL

UPDATE

(STOCK,TALLY)

IF(ITEM.EQ.LAST)

9.6

CONTINUE

STOP

20,

HEADING,PAGENO

STATEMENT

Execution of the STOP statement causes the
execution
of
the
object
program
to
be
terminated
and
returns
control to the DECsystem-10
Monitor.
A descriptive message may optionally be included in the STOP
statement to be output to your I/O terminal immediately before program
execution is terminated.
Write this statement like this:
STOP

CONTROL

9.7

PAUSE

STATEMENTS

STATEMENT

a PAUSE statement suspends the execution
Execution of

program and gives you the option to:

Continue execution of the program

Exit

The permitted forms of the PAUSE statements are:
1.

PAUSE

the

object

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

'CONTROL STATEMENTS

CHAPTER 10
I/0

10.1

STATEMENTS

DATA TRANSFER OPERATIONS

FORTRAN-10

processor

1I/0

storage

statements

(core)

permit

the

and peripheral

transfer

data

devices and/or

between

storage

locations.

Data in the form of logical records may be transferred
b
equential,
.
The areas in core from which data is to be taken during
e)
operations and into which data is stored during input
operations are specified by:

(read)

The

A list in the I/0 statement that initiated
the transfer

Between

type

and

specified

arrangement

format specificati

The

following

10.2

TRANSFER MODES

required

The

sections

initiate

characteristics

statement

transferred

data

the

requirements

and

the external

may

statements

and

eij

describe

I/O

and

FORMAT

transfer operations.

the
are

medium.

specified

data

format

sequential,

described

1in

the

owing

paragraphs.

10.2.1

Sequential

Mode

Records are transferred during a sequential mode of operation
in
the
same
order they appear in the external data file.
Each I/O statement
executed
1in
a
sequential
mode
transfers
the
record
immediately
following

the last

record

transferred

10-1

from

the

accessed

source

file.

1/0 STATEMENTS

10.3

I/0 STATEMENTS,

BASIC FORMATS AND COMPONENTS

The majority of the I/0O
statements described
= in
this
chapter are
written in one of the following basic forms or in some modification of

Basic

‘

forms:

these

Statement

Forms

Use

where

Keyword

the

FORTRAN-10

= FORMAT statement number in

list

statement name

logical

(READ or WRITE)

unit number

the

currént

program

unit
or
the
name
of
an array that contains
desired format specifications

th
'

I/0 list

The following paragraphs provide details of the foregoing components.
10-2

I/0 STATEMENTS

10.3.1

1I/0 Statement

The

keywords

this

chapter

(names)

Keywords
of

the

FORTRAN-10

I/O

statements

are:

described

WRITE
PRINT

PUNCH

10.3.3
A

FORMAT

Statement

statement

References

contains

set

format

specifications

that

defines
the
structure
of
a
record and the form of the data fields
comprising the record.
Format specifications may also be stored in an
array
rather
than in a FORMAT statement.
(Refer to Chapter 13 for a
complete description of the FORMAT statement.)
The

execution

statement

specifications
to

assume

Records

I/0

statements

referred

data

causes

the

1is

form

formatting

and

that

name

the

structure

specified

under

that

the

do
a

the

referenced

of the
format

Conversely,

reference
records.

one-to-one

external

format

During

either

that

data

control

not

includes
array

and

records.

"unformatted"”

1locations,

FORMAT

transferred
statement

format

record
array.

specification
records

specification

with

are

transfers,

between
no

are

transferred

unformatted

correspondence

(device)

contains

internal

conversion

operations.

Unformatted
embedded

statement

the

"formatted"

transferred

(processor)

I/0
or

transferred

referred

number

files

control

are

binary

words;

the

files

divided

control

cannot prepare files of this type
files are for use only within the

words

into
are

records

invisible

without using
FOROTS.
FORTRAN-10 environment.

10-3

FORTRAN-10
to

you.

You

Unformatted

I/0 STATEMENTS

10-4

I/0 STATEMENTS

10-5

I1/0

STATEMENTS

1I/0 List

10.3.4

An I/0 list specifies
the
names
of
variables,
arrays,
and
array
elements
to
which input data is to be assigned or from which data is
to be output.
Implied
DO
constructs
(Paragraph
10.3.4.1),
which
specify
sets
of
array
elements, may also be included in I/O lists.
The number of items in a statement list determines the amount of
data
to be transferred during each execution of the statement.

10.3.4.1
Implied DO Constructs - When an array name is
given
1in
an
I/0
1list,
all
elements
of
+the
array are transferred in the order
described in Chapter 3 (Paragraph 3.5.3).
1If only a specific
set
of
array
elements
1is
involved,
they
may be specified in the I/O list
either individually or in the form of an implied DO construct.
Write implied DOs within parentheses in a format similar to that of DO
statements.
They
may
contain
one
or more variable, array, and/or
array element names, delimited by
commas
and
followed
by
indexing
parameters

that

The general

are defined

form of

for

implied

DO statements.

1is

(name (SL) ,I=M1,M2,M3)
where
array

name

the subscript
1list
element identifier

the index
subscript

M1l,M2,M3

the
indexing
respectively,
increment values
M3

array

control variable that may
represent
a
appearing in a preceding subscript list

parameters
that
specify,
the
initial,
terminal,
and
that control the range of I.
1If
(with its preceding comma), a value

omitted
assumed.

Examples

(A(S) ,S=1,5)

Specifies

A(3),
(A(2,S),5=1,10,2)

As stated previously,
variable

A(4),

first

five elements of

array A,

i.e.,

A(l),

the

A(2),

A(5).

Specifies

the

elements

Specifies

the

integers

1,2,3,4,

implied DO constructs may also

contain

A(2,5),

(I,I=1,5)

the

one-dimension

A(2,7),

A(2,9)

A(2,1),

A(2,3),

array A.

and

one

names.

Example

and

C must

integer

variables.

((A(B,C),B=1,10),C=1,10)
,I,J

Specifies a 10 X 10 set of elements
of array A, the location identified
by I, and the
1location
identified
by

10-6

1/0 STATEMENTS

You may also nest implied DO constructs.
one

or more

sets

indexing

Nested implied DOs may share

parameters.

Example

((A(J,K);J=l,5),D(K),K=l,10)
-

Specifies a5 X 10 set of

array

elements

and

array

the

elements

first

When you specify an array or set of array elements as either a storage
or transmitting area for I/0 purposes, the array elements involved are
accessed in ascending order with the
value
of
the
first
subscript
guantity
varying
most
rapidly
and
the
value
of
the
1last given
subscript increasing to its maximum value least rapidly.
For example,
the elements
of an array dimensioned as TAB(2,3) are accessed in the
order:

10.3.4.2
Formatted Record Handling - Data is processed
under
format
control
so
that
each
item
1in the I/0 list is matched with a field
descriptor in
the
FORMAT
statement.
If
the
end
of
the
FORMAT
specification
1is reached and more items remain in the I/0 list, a new
line or record is established and the data
processing
1is
restarted,
either:

1.
2.

at the first item in the FORMAT specification or,
(if parenthesized sets of FORMAT specifications exist

the

FORMAT

specification)

with

specification.

the

last

set within

the

within
FORMAT

On input, 1f the record is exhausted before
the
data
transfers
are
completed, the remainder of the transfer is completed as if the record
were extended with blanks.
See Section 13.2.2 for more details.

10-7

I/0

STATEMENTS

10-8

I/0

STATEMENTS

10-9

I1/0 STATEMENTS

10~-10

I/0 STATEMENTS

'10.5

READ S5TATEMENTS

READ statements transfer data from'peripheral devices

1into

specified

processor
storage
1locations.
The
permitted
forms of this type of
input statment permit READ statments to be used on both sequential and
random
access
transfer
modes
for
formatted,
unformatted,
list-directed, and NAMELIST-controlled data transfers.

10.5.1 ‘Sequential Formatted READ Transfers
Descriptions
of
the
READ . statements
that
sequential transfer of formatted data follow:
1.

Form:

Use:

Example:

2. Form:
Use:

READ

may

wused

for

the

(u,f)list

Input
data
from
logical
unit
u,
formatted
according
to
the
specification given in £, into
the
processor storage
locations
identified
1in
input

list.

READ

(10,555)TABLE(10,20) ,ABLE,BAKER,CHARL

READ (u, £)

Input the data from logical unit u directly 1into
either
a
Hollerith
(H)
field
descriptor
or a
literal field descriptor given within
the
format
specifications

the

referenced

FORMAT statement.

If the
referenced
FORMAT
statement
does
not
contain
either
of
the foregoing types of format
field descriptors, the input
record
1is
skipped.
If
a reqguired
field descriptor is present, its
contents are replaced
by the input data.
Example:

READ(15,101)

10-11

I/0 STATEMENTS

Form:
- Use:

READ

Input the data from the READ default device
(card
reader) directly into either a Hollerith (H) field
descriptor or a
1literal
field descriptor
given
within the format specifications of the referenced
FORMAT
statement.
If
the
referenced
FORMAT
statement does not contain either
of the foregoing
types
of
format
field
descriptors,
the
1input
record is skipped.
If a required field descriptor
is present, its contents are replaced by the input
Adata.

Example:
4.

Form:
Use:

READ

f,list

Input the data from the READ default device

f.
Example:

10.5.2

(card

reader)
into
the
©processor
storage
1locations
identified in the input list.
The input
data
1is
formatted according to the specifications given in
‘

ARRAY

(20,30)

Sequential Unformatted Binary READ Transfer

You may use only the following form of
the
READ statement
sequential transfer of unformatted input FORTRAN binary data:
Form:
Use:

READ

for

(u)list

Input one logical record of data from logical unit
u
into
processor
storage
as
the
wvalue of the
location

binary

WRITE

identified

files

in list.

output

statement by

this

You may

read

If
you
wuse
the
unformatted input

READ (10)

only

by a FORTRAN-10 unformatted
type of READ statement.

NOTE

Example:

the

form
READ
(u) ,
one
record will be skipped.

BINFIL (10,20,30)

I/0

STATEMENTS

10-13

I/0 STATEMENTS

10.6

SUMMARY OF

Table

10-2

READ

STATEMENTS

summarizes
the various forms

Tyoe of Transfer

10-2

Table

Summary of

of the READ statements.

Transfer

Sequential
Formatted

READ Statements

READ(u,f)list

f)
READ(u,

READ

f,list

READ

10-14

Mode

I/0 STATEMENTS

10-15

I/0

STATEMENTS

WRITE STATEMENTS

10.8

WRITE
statements
transfer
data
from
specified
locations
to
peripheral
devices.
The
variou
statement enable it to be
wused
1in
sequential,
modes for formatted,
data transfers.

10.8.1

10.8.2

storage
i

unformatte
-

Sequential Formatted WRITE Transfers

You may use the
following
forms
of
the
sequential transfer of formatted data:

processor

Form:

WRITE

statement

for

the

WRITE(u,f)list

Use:

Output

the wvalues

of the

processor

storage

Example:

WRITE(O06,500)0U0T(10,20)
,A,B

Form:

WRITE f,list

Use:

Output
the wvalues
©0of
the
processor
storage
locations identified in list to the default device
(line printer).
Convert and
arrange
the
output
data according to the specifications given in f.

Example:

WRITE

Form:

WRITE f

Use:

Output
the
contents
of
any Hollerith
(H)
literal (''"). field descriptor(s) contained by f
the default device (line printer).
1If neither
the foregoing
types of
field specifications
found in £, no output transfer is performed.

Example:

WRITE

locations
identified in
1list
into
the
associated
with
1logical
unit
u.
Convert
arrange
the
output
data
according
to
specifications given
in f£.

file
and
the

10,SEND(5,10),A,B,C

|
or
to
of
is

Sequential Unformatted Binary WRITE-Transfer'

You may use the
sequential

following

transfer

Form:
Use:

Example:

form

unformatted

WRITE

(u)list

OQutput

the

the WRITE

statements

for

the

data:

wvalues

the

processor

storage

locations
identified
in 1list
into
the
file
associated with logical unit u.
No conversion
or
arrangement of output data is performed.
WRITE(12)1TAB(20,20) ,5UMS(10,5,2)

10-16

I1/0

STATEMENTS

10-17

I1/0 STATEMENTS

10.9

SUMMARY

Table

10-3

WRITE

summarizes

STATEMENTS

the

various

Summary

Type

forms

Table

the WRITE

10-3

of WRITE

Statements

Transfer

Transfer
Sequential

Formatted

WRITE(u,f)list
WRITE f,list
WRITE

statements.

10-18

Mode

I/0 STATEMENTS

10.11

STATEMENT

The PRINT statement
causes
data
from
specified
processor
storage
locations
to
be output on the standard output device (line printer).
Use
this
statement only
for
sequential
formatted
data
transfer
operation;
write it in either of the three following forms:
1.

Form:

fi,list

Use:
|

Output
the
wvalues
of
the
Processor
storage
locations
identified
by the contents of list to
the line printer.
The values
output
are
to
be
formatted
and
arranged according
to the format
specifications given
in f.

Example:

55,TABLE(10,20),I,J,K

Form:

*,list

Use:

Output
the wvalues
of
the
processor
storage
locations
1identified
by
the contents of list to
the line printer.
The conversion
of
each
datum
from
internal
to external
form
1is performed
according to the type of the
1list
wvariable
from
which the datum is taken.

Example:

_PRINT

*,C'X)Y'ITAB(IO'lO)

Form:

Use:

Output

the

contents of

Hollerith (H)
line printer.

the

FORMAT

statement

or literal field descriptors to the
1If neither an H nor a literal field

10-19

STATEMENTS

I/0

descriptor
statement,
Example:

1is
present 1in
the referenced
no operation is performed.

FORMAT

PRINT 55

The second form of the PRINT statement 1is
particularly
wuseful
when
ACCEPT f statements to cause desired data (comments or
with
employed
headings) to be inserted into reports at program execution time.
Example

The

sequence.

FORMAT
(' END OF

ROUTINE')

55
"PRINT

results in the printing of the phrase "END OF ROUTINE"
on

printer.

PUNCH

10.12

the

line

STATEMENT

The PUNCH statement

causes

data

in one of

following

from

specified

processor

storage

processor

storage

locations
to be output to the system standard paper tape punch.
Use
this statement only for sequential formatted data transfers;
write it
l.

the

three

PUNCH

Form:

Use:

Exanple:

the

format

specifications given

£f.

10,TABLE(10,20),I,J,K

PUNCH *,list
~

list to
values

-are to be formatted
and arranged according

the

PUNCH

2. Form:

Output

the

wvalues

of
- the

processor

storage

locations
identified
by
the contents of list to
the paper tape punch unit.
The conversion of each
datum
from internal to external form is performed
according to the type of the
1list wvariable
from
which the datum is taken.
-

Example:
Form:

values

locations
identified
by
the contents of
the standard paper tape punch
wunit. The

~output

f,list

OQutput the

Use:

forms:

PUNCH *,I,A,B,M,TAB(5,10)
-

Use:

f
PUNCH

Output
the
contents
of
the
referenced
FORMAT
statement
Hollerith
(H)
or
literal
field
descriptors to the standard paper tape punch unit.
If
neither an H nor a literal field descriptor is
present
in the
referenced
operation is performed.

FORMAT

statement,
,

The third form of the PUNCH
statement
is particularly useful
when
employed
in- conjunction
with
an
ACCEPT
f
statement
to
cause
user—-entered data (comments or headings)
to be added to an output file
at

program

execution

time.

10-20

I/0 STATEMENTS

10-21

I/0 STATEMENTS

10-22

I1/0 STATEMENTS

10-23

I/0 STATEMENTS

10-24

I/0 STATEMENTS

10.16

SUMMARY OF

I/0 STATEMENTS

Table 10-4 on
pages
10-26
and
10-27
presents
permitted forms of the FORTRAN-10 I/0O statement.

10-25

summary

all

Tetjusnbag10

Tet3iusnbeg

JLITYM

aNId

dvdaddd

mo_mumgasm

aviad

/TeIrtisujaunsbuwsagjlelis AaLvvTaapdyoI3dM1yI3SARTTA SIWTSI!To’!gIT!’
O0T-NVYdILI0d O/Isjuswailels
I/0 STATEMENTS

IaSTva(Iy‘n) AILSTIV(FUIM‘n)

10-26

burtuieluod3JewiIOo]UOTJRWIOJUT

F jusawslels Iaqunu JO LYWYOd

KT3jeuds1abuoaTjtels3Tu10nis2auwqeuiuneuuJOwongAeJiOe0T-NVYIMOd0/Isjuawalels
I/0 STATEMENTS

|ITAHeSOrTjNuAsun’4boFas

10-27

NAMELIST STATEMENTS

11-2

NAMELIST

STATEMENTS

11-3

12-1

FILE

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

12-2

FILE CONTROL

STATEMENTS

12-3

FILE

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

12-4

FILE

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

12-5

CONTROL

12-

STATEMENTS

FILE

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

12-7

FILE

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

12-8

FILE

CONTROL

STATEMENTS

12-9

FILE

CONTROL STATEMENTS

12-10

FILE CONTROL STATEMENTS

12-11

CHAPTER
FORMAT

13.1

Use

STATEMENT

INTRODUCTION

FORMAT

statements

during

1in

data

fields

FORMAT

PROGRAM,

The

FUNCTION,

precede

must

may

only

the

label

data

each

appear

that,
specify
record.

almost

placement

SUBPROGRAM,

END

the

together
the forms

anywhere

BLOCK

statements

that

are

DATA

(Refer

1list

The

1I/0

FORMAT

with
the
1list
of the data and

FORTRAN-10

source

that

they

statements;

Section

I/0

operations.

restrictions

statement.

FORMAT

with

transfer

descriptors
statements,

comprise

statements

program.
they

that

conjunction

formatted

statements contain field
items
of associated I/0

You

and

that

2.4.)

statements

can

reference

them.

13.1.1

The

FORMAT

general

Statement,

form

General

FORMAT

Form

statement

follows:

FORMAT(SAl,sA2,...,5An/SB1,SB2,...,SBn/...)

where

SAl

= the required statement label (which
be referenced by I/O statements).
through

SAn

individual

field

descriptor

can

only

sets

and

SBl

through

SBn

In the foregoing statement form, the individual field descriptors
delimited
by
commas
(,).
Field
descriptor
sets
and records
delimited by slashes (/).
For example,
a
FORMAT
statement
of
form:

are
are
the

FORMAT (SA1,SA2/5B1,SB2/5C1,SC2)
contains

format

containing

two

specifications
field

Adjacent slashes
to
be
skipped
output.

For

descriptor

(//)
in
during

example,

for

three

records

a FORMAT statement specify
input
or 1s to consist of
FORMAT

with

each

record

sets.

statement

FORMAT (SAl1,SA2///SB1,SB2)

13-1

the

that a
record
an empty record

form:

1is
on

FORMAT

STATEMENT

specifies four records are to be processed;
third

records

are

to be

You may represent

however, the

skipped.

repeated

field

descriptors

second

groups

and

of field

descriptors by
wusing
a
repeat
form.
Indicate the repetition of a
single field descriptor by preceding the descriptor
with
an
1integer
constant that
specifies
how
many
times
the
descriptor
is to be
repeated.
For example, a FORMAT statement of the form:

FORMAT(SAl,SA2,SA3,SAl,SA2,SA3,SAl,SA2,SA3)

- may

written

FORMAT
(3 (SAl1,SA2,SA3))

You may nest the repeat forms of field descriptors
example, a FORMAT statement of the form:

to
|

any depth

For

FORMAT (SA1,SA2,SA2,SA3,SA1,SA2,5A2,5A3)
may also be written

the form:

FORMAT
(2 (5A1,25A2,5A3))

The following pafagraphs discuss the fiafiner in whicfi you may use the
foregoing

statement

involved.

13.2

forms

and

the

effect

FORMAT

each

has

the data

FORMAT statement descriptors describe

Descriptors

the

record

structure of

rFw.d

Floating point

numeric

field

descriptors

rGw.d

riw

Integer

field

descriptor

rLw

Loglcal

field

descrlptor

}

.Alphanumerlc

data

rRw

kHs

descrlotor

}

Alphanumerlc data in a FORMAT statement fleld

'text'

descriptor

}

Field formatting descriptors

field

Numerical scale factorddeSCriptor

Record delimiter

the

the conversion,
The
following
-

Comments

rEw.d

"rAw

DESCRIPTORS

data,
the format
of
fields
within the record, and
scaling, and editing of data within specific
fields.
descriptors can be used with FORTRAN-10:
o

rbw.d

FORMAT

STATEMENT

where

an optional unsigned integer representing a fepeat- count.
This

times.

=
-

option

enables

an optional

integer

number

characters

field

constant

descriptor

to be

repeated

representing the width

contained)

the

external

(total
form

the field
being
described.
All
characters,
including
digits,
decimal
points,
signs,
and
blanks that are to
comprise the external form of the field, must be
included

in the value of w.

an optional unsigned
integer
specifying
the
number
of
fractional digits that
are
to
appear 1in ‘the external
representation of the field being described. Note that
w
must be specified if .d is included in the descriptor.

an unsigned integer
be processed during

represents a string of ASCII (alphanumetic) characters.

signed

integer

specifying the number of characters
the transfer
of alphanumeric data.

constant

(plus

signs

are

optional).

The characters A, D, E, F, G, H, I, L, O, P, and R indicate the manner
of
conversion
and
editing
to
be
performed
between
the internal
(processor) and external representations of the data within a specific
field;
these
<characters are referred
to as conversion codes. Table
13-1 gives the FORTRAN-10.conversion codes and a brief description
of
function of

the

each.

Table

13-1

FORTRAN-10 Conversion Codes

Code

Function

A
‘D
E
F
G
H
I
L

Transfer alphanumeric data
Transfer real data with a D exponent(1l)
Transfer real data with an E exponent(1)
Transfer real data without an exponent
Transfer integer, real, complex, or logical
Transfer literal data=
|
'
|
Transfer integer data
Transfer logical data

P
R

Numerical scaling factor
Transfer alphanumeric data

‘1.

An exponent of 0 is assumed if none is given.

The use Qf commas to delineate
specification

'is

example,

written

optional

format
1long

déscriptors ‘within a

ambiguity
-

FORMAT (3X,A2)

can

data

FORMAT (3XA2)

format

exists.

For

'FORMAT STATEMENT

'Since interpretation of a format specification 'is
the spec1flcatlon

1left

associative,

FORMAT(IZZ,IS)

can be written as

| FORMAT(IZZIS)‘"
However, a comma is- requlred when you w1sh to specify
FORMAT (I2,2I5)

The,following paragraphs provide detailed!desoripffonsiof!the

various

types of format descriptors,
the manner in which they are written and
employed, and their use in FORMAT statements.

13.2.1

Numeric Fleld Descrlptors

The forms of the fleld descrlptors used to
conversion of numeric-:-data
Description

Dw.d
Ew.d

o
-

Ew.d,Ew.d

Type

‘

Data Used

For

the

real

and

imaginary

datum

Fw.d
Fw.d,Fw.d

specify

thei format

and

For

Double-precision data with a D exponent
Real data with
an E exponent
-

follow.

parts

complex

Real or double-precision data without an exponent
For the real and imaginary parts of a complex
datum

Integer

data

Gw.d,Gw.d

Real or double-precision
data
For integer (or logical) data
For the real and 1mag1nary parts

datum

TheG conversion code may‘ béf nsed, for
but

octal

numeric data

Examples

Consider the following program.segment:
INTEGER I1,I2
- REAL R1,R2,R3
DOUBLE PRECISION
I1

506

13.1

506001.0

13.0

-504.0

complex
|

" NOTE
all

:
D1,D2

12 =8
Rl = 506.0

13-4

types.

FORMAT

Table 13-2
formatted

describes

the

STATEMENT

actions

performed by

WRITE statements on the data given in the

several

types

foregoing program

segment.

Action

Field

Item| Descriptor | Sample
Form

Descriptor

Table 13-2
Descriptors

- WRITE

Dw.d
Ew.d
Fw.d

D8 .2
E8.2
F5.2

WRITE(-,-)D1|
WRITE(-,-)R1|
WRITE(-,-)R2|

7
8
9
10

Gw.d
Gw.d
Gw.d
Gw

G8.2
G8.2
G8.2
G5

WRITE(-,-)D2{
| WRITE(-,-)R3|
- WRITE(-,-)R2|
WRITE(-,-)I1|

Iw
Iw

where:

I5
12

WRITE(-,-)I1l|
WRITE(-,=-)I1l|

Data

External

Statement
Using the
Sample
Descriptor

1
2
3

4
5

Sample

Form

External

of Sample | Appearance
Field
of Sample
Described | Data

Z.nnD
Z.nnE
aa.nn

aaaan
an

nn | 0.18D+02
nn|
0.51E+03
18.10

BpB506
ko

Z.nnD nn|
Z.nnE nn|
aa.nn
aaan

-.50D+02
0.51E+06
»prBle.lo
PPB506

n represents a numeric character.

2 representsAeither a - or 0. (Note that if‘ n-d>6,

negative

number

a represents a digit, leading blank (%)'or
sign depending

cannot

the

output.)

numeric

output.

minus‘

Notes:

2.
3.

In Item 1,'the value D1 has only two significant

digits

In Item 2, since R1 has 3 signifiéant'digité, it

In Item

the

descriptor

transfer

was

not made.

8 and 9, the relationship between
G and
fixed
real data is discussed in Paragraph 13.2.3.

d=2,

so no

fit

rounding will

into

specifies

the

occur

input.

specified field.

width

(w)

part

format

and

rounded

an
exact
field
that
permits no rounding of its
If the w specification is too small for the
datum
contents.
to
be transferred, asterisks are output to indicate that the

Items

floating

and

In Items 1, 2, 3, 7, and 8, the D and E exponent prefixes are

optional. 1in
the
external form
of
the
floating point
constants.
For example, 1.1lE+3 may be written as 1.1+3.
external
Table 13-3 summarizes the internal and
specified by the numeric format conversion. code.

13-5

forms

the

data

FORMAT

STATEMENT

Table

13-3

Numeric Field

Internal

Form

Codes

Conversion
|

Code

External
1

Form

Binary floating—point

Binaryfloatihg—point

Decimal floating-point with E

Decimal

Decimal integer

double-precision

Binary floating-point

Binary integer

" One of the following:
single-precision
~
binary floating-point,
~ binary integer, binary
logical,
or binary
complex
,
|

)

Decimal floating-point with
D

exponent

fixed-point

Single-precision decimal
floating-point, decimal
|
~integer, logical (T or F), or
| complex (two decimal
»
|
floating-point numbers),
depending upon the internal
form

Complex quantities transfer as two independent real
gquantities.
The
format
specification
for
complex
quantities consists of either two
successive
real
field
descriptors
or
one
repeated
real
field
descriptor.

For

example,

the_statement

FORMAT (2E15.4,2(F8.3,F8.5))

may transfer up to three cbmplex quantities.
The equivalent of the_foregoing,stétement isFORMAT (E15.4,E15.4,F8.3,F8.5,F8.3,F8.5)

13.2.2

Interaction of Field Descriptors With I/0 Variables

The execution of an I/0 statement
that specifies
a
formatted
data
transfer operation initiates format control.The actions performed by
format control depend on information provided by the elements
of
the
I/0
statement's
1list
of
variables
and
the field descriptors that
comprise the referenced FORMAT statement's format specifications.

In processing each FORMAT controlled I/0 statement

that has

I/O

list,
FORTRAN-10
scans
the
contents of
the 1list
and the format
specifications in step.
Each time another variable or
array
element
name
1is
obtained
from the
1list,
the
next field specification is
obtained from the format specification.
If the end
of the
format
specification is reached and more items remain
in the list,
a new line
or record is established and the scan process is restarted,
either
at
the
first item in the format specification or, if parenthesized,
sets
of format specifications
exist within the format specification, with
the

last

set within

the

format

specification.

13-6

FORMAT

When the

control proceeds to the next statement

is exhausted,

I/O list

STATEMENT

the program, but not before the FORMAT statement is scanned either
in
(That
to "its end or to the next variable transfer format descriptor.

FORMAT statement is scanned past slashes, literal constants,
the
is,
past
not
but
descriptors,
Hollerith field descriptors, and spacing

data

field

A record

descriptors.)

is terminated by one of the following:
in the FORMAT specification

a slash

the delimiting

a lack of

a lack of Hollerith
FORMAT

right parentheses,

items

in the

the FORMAT statement

I/O list

1literal

field

descriptors

1in

the

statement

On input, an additional record is read only when a single slash, /, is
A record is skipped when two
statement.
FORMAT
the
in
encountered

the
slashes, //, are encountered or a slash is followed by the end of
a
statement finishes a record by
FORMAT
the
If
statement.
FORMAT
1input
the
slash or the end of the FORMAT statement, any data left in
If the input record is exhausted before the data
ignored.
is
record
transfers are completed, the remainder of the transfer is completed as
if

the

record were

extended with blanks.

On output, an additional record is written only when a
encountered
1in
the
FORMAT
statement.
If
a
pair
slashes, //, or a single slash followed
by
the
end
statement is encountered, an empty record is written.

13.2.3

slash,
/,
1is
of consecutive
of
the
FORMAT

General Numeric Conversion Code

You may use the G conversion code in field descriptors for the
format
control of real, double-precision, integer, logical, or complex data.

With the exception of real and
double-precision
data,
the
type
of
conversion
performed by a type G field descriptor depends on the type
of its corresponding I/0 list variable.
In
the
case
of
real
and
double-precision
data, the kind of conversion performed is a function

of the external magnitude of the datum being transferred.
Table
13-4
illustrates
the
conversion performed for various ranges of magnitude
(external form) of real and double-precision data.

13.2.4

Numeric

Fields with

Scale

You may add scale factors to D,
descriptors.

The

scale

factor

Factors

has

the

and G conversion codes in
form

field

npP

where n is a signed integer (+
1is
optional)
and
P
identifies
the
operation.
When
used,
a scale factor is added as a prefix to field
descriptors.

13-7

FORMAT

STATEMENT

Examples
-2PF10.5
1PE8.2

When you add a scale factor to an type F field descriptor (or
type
if
the
external
field
1is
a
fixed point decimal) a power of 10
specified

External

that

Form of Number

(Internal

Form)*10**(scale

For example, assuming the data involwed to be the
the field descriptor

factor)

real number

26.451,

F8.3

produces the external

field

BrY26.451

Table

Descriptor

13-4

Conversion of Real and Double-Precision
Data According to Magnitude

Magnitude of Data in
External Form (M)

- Equivalent Method of
Conversion Performed

0.1
M<l]
1
M<10

F(w=-4) .d,4X
F(w-4).(d-1)
,4X

10d-2
M<104-1
10d-1
M<10d
ALL OTHERS

F(w=-4).1,4X
F(w-4) .0,4X
Ew.d

NOTE

In all numeric
field
conversions,
the
field
width
(w)
vyou specify should be
large
enough
to
include
the
decimal
point,
sign,
and exponent character in
addition to the number
of
digits.
If
the
specified
width
1is
too
small to
accommodate the
converted
number,
the
field will be filled with asterisks (*).
If the number converted
occupies
fewer
character positions than specified by w,
it will be right-justified in the
field
and
leading blanks will be used to fill
the

field.

13-8

G
is

FORMAT STATEMENT

The

addition of

the

scale

factor

-1P

-1PF8.3

produces

the

external

field

BBB2.645

When you

add

scale

factor

to D,

and

(external

field

not

decimal
fixed-point) type field descriptors, it multiplies the number
by the specified power of ten and the exponent is changed accordingly.

In input operations, type F (and type G,
if
the
external
field
1is
decimal
fixed-point)
conversions are the only ones affected by scale
factors.

Once
zero.
Wwhen you specify no scale factor, it is understood to be
you specify a scale factor, however, it holds for all subsequent types

specification
D, E, F, and G field descriptors within the same format
unless
another scale factor is specified.
A scale factor 1s reset to
zero when you specify a scale factor of zero.
effect on I and O type field descriptors.

Scale factors

When you add a scale factor to a D or E field descriptor,
a power of 10 so that the external form of the number has
multiplied by the specified power of 10;
its
exponent

have

it specifies
its mantissa
1is
adjusted

accordingly.

For

example,

the

field

assuming

the data

involved

to be

the

real

number

12.493,

the number of significant digits

printed

descriptor

E11.3

produces

the

external

field

BP0 .125E+02

the

addition of

The

scale

factor

2PE11.3

produces

the

external

field

bbl2.49E+00

With a scale factor of
by

format

the

zero,

form

Ew.d
or

Dw.d

is the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.

For a negative scale factor
nP,
for
d<n<0,
there
will
be
ABS(n)
leading zeros and d-ABS(n) significant digits after the decimal point,
for a total of d digits after the decimal point.
If n -d, there
will
be d insignificant digits (zeros) to the right of the decimal point.

1f the scale

factor nP is

positive,

for

0<n<d+2

significant
digits
to
the
1left
of
the
decimal
significant digits to the right of the decimal point

13-9

there

point
(for a

will

and d-n+l
total
of

FORMAT

d+1

significant

digits

and

decimal

digits).

n-d-1

insignificant

STATEMENT

n>d+2,

trailing

there will be d+1 significant
zeros

the

1left

the

point.

"If the data to be printed is 12.493,

these formats produce results

follows:

FORMAT

OUTPUT

SIGNIFICANT

REASON

DIGITS

E15.3
1PE15.3
-1PE15.3
2PE15.3
-3PE15.3

bbbbbb0.125E+02
bbbbbbl.249E+01
bbbbbb.012E+03
bbbbbbl2.49E+00
bbbbbb0.000E+05

4PE15.3
6PE15.3

13.2.5

Logical

3
4
3
4
0

bbbbbbl1249.E-02
bbbb124900.E-04

Field

4
4

n=0
n<d+2
-d<n
n<d+2
n -d

n<d+2
n d+2

Descriptors

You may transfer logical
to numeric data transfer

data under format control in a manner
by use of the field descriptor

similar

where L is the control character and w is an
1integer
field
width.
The data is transmitted as the value of
logical variable in the associated input/output list.

specifying
the
a corresponding

On input, the first non-blank character in the logical data field must
be
T
or
F,
the value of the logical variable is stored in the list
variable as true or false, respectively.
If
the
entire
1input
data
field is blank or empty, a value of false is stored.

On output, w minus 1 blanks followed by T or F will be output
value of the logical variable is true or false, respectively.

13.2.6

Variable Numeric

the

Field Widths

Several of the conversion codes are acceptable
without
field
width
specifications,
the
specification so that can be omitted(l).

1in
FORMAT
statements
w.d
portion
of
the

On input, the conversion codes D, E, F, G, I, L, and O are
acceptable
without
field
width specifications.
The field begins with the first
non-blank character
encountered
and
ends
with
the
first
1illegal
character
in
the
given
field.
(Blanks
and tabs also terminate a
field.)
Note
that for
conversion
code
L
(logical
data),
all
consecutive
alphabetics
following
a
T
(true)
or an F (false) are
considered part of the field and are ignored.
In
succeeding
fields
the
input
stream
is
scanned
until
a
non-blank
character
1is
encountered.
If the character is a
comma
(,),
the
next
field
1is
skipped,
and
the
following
input
field
begins with the character
following the comma.
Any character other than a comma is
assumed
to
be the first character in the next input field.
Null fields are

given,

w must

also

specified.
13-10

FORMAT

STATEMENT

denoted by successive commas optionally separated by blanks
or
tabs.
For
to a fixed-field input of blanks.
equivalent
1s
field
null
A

source

the

example,

code

READ 1, X, Y, Z2, L, I,
FORMAT (3F, L, I, A3)

follows

with data

,l.OE+5,,TRUEXXXlfibfihABC
in

results
X
Y
z

=0.0
= 1.0E+5
= 0.0

TRUE

'ABC'

Note that if a comma is included in the input data after the XXX1
|
pbefore the blanks, i.e., the data is

,, TRUEXXX1 , BBBPBABC

,1.0E+5
then J

'Bpp’

On output,

the format codes A,

acceptable without field width specifications.
are

and

are

The following defaults

assumed:

Format Code

A
D
E
F
G
G
I
L
O
R
R

13.2.7

single-precision

double-precision

single-precision
double-precision

Assumed Default
for

KAlO

for

KI10,KL1O

AlO0
D25.18
E15.7
F15.7
Gl15.7
G25.18
I15
L15
015
R5
R10

Al0
D25.16
E15.7
F15.7
Gl5.7
G25.16
I15
L15
015
R5
R10

Alphanumeric Field Descriptors

You may accomplish the formatted transfer of alphanumeric
data
1in
a
manner similar to the formatted transfer of numeric data by use of the
field descriptors Aw and Rw, where A and R are the control
characters
and w is the number of characters in the field.
The A and R descriptors both transfer alphanumeric data into or from a
A
input/output list depending on the I/O operation.
an
in
variable
list variable may be of any type.
READ

(6,5)

FORMAT

For

(A4)

13-11

example,

. FORMAT STATEMENT
causes four alphanumeric characters
to be read from unit6 and

stored

in the variable V.

The A
descriptor
deals
with
wvariables
containing
left-justified,
blank-filled
characters;
the
R
descriptor deals with variables
containing right-justified,
=zero-filled
<characters.
The following
paragraphs
summarize
the
result of alphanumeric data transfer (both
internal and external representations) using the A and R
descriptors.
These
paragraphs
assume
that
w
represents
the
field width and m
represents the total number of characters possible in - the wvariable.
Double
©precision
variables
contain 10 characters (m=10);
all other
variables contain 5 (m=5).
|
A Descriptor

INPUT, where w>m -- The rightmost
m characters of the
field
are read in and stored left-justified and blank-filled
in the
associated variable.

INPUT, where w < m -- All w characters are read in and stored
left-justified and blank-filled
in the associated variable.

OUTPUT,

where

w>m

right-justified
blank-filled.

OUTPUT, where w < m
associated variable

the

characters

field.

The

-- The left
are output.

are

remainder

most
|

output

of the field

<characters
of
|
I

and

1is

the

R Descriptor

1. 1INPUT, where w>m -- TheAright most m characters of the field
‘are

read

associated

and

stored right-justified,

INPUT, where w <
right-justified,

OUTPUT, where w>m —justified

1in

the

m characters

field.

The

Transferring

-- The right most
are output.

Alphanumeric

are

remainder
|

OUTPUT, where w < m
associated variable

13.2.8

output

and

the

field

characters

right

blank

the

Data

You may transmit alphanumeric data directly into or
’

in the

m -- All w characters
are read in and stored
zero-filled in the associated wvariable.

filled.

zero-filled

variable.

from

rsion,

the

FORMAT

In H-conversion, the alphanumeric string is specified in the form
nH,
where
H
1is
the
control
character
and
n
1is
the total number of
characters (including blanks)
in the string. For example, you may use
the - following
statement sequence to print
the words PROGRAM COMPLETE
on

the

device

LPT:

101

FORMAT

101

(17HPPROGRAMBCOMPLETE)

13-12

FORMAT

STATEMENT

Read and write operations of this type are initiated by I/O statements
a

reference

that

format

statement and a logical device, but do not

‘contain an I/O list (see preceding example).

Write transfers from a FORMAT statement

cause

the contents

the

statement field descriptor to be output to a specified logical device.
The contents of the field descriptor, however, remain unchanged.

Read transfers with a FORMAT statement cause the contents of the field
to be replaced by the characters input from the
involved
descriptors
specified logical device.

If
-justified.
Alphanumeric data is stored in a field descriptor 1eft
field has fewer characters than the field,
into a
input
the data

If the data
trailing blanks are added to fill the field.
the excess
field of the descriptor,
than the

larger

characters

input

lost.

are

1s'

rightmost

Examples

WRITE

101 FORMAT

(1,101)

(17HMPROGRAMMCOMPLETE)

cause the strlng PROGRAM COMPLETE to be output to the file
l.

Assuming the string START on device 1, the sequence
READ

(1,101)

101 FORMAT

(17HYPROGRAMPCOMPLETE)

WOuld,change the contents of statement 101 to

101 FORMAT

(17HSTARTbeMMMbwb%Mb)

101 FORMAT

(17HPPROGRAMPYCOMPLETE)

the

same

manner.

13-13

device

FORMAT

13.2.9

Mixed

You

may

place

the

format.

output

an
For

FORMAT

Numeric

and

STATEMENT

Alphanumeric

alphanumeric

field

example,

may

you

Fields

descriptor

use

the

among

other

fields

statement:

(I4,7HPFORCE=F10.5)

the

line:

BB22BFORCE=pBY17.68901
You

may omit the separating comma after
shown in the foregoing statement.

alphanumeric

format

field,

When you omit a comma delimiter from a
format
specification,
format
control
associates
as much information as possible with the leftmost
of the two field descriptors.

13.2.10

Multiple

To handle
different
For

group
field

example,

FORMAT
is

the

FORMAT

the

Specifications

of input/output records where
descriptors,
use
a slash to
statement

(3083)

first

FORMAT

record,

and

(I5,2F8.4)

for

the

second

You

may

omit

record.

separating

commas

appear

the

end

written

output

middle
records

of
a
format,
n-1
skipped on input.

Both

the

different records have
indicate a new record.

(308/15,2F8.4)

equivalent

for

Record

slash

and

skipped

the

when

beginning

use

slash.

format,

input.

blank

closing

you

When

records

are

parenthesis

When

blank

slashes

written

the

end

slashes

records

will

appear

output

the

n-1

format

indicate
the termination of a record.
If the list of an input/output
statement dictates that the transmission of data is to continue
after
the
closing
parenthesis
of
the
format
1is
reached, the format is
repeated,
1.

starting
that

with:

group

repeat

parenthesis
2.

level

zero

of
if

Thus, the statement
FORMAT

level

specification

the

lower

level

group,

higher

level

group

exists.

(F7.2,(2(E15.5,E15.4),17))

level

level
level

terminated

13-14

the

last

right

FORMAT

causes

STATEMENT

format

the

,17
2(E15.5,E15.4)

to be used
As a

The

after

the

first

record.

further

example,

FORMAT

(F7.2/(2(E15.5,E15.4)
,17))

first

record has

consider

the

statement

format

F7.2

‘and the next 5 records havéthe format
2(E15.5,E15.4)
,1I7

13.2.11

Record Formatting

You may use two
a

Field Descriptors

field descriptors,

record.

13-15

and

nX,

position

data

within

FORMAT STATEMENT

Examplé
statement

The

FORMAT

(5HPSTEP,I5,10X,2HY=,F7.3)

may be used to print the line

| STEPYBB2 SBBBRBRBPBY=F-3.872
13.2.12

$ Format Descriptor

A $ format descriptor at the end
of
an
output
FORMAT
is
wused
to
suppress
the carriage return at the end of the current record.
It is
mainly used on terminal output but will work on non-terminal
devices.
A $ format descriptor is ignored in input FORMATs and has no effect if
embedded in an output FORMAT.
The $ format
descriptor
must
be
the
next
format
descriptor to be processed when the corresponding output
list is exhausted for the
$ descriptor to have the defined effect.

'13.3

CARRIAGE CONTROL CHARACTERS

FOR PRINTING ASCII

RECORDS

You may use the first character of an
ASCII
record to control the
spacing
operations
of
the line printer or Teletype terminal printer

unit on which the
character
desired
ASCII record to be
character.
Table
FORTRAN-10 and the

record
1is
being printed.
Specify
the
control
by beginning the FORMAT field specification for the
output with lHa...where a is
the
desired
control
13-5 describes
the control characters permitted in
effect each has on the printing device.

13-16

FORMAT

STATEMENT

Table

13-5

FORTRAN-10 Print Control CharaCters
Effect

FORTRAN Character | Printer Character | Octal Value
space

0 zero

l.one

012

Skip to next

LF,LF

012

Skip a line

014

Form feed - go

to top of next

page

- Suppress

+ plus

skipping overprint the
line

13-17

" CHAPTER 14

DEVICE CONTROL STATEMENTS

14.1

INTRODUCTION

You may use the following device

control

statements

FORTRAN-10

programs:

source

REWIND

BACKSPACE
(1)

ENDFILE

The general form of the foregoing device control statements is
keyword
keyword

(u)

where

keyword

the

statement

is the
Table

FORTRAN-10

name

logical

device

number

(Chapter

The operations performed by the device control statement are

used
only
for
magnetic tape devices (MTA).
In FORTRAN-10,
the device control operations are simulated for disk devices.

The following paragraphs describe the
control

14.2

10,

10-1)

form

and

use

the

its

normally

however,

device

statements.

REWIND
- STATEMENT

Form:

REWIND

Use:

Move the file contained by
(load)

point,

©point.

this

the

statement has

device

medium
no

is already at

effect.

initial

its load

Subsequent

1. The results of these commands are unprédictable when used on

directed

and

NAMELIST-controlled

data.
14-1

READ

1list-

DEVICE

WRITE

CONTROL

statements

transfer
data
to
the medium mounted

Example:

14.4

BACKSPACE

REWIND

STATEMENTS

that

reference

or from the
on device u.

first

device

record

will

located

STATEMENT

Form:

BACKSPACE

Use:

Move

the medium

the

record

contained

that

on device

precedes

the

to the start

current

record.

of
the

preceding record prior
to execution
of this statement
was
an
endfile record, the endfile record becomes the
next record after execution.
If the current record
1is
the
first
record
of
the file, this statement has no
effect.

NOTE

You cannot use this statement for
files;
set up for random access, list-directed,
or NAMELIST-controlled I/0 operations.

Example:

14.5

BACKSPACE 16
-

END

FILE STATEMENT

Form:

END

Use:

Write

FILE

an endfile

record

in the

file

located

device

u.
The endfile record defines the end of the file that
contains it.
If an endfile record is reached during an
I/0
operation
initiated
by a statement that does not
contain an END= option, the operation
of
the
current

program
is terminated.
Example:

END

FILE

14-2

DEVICE CONTROL STATEMENTS

14.9

SUMMARY OF DEVICE CONTROL STATEMENTS

Table 14-1 summarizes the
control

form

and

statements

14-3

use

the

FORTRAN-10

device

DEVICE

Summary of

Statement

REWIND

Table

14-1

medium

its

Move medium back one

14-4

load

Statements

Use

Rewind

STATEMENTS

FORTRAN-10 Device Control

Form

BACKSPACE

CONTROL

point

record

CHAPTER
SUBPROGRAM

15.1

STATEMENTS

INTRODUCTION

Procedures you use repeatedly in a program may
be
written
once
and
then referenced each time you need the procedure.
Procedures that may
be referenced are either internal (written and
contained
within
the
program
in
which
they
are
referenced) or external (self-contained
executable procedures that may be compiled separately).
The kinds
of
FORTRAN-10 procedures that may be referenced are:
1.

statement

functions,

intrinsic

functions

external

functions,

subroutines.

(FORTRAN-10 defined

functions),

and

The
first
three
collectively
as
last category are

of
the
foregoing
categories
are
referred
to
functions or function procedures;
©procedures of the
referred to as subroutines or subroutine procedures.

15.1.1

Actual

Dummy

and

Arguments

Since you may reference subprograms at more than one point
throughout
a
program,
many
of the values used by the subprogram may be changed
each time it is used.
Dummy arguments in
subprograms
represent
the

actual
is

wvalues

Functions
the

used,

which

are

passed

the

subprogram when

called.

and

actual

subroutines
arguments

use

they

dummy

arguments

represent
and whether

indicate
the

the

actual

type

arguments

are variables, array elements, arrays, subroutine names, or the
names
of
external
functions.
Each
dummy
argument must be used within a
function or subroutine as if it were a variable, array, array element,

subroutine,

external

function

1identifier.

Dummy

arguments

are

given in an argument list associated with the identifier
assigned
to
the
subprogram;
actual
arguments are normally given in an argument
list associated with a call made to the desired subprogram.
(Examples
of argument lists are given in the following paragraphs.)

The position, number, and type of each dummy
list
must
agree with the position, number,
list of the subprogram reference.

15-1

argument
and type

in
of

a
subprogram
each argument

SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS

Dummy

arguments

may

be:

wvariables,

array

subroutine'identifiers,

function

names,

identifiers,

When you reference

a subprogram,

given

its dummy arguments are

replaced

the
corresponding
actual
arguments
supplied in the reference.
appearances of a dummy argument within a function
or
subroutine

the

actual

arguments.

Except

for

All
are

subroutine

identifiers
and literal constants, a valid association
between
dummy
and
actual
arguments
occurs
only
1if
both ~are of the same type;
otherwise,
the
results of
the subprogram
computations
will
- be
unpredictable.
Argument association may be carried through more than
one level
of subprogram reference if
a valid association is maintained
through
each
level.
The
dummy/actual
argument
associations

established when a subprogram is referenced are

desired

subprogram operations

are

terminated

completed.

when .the

The following rules govern the use and form of dummy arguments:

The number and type of the dummy

must
be
arguments

A variable dummy argument
element
identifier,
an

(o)

the

should have
expression,

corresponding

representing a

subroutine
name as

A dummy argument

a
or

wvariable,
an
a
constant

array
as 1its

name

external

its

representing

function

elements

subroutine

the

actual

identifier

array.

should

actual argument.

an external function must

1its actual

have

argument.

A dummy argument may be defined or redefined in a
referenced
subprogram. only
if
1its
corresponding actual argument is a
variable.
If dummy arguments are array names, then
elements
of

Additional

given

actual

argument.

A dummy argument

procedure

an
array
element
identifier
as its corresponding actual
argument.
If the actual argument is an array, the length of
the
dummy
array should be less than or equal to that of the
actual array.
Each element of
a dummy
array
1is
associated

have

of a

type of the
referenced.

An array dummy argument should have either an array

directly with

arguments

number
and
procedure is

statements.

corresponding

as
the
time the

Dummy argument names may not appear 1in EQUIVALENCE, DATA,
COMMON

the
same
given each

the

array may

information

1in

the

redefined.

regarding

description

the

referenced.

use

how

of dummy
-

15-2

and

subprograms

actual

arguments

are defined
and

STATEMENTS

SUBPROGRAM

15.2

STATEMENT

Statement
statement.

FUNCTIONS

functions
define
The general form

an
of a

internal
statement

subprogram
1in
function is:

single

name (argl,arg2,...,argn)=E
where

name

is a name you
characters.

rules

for

assign that consists of one
to
The name you use must conform to

symbolic

names

given

Section

six
the

3.3.

The type of a
statement
function
1is
determined
either by the first character of its name or by it
being explicitly declared in a type statement.

The

(argl...argn)

represents

expression

list

arbitrary

statement

dummy

arguments.

expression.

function

may

any

legitimate

arithmetic
expression
that
may
wuse
the
given dummy arguments and
indicates how they are combined to obtain the desired value.
You
may
use
the dummy arguments as variables or indirect function references;
but you cannot use them as arrays.
The dummy argument names
bear
no

relation
to
their
use outside the context of the statement function
except for their data type.
The expression may
reference
FORTRAN-10
defined
functions
(Paragraph
15.3)
or
any other defined statement
function, or call an external function.
It
may
not
reference
any
function
that
directly
or indirectly references the given statement
function or any subprogram in
the
<chain
of
references.
That
1is,
recursive
references
are
not
allowed.
Statement functions produce
only one value, the result of the
expression
that
it
contains.
A
statement function cannot reference itself.
You
the

must define all statement functions within a program
unit
before
first
executable
statement of the program unit.
When used, the

statement function name must be followed
enclosed
within
parentheses
and
may
logical

expression.

by an
appear

actual
argument
1list
in
any arithmetic or

Examples:
SSOR (K )= (K* (K+1) *2*K+1)
/6
ACOSH
(X) = (EXP (X/A)+EXP(-X/A))
/2.0

15.3

INTRINSIC

FUNCTIONS

(FORTRAN-10

DEFINED

FUNCTIONS)

Intrinsic functions are subprograms that are defined and
supplied
by
FORTRAN-10.
You
can
reference
an
intrinsic function by using its
assigned name as an operand in an arithmetic
or
1logical
expression.
Table
15-1 describes the names of the FORTRAN-10 intrinsic functions,
the

type

performs.
they

are

the

arguments

These
preceded

names
by

that

each

accepts,

always

refer

asterisk

(*)

the

ampersand

statement,
declared
1in a conflicting explicit
specified as a routine dummy parameter.

15-3

and

the

intrinsic
(&)

type

function

function
in

unless

EXTERNAL

statement,

are

-SUBPROGRAM,STATEMENTS

|
|bie] > ,

UIx BUT SUOTIOUNTUOOTINPue OTY+ATuO

Uaym2y3uoTr3ounyg-

1230

pT9ASR3osU3JRIqSeuDUnOQDwou3OToeSnu3U0dTjo3Ieoun1UyTr

15-4

:UNuUoTrITX3EeYOUN:19gNRA 3sabaeT13bajutr

[ead03XoTdwo*xXTdWDbiayg=0+bi¥xTZ1esyXo1duwo)
|bae| >

°(32ed 19BLOTT--NSVTILY(O*d3)u0)pauriad(suoT3oung
SUBPROGRAM
STATEMENTS

Auiteu3tqbeowOt)r

15-5

:butaopuUT2WaY

SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS

15-6

SUBPROGRAM

15.4

EXTERNAL

External

STATEMENTS

FUNCTIONS

functions are function subprograms that consist of a FUNCTION

statement
followed by a sequence of FORTRAN-10 statements that define
one or more desired operations;
subprograms of this type may
contain
one
or
more
RETURN
statements
and
must
be
terminated by an END
be
Function subprograms are independent programs that may
statement.
programs.

referenced by other

The FUNCTION statement that identifies an external

function

has

the

specification

form:

type

FUNCTION name

(argl,arg2,...,argn)

where

type

described
INTEGER,

optional

type

1in

Section

REAL,

DOUBLE

6.3.

These

PRECISION,

1include

COMPLEX

LOGICAL (plus the optional size modifier, *n,
for compatibility with other manufacturers.)

name

is the name you assign to the function.
The
name
may
consist
of
from
one
to
six
characters,
the
first
of
which
must
be
alphabetic.
You
may
include
the optional
size modifier (*n) with the name 1if the
type
is specified.
(Refer to Section 6.3.)

(argl,...,argn)

list of dummy arguments.

If you omit type in the FUNCTION statement, the type of
the
function
may
be
assigned, by default, according to the first character of its
name, or may be specified by an IMPLICIT statement or by
an
explicit
statement given with

the

subprogram

itself.

Note that if you want to use the same name for a user-defined function
as
the
name of a FORTRAN-10 defined function (library basic external
function), the desired name must be declared in an EXTERNAL
statement
and
prefixed
by
an asterisk (*) or ampersand (&) in the referencing
routine.
(Refer to Section 6.7 for
a
description
of
the
EXTERNAL
statement.)

The

following
1.

rules govern the

structuring of a FUNCTION

subprogram:

You must use the symbolic name assigned a FUNCTION subprogram
as
a variable name in the subprogram.
During each execution

of the subprogram, this variable must be
defined
and,
once
defined,
may
be
referenced or redefined.
The value of the
variable at the time of execution on any RETURN statement
is
the

value

the

subprogram.

NOTE

A RETURN statement returns
control
to
the
calling
statement
that
initiated
the
execution
of
the
subprogram.
See Section 15.6 for
a
description
of
this

statement.

15-7

SUBPROGRAM

You may not use the
any
nonexecutable
initial

FUNCTION

symbolic name of
statement in the

statement

Dummy argument names

COMMON,

DATA

STATEMENTS

may

statement

not

used

a FUNCTION subprogram in
subprogram except in the

type

statement.

appear

within

1in

the

any

EQUIVALENCE,

subprogram.

The function subprogram may define or redefine one or more of
its arguments so as to effectively return results in addition
to the value of the function.

The function subprogram may contain any FORTRAN-10
statement
except
BLOCK
DATA,
SUBROUTINE
PROGRAM,
another
FUNCTION
statement, or
any
statement
that
directly
or
indirectly
references
the
function
being defined or any subprogram in
the chain of subprograms leading to this function.

The function subprogram should contain at
least
one
RETURN
statement
and
must
be terminated by an END statement.
The
RETURN
statement
signifies
a
1logical
<conclusion
of
the
computation
made
by the subprogram and returns the computed
function
wvalue
and
control
to
the
<calling
program.
A
subprogram may have more than one RETURN statement.
The
END
statement
specifies
the
subprogram and implies a return.

15.4.1

Basic

External

FORTRAN-10 contains

Functions

name, and
functions

(FORTRAN-10 Defined

a group of predefined

called basic functions.

Table

physical

external

end

the

Functions)
that

are

15-2 describes each basic function,

1its

its use.
These names always refer
unless declared in an EXTERNAL or

functions

to
the
basic
external
conflicting explicit type

statement.

15.4.2

Generic

Function Names

The compiler
generates
a
call
to
function,
depending
on
the type of
generic

function

names:

ABS

AMAX1

AMIN1
ATAN

ATAN2

COS
INT

MOD

SIGN
SIN
SQRT
EXP

ALOG
ALOG10

the

following

example

K=ABS (I)

15-8

the
the

proper
FORTRAN-10
defined
arguments, for the following

SUBPROGRAM

STATEMENTS

the type of I dete.mines
which
function
integer,
the compiler generates a call to
real, the compiler generates a call to the
double precision, the compiler generates a

is
called.
If
I
1is
an
the function IABS.
If I is
function
ABS.
If
I
1is
call to the function DABS.

The function name loses its generic properties if
it
appears
1in
an
explicit
type
statement,
if
it
1is
specified
as
a dummy routine
parameter, or if
it
1is
prefixed
by
"*"
or
"&"
in
an
EXTERNAL
statement.
When a generic function name that was specified unprefixed
in an EXTERNAL statement 1s used as a routine parameter, it is assumed
to
reference
a
FORTRAN-10
defined function of the same name, or if
none exists, a user-defined function.
Note that
IMPLICIT
statements
have

effect

upon

name

has

been

removed

15.5

A
by

SUBROUTINE

subroutine
a

1is

data

from

type

its

generic

class

use

function

names

EXTERNAL

unless

the

statement.

SUBPROGRAMS

SUBROUTINE

calling
program.
subprogram of this
SUBROUTINE

the

external

computational

statement

The
type

and

may

procedure
may

not

SUBROUTINE
statement
has the form:

that

return

wused

identified

values

tne

identify

name (argl,arg2,...,argn)

where

name

is the symbolic
defined.

(argl,...,argn)

optional

15-9

name

list

the

dummy

subroutine

arguments.

twy3TIebor
o1seg OT-NTILIOI)paurTIad (suotT3doung
SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS

3i0:1enybg

15-10

:9UTS

1D10yq13jduAsHbu01el:

a21V1d1dUgwTQnoSUo)ITdSgXO30D(suetpea)fNSSHeOI0NlJeOSDIl¢VSY!ss(oboagye()gbu)(abtyxyiuy)srges)1IIT11TTd2ge9wn3oo4y)g9X291TT1gdeEqwasen9oyoY)gX29

$9UTSO0)
SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS

o1sed

15-11

*TN1(ueVbsaIj3yeL)Y

SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS

15-12

Xo1d0wo)

SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS
The
following
subprogram:

rules

control

You may not use the

statement within the
statement itself.

the

structuring
|

symbolic name of the
defined

subroutine
-

subprogram

subprogram except

the

You may not use the given dummy arguments in an

'COMMON,

The
of

DATA

statement

within

the

EQUIVALENCE,

subprogram.

subroutine subprogram may define or redefine one or
arguments so as to effectively return results.

Dummy arguments

The
and

statements

represent

should

contain
by

terminated

indicate

the

END

subroutine.

that

the

labels may be

(see description

end

signifies
the

have

ENTRY

computational

physical

end of

the

entry

points

many

statement

given

in Section

15.7).

‘

Referencing

Subroutines

You must reference subroutine
the following form:
CALL

(CALL Statement)

subprograms

using

CALL

statement

name (argl,arg2,...,argn)

|
name

elther

at least one RETURN
statement
an
END statement.
The RETURN

1logical

statement

Subroutine subprograms may

desired

statement

subprogram
must
be

routine;

|
o

(argl,...,argn)
|

the

" The use of
agreement

symbolic

subroutine

name

subprogram.

the

optional
list
1is

type

with

the

CALL

constant

variable

statement

the

desired

order,

number,

and

corresponding dummy arguments

in the defining SUBROUTINE statement.

literal constants
is an exception
to
of
type
between
dummy
and
actual

list of actual arguments.
If
included,
the
given
actual

arguments must agree
given

argument

its

‘where

any

The
subroutine
subprogram
may
contain
any
FORTRAN-10
statement
except
BLOCK
DATA,
FUNCTION, another SUBROUTINE
statement,
or
any
statement
that
elther
directly
or
indirectly
references the subroutine being defined or any of
the subprograms in the chain of subprogram references leading
to this subroutine.

15.5.1

SUBROUTINE

may

be:

name

15-13

the
rule
arguments.

requiring
An actual

SUBPROGRAM

STATEMENTS

an array element identifier

.an expression

the name of an external subroutine, or

array

name

"Example:

The

subroutine

SUBROUTINE MATRIX(I,J,K,M,

END

may be

by
referenced

CALL MATRIX(10,20,30,40

15.5.2

FORTRAN-10 Supplied Subroutines

FORTRAN-10 provides
Table
subroutines.

predefined

15.6

predefined
vyou with an extensive group of
15-3 gives the descriptions and names of these

subroutines.

RETURN STATEMENT AND MULTIPLE RETURNS -

The RETURN statement causes control to be returned from a
This statement has the form:
to the calling program unit.

RETURN

subprogram

(standérd return)‘

The

(i.e.,

standard return) causes control to be returned to the statement of the
"calling program that follows the statement that called the subprogram.

15-14

SUBPROGRAM

You may use any number of RETURN

STATEMENTS

(standard return)

statements

Example

Assume

the

following

CALL
?O

statement

sequence

EXAMP (1
101

105...........
...........

20 f.;...;.....

15-15

main

program:

any

SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS

Assume the following

statement

sequence

the

called

SUBROUTINE

subprogram:

SUBROUTINE

EXAMP

(L,

*,M,

*,N,¥*)

RETURN

~ RETURN

END

Each occurrence of RETURN returns control
in

the

15.6.1

calling program.

Referencing

External

FUNCTION

to the statement GO

101

Subprogram

Reference an external function subprogram by using its
assigned
name
as
an
operand
1in an arithmetic or logical expression in the calling
program unit.
The name must be followed by an actual
argument
1list.

The actual arguments in an external function reference may be:
l.

variable

name,

an array element

array

expression,

identifier,

name,

15-16

SUBPROGRAM

the

name

another

STATEMENTS

external

procedure

SUBROUTINE)
.

NOTE

Any subprogram name to
be
used
as
an
must
subprogram
another
to
argument
first appear in
an
EXTERNAL
statement

(Chapter

in the calling program unit.

Example

The

subprogram defined
INTEGER FUNCTION

as:
ICALC(IX,IY,IZ)

RETURN
END

may be referenced in the following manner:

TOTAL=ICALC (IAA,IAB,IAC)+500

- 15-17

FUNCTION

SUBPROGRAM

STATEMENTS

15-18

SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS

15-19

SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS.

15-20

SUBPROGRAM

STATEMENTS

15-21

SUBPROGRAM STATEMENTS

15-22

SUBPROGRAM

STATEMENTS

15-23

SUBPROGRAM

STATEMENTS

15-24

SUBPROGRAM

STATEMENTS

15-25

CHAPTER

16.1

SUBPROGRAMS

DATA

BLOCK

INTRODUCTION

Use block data subprograms to initialize data
to
be
stored
1in
any
common
areas.
You
may
use only specification and DATA statements,
i.e., DATA, COMMON, DIMENSION, EQUIVALENCE, and TYPE,
in
BLOCK
DATA
subprograms.
A
subprogram of this type must start with a BLOCK DATA
statement.

You may enter
in

single

initial values

subprogram of

into more than one labeled

this

An executable program may contain

16.2

The

BLOCK

DATA

form of

the

BLOCK

DATA

common

block

type.

than one block data

subprogram.

STATEMENT

BLOCK DATA statement

1is:

name

where

name

symbolic

name

subprogram.

16-1

given

identify

the

APPENDIX

ASCII-1968

character

Ist 2

octal

code

set

CHARACTER

defined

National
Standard
for
the following matrix.

1in

the

CODE

SET

X3.4-1968

Information

Version

Interchange

the

(ASCII)

Last octal digit

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

subsets

03x

>
Z

ESC

(ESC)

Characters inside parentheses are ASCII-1963 Standard.
NUL

Null

DLE

Data Link Escape

SOH

Start of Heading

DC1

Device Control 1

STX

Start of Text

DC2

Device Control 2

ETX

End of Text

DC3

Device Control 3

EOT

End of Transmission

DC4

Device Control 4

ENQ

Enquiry

NAK

Negative Acknowledge

ACK

Acknowledge

SYN

Synchronous Idle

BEL

Bell

ETB

End of Transmission Block

Backspace

CAN

Cancel

Horizontal Tabulation

End of Medium

Line Feed

SUB

Substitute

Vertical Tabulation

ESC

Escape

Form Feed

File Separator

Carriage Return

Group Separator

Shift Out

Record Separator

Shift In

Unit Separator

DEL

Delete (Rubout)

(<)

o
€ © m|

+
w

Z2TV O
-

N’

16x
17x

15x

13x

14x

—_—c

11x

12x

—,—a
O AR

10x

O RO

07x

~—

06x

05x

04x

SUB

02x

TM ~~
>

BEL

0o —cZmil
v

ACK

ENQ

EOT

N
e

ETX

OTM
O =
- o3|
<

STX

SOH

NUL

Olx

00x

o
XTI
E ©®O

digits

X T

The

American
given in

Graphic
95

APPENDIX

USING THE

COMPILER

This appendix explains how to access FORTRAN-10 and how to make use of
the
information
1t
provides.
You
should
be
familiar
with
the
FORTRAN-10 language and the DECsystem-10 TOPS-10 monitor.

B.1l

RUNNING

The command
.R

THE

COMPILER

run

FORTRAN-10

is:

FORTRA

The compiler responds with an asterisk (*) and
a command string.
A command is of the general

object filename,
You are given

the

filename=source

filename
(s)

following options:

The

You may specify more than one input file in
the
compilation
command
string.
These files will be logically concatenated
by the compiler and treated as one source file.

filenames can be

fully specified

SFD paths.

Program units need not be terminated at file

may consist of more

than one

If no object filename
file

file.

specified,

boundaries

relocatable

and

binary

generated.

If no listing

If no extension is given, the defaults
are
.LST
.REL
(relocatable
binary),
and
.FOR
(source)
respective

B.l.1l

listing

is then ready to accept
form:

filename

specified,

no listing

1is generated.
(listing),
for
their

files.

Switches Available

with

FORTRAN-10

Switches to FORTRAN-10 are accepted anywhere in
the
command
string.
They
are totally position- and file-independent.
Table B-1 lists the
switches.

USING

THE

Table

COMPILER

B-1

FORTRAN-10 Compiler

Switches

Defaults

Meaning

Switch

Generates a file that can be input to

CROSSREF

the

CREF

OFF

(See Section B.l.1l.1l.)

DEBUG

OFF

program

Includes the octal-formatted version of| OFF

EXPAND

the object file

in the listing.

Compiles a D in card column 1 as

INCLUDE

Compiles code to run on a KAlQ

KA10

processor.

Compiles code to run on a KI1O0

KI10
LNMAP

OFF

space.

Compilation
processor

Compilation

pProcessor.

processor

Produces a line number/octal location

OFF

map in the listing only if /MACROCODE
was not specified.

MACROCODE

Adds the mnemonic translation of the

OFF

NOERRORS

Does not print error messages

OFF

NOWARNINGS

Does not output warning messages.

OFF

OPTIMIZE

Performs global optimization.

OFF

SYNTAX

Performs syntax check only.

OFF

object code to the listing file.
on the

terminal.

Switch names need only
Each switch must be preceded by a slash (/).
contain those 1letters that are required to make the switch name
unique. You are encouraged to use at least three letters to prevent
conflict with switches in future implementations.
Example

FORTRA

*OFILE,LFILE=SFILE/MAC,S2FILE

The /MAC switch will cause the MACRO
S2FILE to

appear

code

equivalent

SFILE

and

LFILE.LST.

If you do not specify a processor (KAl0 or KI1O0 switch), the code will
be compiled for the processor type on which the compilation occurs.
The processor type of the code in the object file and all switches,
used or implied, are printed at the top of each listing page.

USING

B.1.1.1

THE

COMPILER

The /DEBUG Switch - The /DEBUG

switch

tells

FORTRAN-10

Several of
a series of debugging features into your program.
compile
FORDDT.
with
used
be
to
these features are specifically designed
By adding the modifiers
for more information.
E
Appendix
to
Refer
listed in Table B-2, you can include specific debugging features.
Table

B-2

to /DEBUG Switch

Modifiers

Meaning

Modifiers

:DIMENSIONS

Generates dimension information in

Generates references to FORDDT

: TRACE

.REL

file

for

its

FORDDT.

trace features

required

(automatically activates

:LABELS).

form
Generates a label for each statement of the
L." (This option may be used without
" "line-number

: LABELS

FORDDT.)

the
at
be stored
to
indices
DO LOOP
Forces
beginning of each iteration rather than held in a

: INDEX

for

the duration of the loop.

array
all
Generates the bounds checking code for
produce
will
violations
Bounds
references.
technique
Note that the
run-time error messages.
subroutine
for
1
dimensions of
specifying
of

: BOUNDS

arrays will
use

(You

cause bounds check errors.

this option without

include

any debug

may

FORDDT.)

: NONE

Do not

features.

:ALL

Enable all debugging aids.

The format of the /DEBUG switch and its modifiers is as follows:
/DEBUG:modifier

/DEBUG: (modifier

list)

Options available with the /DEBUG modifiers are:

No debug features - Either do not specify the
or

/DEBUG

include /DEBUG:NONE.

All debug features - Either /DEBUG or /DEBUG:ALL.

Selected features - Either a
i.e.,

: LAB
/DEBUG:BOU/DEBUG

switch

a list of modifiers
/DEBUG: (BOU,LAB,...)

series

modified

switches;

USING

THE

COMPILER

Exclusion of features
(if
vyou wish
all
but
one
or
do not wish to list them all, you may use
and
modifiers
prefix "NO" before the switch
you wish
to
exclude).
exclusion of one or more features implicitly includes all
same
the
is
/DEBUG :NOBOU
i.e.,
others,
/DEBUG: (DIM,TRA,LAB, IND) .

two
the
The
the
as

If you include more than one statement on
first
statement
will
receive
a
label

a
single
1line,
only
the
(/DEBUG:LABELS)
or
FORDDT
reference (/DEBUG:TRACE).
(The /DEBUG option and the /OPTIMIZE option
cannot be used at the same time.)
NOTE

If a source file contains line
sequence
numbers that occur more than once in the
same
subprogram,
the
/DEBUG
option
used.

cannot be

The following formulas may be
used
to
determine
the
increases
in
program
size
that
will occur as a result of the addition of various
/DEBUG options.

:DIMENSIONS

For
of

each array,
dimensions,

3+3*N words where N 1s the
number
and up to three constants for each

dimension.

: TRACE

One

instruction per

: LABELS

: INDEX

One
1instruction
instruction
for

statement.

increase.

index

: BOUNDS

executable

For

the

each

per
some

inner
of
the

loop
plus
one
references to the

the

formula

1is

loop.

array,

the

same

use

5+N

DIMENSIONS:.

For

each

words

reference

where

array.
If
approximately

B.1.2

COMPIL-Class

You can

invoke

array

element,

N is the number of dimensions

in the

you
do
not
specify
:BOUNDS,
1+3* (N-1) words will be used.

Commands

FORTRAN-10

wusing

COMPIL-class

commands.

These

commands cause the monitor to run the COMPIL program, which interprets
the command and constructs new command strings for the system
program

actually
processing
the
command.
When both FORTRAN-10 and F40 are
present in your DECsystem-10 system, you can specify which compiler is
to
be
used
by
adding
the
switches
/F10 or /F40 to the following
commands:
COMPILE
LOAD

EXECUTE
DEBUG

USING THE

COMPILER

Example

.EXEC ROTOR/F10

The compiler switches KA, KI, OPT, CREF, and
directly in COMPIL-class commands and w@nay e

DEBUG
may
be
specified
used globally or locally.

Example

.EXECUTE/CREF/KA/F10

P1.FOR,P2.FOR/DEBUG:NOBOU

The other compiler switches must be passed
specific

parentheses

for

each

Commands

Manual

for

file.

source

Example

.EXECUTE

Refer

further

B.2

the

Pl1.FOR(M,I)

DECsystem-10

Operating

System

information.

LISTING

READING A FORTRAN-10

When you request a listing from the FORTRAN-10 compiler,
the

following

contains

1internal

sequence

information:

A printout of the

source program plus

This internal
assigned to each line by the compiler.
number
warnlng
or
error
any
1in
referenced
is
number
sequence
If the input file
messages generated during the compilation.
is line-sequenced,

the number

from the

file

is used.

If code

via the INCLUDE statement, all INCLUDEd lines will
added
is
have an asterisk (*) appended to their line-sequence number.

relative
A summary of the names and
1in
arrays
and
scalars
of
octal)
compiler generated variables.

(in
1locations
program
the source program plus
(in

All COMMON blocks and the relative locations

A listing of all equivalenced variables or arrays

the variables

relative

octal)

in each COMMON block.

and

their

locations.

A listing of the subprograms referenced

A summary of temporary locations generated by the compiler.

A heading on each page of the listing containing the
program
unit
name (MAIN., program, subroutine or function, principal
entry), the input filename, the list
of
compiler
switches,
and
the
date
and
time of compilation.
Whether a specific

and

FORTRAN-10 defined

processor switch (/KAl0, /KI1l0) was
for
which
the
code was generated
listing

(both

library functions).

wuser

used
and
the
is also at the

defined

processor
top of the

page.

If you used

the /MACRO switch,

generated
code
to the listing.

mnemonic

printout

(in a format similar to MACRO-10)
This section nas four fields:

the

is appended

USING

THE

COMPILER

LINE:
This column contains the internal sequence number
of
the
1line
<corresponding
to
the mnemonic code.
It
appears on the first of
the
code
sequence
associated
with
that
internal
sequence
number.
An
asterisk
indicates a compiler inserted line.

LOC:

The

relative

location

the

object program of

the

instruction.
LABEL:
Any
Pprogram
or
compiler
generated
label.
Program
labels
have
the
1letter "P" appended.
Labels
generated by the compiler are
followed
by
the
letter
"M".
Labels
generated
by the compiler and associated
with the /DEBUG:LABELS switch consist
of
the
1internal
sequence number followed by an "L".

GENERATED CODE:

The

MACRO-10 mnemonic

code.

If you used the /LNMAP switch and
did
NOT
wuse
the
/MACRO
switch,
a
1line number/octal location map 1is appended to the
listing.
This section lists the line numbers
1in
increments
of
10
on
subsequent lines and each number from 0 through 9
for each line in adjacent
<columns.
The
numbers
appearing
inside
the
matrix
are
the relative octal locations of the
statements in the FORTRAN program unit.
For example, to find
the
relative
octal location of line number 001043, find the
row marked 001040 and then column 3 on that line.
The number
in that place is the desired relative location.
This listing
can be very large and sparse
for
line-numbered
files
with
large increments, such as those produced by SOS.

NOTE

One
FORTRAN
line
can
produce
multiple
octal
locations.
In
this
case the line number map lists
only the first location.

A list of all argument blocks generated by the
compiler.
A
zero
argument
appears first followed by argument blocks for
subroutine calls and function references (in order
of
their
appearance
in
the
program).
Argument
blocks for all I/0
operations follow this.
10.

Format

11.

A summary of
during

Compiler

B.2.1

statement

listings.

errors

detected

warning

messages

1ssued

compilations.

Generated

Variables

In certain situations the compiler will generate
1internal
wvariables.
what
these
wvariables
represent can help you read the macro
expansion.
The variables are of the form:
Knowing

.letter
i.e.,

.S0001

digit digit digit digit

USING THE COMPILER
where:

Function

Letter
A

Arithmetic

Result

save

Temporary
Result

of an

Result of a
or constant

function

LOOP

formal

1initial

parameters.

wvalue

adjustably dimensioned

common subexpression (see
computation (C.2.1.3).

storage

Variable

area.

statement

parameter

for

reduced

expression

array.
Section

C.2.1.1)

values.

operator

strength

step size
loop.

expression

(C.2.1.2).

Result of
iteration

You may

find

these

the DO LOOP
count .for a

variables

The following example
pointed out.

shows

on
a

the

listing

under

listing where

all

SCALARS
these

computed

and

ARRAYS.

features

are

USING THE COMPILER

aNd

"NIVNW

USING THE COMPILER

[T0 0 0VE9L L]'T

T[O000LPLL]

CWNS‘’Z 00S°‘'Z 'z

£’e
(z)o‘e

W3Y'TH

‘
9
T
*LASAI
dZ214S

dAQOU A OW WA OW

WIAOR JAOW

oLt

(X}

TMM

L0~

TMM <

r—{

¢t

W-

T 9

104°C dsrl

TIYD

ITIVD

040 00

LY SNLOHVOVY '£c’zWy

12C 2GS

G01A¢€3C AWLWSAIOIAWrOOWH W(ZaNE8’)0egSPT-¥'Y

TG LSALWE'OD

9LZ€9L10¢8}T1TC47 L11JL1TTsdaS3AOSa0dyMaWWvOavvLIIyNrWW(r((LrZZ’o’ZG'2)‘e'))‘toeg’0000o'’’’¢¢€g€

"NIVH

N&JA’4OWV AeZIV2€YD0€N1IV’DS (W1€I)S9ApTO7-N9’G

THE

B-10

£t

/Al
S1

Go¢€E 26T8
LE WL

USING
COMPILER

0 :6T

Z¢I9T9T1=0T‘RWENCLLL

I8LTYWMO4SINTELIATTWITA9I9TLTIY1TILIS-dN0IT)MOT(1H'LI)6N1I°SWOASP(

€17€G1LS9 S2TWWTTOT rfLT0HHH’SS‘LAN0NLSdA’L‘'0OTL*TLS*TIONIO‘’LT

LT 9ZS IdAoTO‘N’W‘0ov¢WOT’9T1

IWA3IdT‘09OTN WI694TA’TG09W L'90|

PT IOTI HO

€L 0’‘0 0%

G9 0’0

USING
THE
COMPILER

B-11

CSGWTNI9ST O6T=1OT’

USING THE

COMPILER

L00 CxI=T4

(LT¥IY0ZDOI-TA0I¥WNI) L+01TI0=02Y J0GA1NI0NTO0D a6nT0N0d dSKWYTIOI0dvdns
B-12

"NIVRW

"NIVW

000

S00900

9¢

B-13

L0 0 60 0

00T

ang

(JTWIOL*ds13y

FANIINOD

USING THE COMPILER

L'9 JAOW

90T9TT 0000S* GOT9TT T1000S*

SPOLY

B-14

9¢

0¢ ¢

B-15

9¢
LE

NLdOY

dav
aav
aav

WG’Z

G'TT

W60

(z)0o'’¢

L'¢€

L'9

WIT‘9T
*LNO‘LT

T100d°‘2T

1987

‘WT

+d00T

‘18

‘WOT

dI¥D
NIVO
NIVO
I1ddv

JAONW 1a v

0¢

W9 -

W9‘0

WL’O
Wy ‘0

‘WL

W/LdO/IX/ 9.-AON-6T
USING THE
COMPILER

1adv JdDSOV

WIAONW ITHAON

IZL 0’JA0ON0%FWE’'IT

S9L0TC1TTTI9991TTT1T ==H1OTC’WW66NN11’S’
C I9Tt (

6T G *WC
0€AL99S TWE 00’’00
9L L0'’0

XLNIWNDY 01S1ZG9€/ALLY99GG%0T9d+TWWTZT IrZfT0dL3rOWaW/ATHAsN‘L’SSnSEO‘dL‘N0d‘¥0vL'0¢€TLOT1*W*TLLZSITX‘OT90'TIL‘TLT
"*L8NN1YIIWVYIKWWOJSINP]ITTAIWOWTINIIOLLTVS"IYdLO¥S0Yd*¥dNYOdIT)3M1ODT03(NL1V)L3YNdIISH LWN[d DOAI4SA(:STS)S°W/LAO/IM/9L-AON-6T
USING THE
COMPILER

0 :ST

B-16

USING

B.3

THE

COMPILER

ERROR REPORTING

If an error occurs during the initial pass of the compiler (while
the
actual
source
code is being read and processed), an error message 1is
printed on the listing immediately following the
1line
in
which
the
error occurred.
Each error references the internal sequence number of
the incorrect line.
The error messages along with
the
statement
1in
error are output to the user terminal.
For example:
.EXECUTE

DAY.FOR

FORTRAN:DAY

01300
?FTNNRC LINE:01300
100
01500
?FTNMSP LINE:01500
01600

K1l
STATEMENT NOT RECOGNIZED
CONTINE
STATEMENT NAME MISSPELLED

?FTNICL LINE:01600

ILLEGAL CHARACTER C

?FTNFTL

MAIN.

LABEL FIELD

FATAL ERRORS AND NO WARNINGS

LOADING
LINK:
[LNKNSA NO START ADDRESS]
EXIT

If errors are detected after the initial pass of
the
compiler,
they
appear in the list file after the end of the source listing.
They are
output to your terminal withocut the statement in error, but
they
may
reference

B.3.1

1its

Fatal

There

are

two

internal

Errors

sequence

number.

Warning

Messages

and

levels of messages,

warning

and

fatal

error.

Warning

messages
are
preceded
by
"%" and indicate a possible problem.
The
compilation will continue, and the object
program
will
probably
be
correct.
Fatal
errors
are
preceded by a "?".
1If a fatal error is
encountered in any pass of the compiler, the remaining passes will not
be called.
Additional errors that would be detected in later compiler
passes may not become apparent until the first errors
are
corrected.
It
1is
not possible to generate a correct object program for a source
program containing
The

format

fatal

messages

error.

1is

?FTNXXX

LINE:n

text

$FTNXXX

LINE:n

text

where:

%
FTN
XXX
LINE:n
text

= warning
= FORTRAN mnemonic
= 3-letter mnemonic for the error message
= line number where error occurred
= explanation of error

fatal

USING

THE

COMPILER

The

printing of fatal errors and warning messages on your terminal can
be
suppressed
by the use of the /NOERRORS switch;
however, messages
will still
appear
on
the
1listing.
The
/NOWARNINGS
switch
will
suppress warning messages on both user terminal and listing.

B.3.2

At
is

Message

Summary

the end of the
printed after

listing file
each program

and on the terminal, a message
unit is compiled.
This message

summary
has two

forms:

when

one

messages

were

issued

{?FTNWRN} name NO/number FATAL ERRORS AND NO/number WARNINGS
?FTNFTL

when

no messages

name

[NO

ERRORS

were

1issued

DETECTED]

where

name is the program or subprogram name.
appears
on
the listing only.) Appendix G 1s
errors and warning messages.

B.4

CREATING

produce

give

elither

REENTRANT

sharable

one

the

FORTRAN

program

from

following

/SEG:DEFAULT

/OTS:NONSHAR MAIN/G

PROGRAM

the

WITH

.REL

commands

([NO

ERRORS
DETECTED]
complete list of fatal

LINK-10

file,

such

MAIN.REL,

LINK-10:

MAIN/G

The resulting core image can
used to produce a .SHR file.

SSAVEd

the

/SSAVE

switch

can

APPENDIX

WRITING

USER

PROGRAMS

This

appendix
is
a
guide
for
writing
effective
programs
with
FORTRAN-10.
It contains techniques for optimization, interaction with
non-FORTRAN programs, mixing of FORTRAN-10 and
F40
object
programs,

and

other

C.1l

useful

GENERAL

programming

PROGRAMMING

The
following
should
observe

hints.

CONSIDERATIONS

paragraphs
describe
when
preparing
a

programming
considerations
you
FORTRAN program to be compiled by

FORTRAN-10.

C.1l.1

Accuracy

and

Range

Double-precision

Numbers

Floating-point and real numbers may consist of up to 16
digits
in
a
double-precision mode.
Their range is specified in Chapter 3, Section
3.2 of this manual.
You must be careful when testing the value
of
a
number within the specified range since, although numbers up to 10**38
may be represented, FORTRAN-10 can only test numbers of
up
to
eight
significant
digits (REAL precision) and 16 significant digits (DOUBLE
precision).
You

must

for

also

result

obtained;

number

tests

1In

however,

that

within

careful

Writing

FORTRAN-10

prepare

program

non-DIGITAL machine,
1.
2.

Avoid

using

Consider

the

non-DIGITAL

testind

cases

some

approximates

statements,

C.1.2
you

when

most

cases

i.e.,

run

should:

the

non-ANSI

accuracy
machine

result may be

approximation

for
both

fail.

Execution

Non-DEC

DECsystem-10

numbers

the

will

small

will

cause

Machines

computer

features

handling.

very

size

capable

computation

i.e.,

IF,

standard

and

result,

the

arithmetic

you

floating-point

anticipated

Such

Programs
to

the

and

FORTRAN-10,
that

and
the

WRITING

USER

PROGRAMS

Using Floating-Point DO Loops

C.1.3

FORTRAN-10 permits

you

employ

non-integer

double-

single-

precision numbers as the parameter variables in a DO statement. This
enables you to generate a wider range of values for the DO loop index
may, in turn, be wused inside the 1loop for
which
variables,
Be sure to consider the

computations.

1loss

that

precision

may

occur.

Computation of DO Loop Iterations

C.1.4

The number of times through a DO loop is computed outside the loop and
is not affected by any changes to the DO index parameters within the

The formula for the number of times a DO loop is executed 1is:

loop.

MAX

I=M1,M2,M3

(1, ((M2-M1) /M3)+1)=Number of cycles

however,

The values of the parameters M1, M2, M3 may be of any type;

you must
logicals.

consider the foregoing formula, particularly when using
One pass through each DO loop is always performed EVEN IF

THE RESULT OF THE FOREGOING CALCULATION IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO ZERO.

Subroutines - Programming Considerations

C.1.5

Consider the following items when preparing and executing subroutines:
1.

During execution, no check is

the

1if

see

proper

If the number of actual arguments passed to a

subroutine

1is

If the number of actual arguments passed to a

subroutine

1is

than the number of dummy arguments given,

greater

are

the values

the excess

ignored.

corresponding
1its
and
If an actual parameter is a constant
1is set to another value, all references made
dummy argument
the
to the constant in the calling program may be changed to
of

value

less than the number of dummy arguments specified,
of the unspecified arguments are undefined.

arguments

made

of parameters was passed.

number

the

dummy argument.

the
of
No check is made to see if the parameters passed are
If an actual parameter is
same type as the dummy parameters.
Dbe
real,
type
a constant and the corresponding dummy is of
If the
to include the decimal point with the constant.
sure

dummy is double-precision, be sure to
with

specify

the

constant

"D".

Examples

1is
A
and
F(2)
If the function F(A) is called by inputting
integer 2 as an unnormalized
the
interprets
F
real,
type
floating-point number.

called

with

this

instance,

F(A)

should

F(2.0).

1is
F1(D)
function
Similarly, if the
double-precision,
1is
D
and
F1(2.5)
C-2

inputting
by
<called
that its
assumes
Fl

WRITING

parameters

have

and
picks up
proper method

been

USER

PROGRAMS

specified

with

two

words

whatever follows the constant
is to use F1(2.5D00).

2.5

precision

core.

The

NOTE

You

are

given

described

C.1.6

Reordering

notice

items

1,2,3,4,

any

and

the

situations

occur.

Computations

Computations that are not enclosed within parentheses may be reordered
by
the
compiler.
Sometimes
it
1is necessary to use parentheses to
ensure proper results from a specific computation.
For

example,
1.

RL]

assuming

that

represents

large

number

overflow

condition,

and

RS1

very

number,

small

such

i.e.,

that

less

RL1*RL2

than

will

the

cause

program

sequence

A=RS1*RL1*RL2

B=RS2*RL2*RL1

will not produce an overflow when evaluated
1left
to
since the first computation in each expression, i.e.,
and RS2*RL2, will produce an interim result that
is
than either large number (RL1 or RL2).
However,

(see

The

the

compiler

will

Section

C.2.1.1)

and

temp

RL1*RL2

RSl*temp

RS2*temp

computation

temp

recognize

generate

will

You should write the program
results are obtained:

cause

RL1*RL2

the

following

common

right,
RS1*RL1
smaller

subexpression

sequence:

overflow.

follows

ensure

that

the

desired

A=(RS1*RL1)*RL2
B=(RS2*RL2)
*RL1

Computations

selected.

may

reordered

even

when

global

optimization

not

Dimensioning of Formal

C.l1.7

PROGRAMS

USER

WRITING

Arrays

When you specify an array as a formal parameter to a subprogram
unit,
you
must
indicate
to
the
<compiler that the parameter 1s an array.
Dimension the array in a specification statement.
This
1is
the
only
way
the
compiler is able to distinguish a reference to such an array
from a function reference.
Designating the array with a dimension
of
1l

is a common practice.

Example

SUBROUTINE SUB1(A,B)
DIMENSION A (1)

There are disadvantages to
wusing
dimension
information
provided

the
above
technique
1s
not
adequate
1in

specifically:
1.

Reading

writing

DIMENSION

The

the

ARRAY

READ

(1)

ARRAY

above

a binary

because
the
some
cases,

array by name

(10)

read

that

will

ARRAY.

read

ten

words

1into

SUBROUTINE
DIMENSION

SUB1 (A)
A (1)

READ(1)A

This
2.

binary

Reading

the

read

will

array

SUBROUTINE

SUB2

DIMENSION

FMT (1)

READ

cause
a

one

word

read

into

format

(FMT)

(1,FMT)

This will cause one word
with the characters read

of the array FMT to be written
from the record on unit 1.

over

When you use
the
/DEBUG:BOUNDS
compilation
switch,
the
dimension
information used is that which is specified in the array declaration.
SUBROUTINE DO IT(A)
DIMENSION A(1)
A(2)=0

The reference
be generated.

to A(2)

will

cause

the out-of-bounds warning message

C.2

FORTRAN-10 GLOBAL OPTIMIZATION

You

have

the

option

invoking

the

global

optimizer

dur ing

The optimizer treats groups of statements in the source
compilation.
program as a single entity.
The purpose of the global optimizer is to

prepare a more efficient object program that produces the same results
1less
significantly
takes
but
program,
as the original unoptimized

output

execution

time.

The

equivalent

(in

results)

phase of the compiler

is developed

the lexical and syntactic analysis

into an

the original.

optimized

source

then processed by the standard compiler code generation phase.
C-4

program

The optimized program is

WRITING

C.2.1

Optimization

C.2.1.1

USER

PROGRAMS

Techniques

Elimination of Redundant

Computations

- Often

the

same

subexpression
will
appear
1in more than one computation throughout a
program.
If the values of the operands of such
a
common
expression
are not changed between computations, the subexpression may be written
as a separate arithmetic expression, and the variable representing its
resultant
may
then
be
substituted where the subexpression appears.
This eliminates unnecessary recomputation of the
subexpression.
For

example,

the

instruction

sequence:

A=B*C+E*F

H=A+G-B*C

IF((B*C)-H)

10,20,30

contains

the

computed

only once.

subexpression B*C three
Rewriting

times when

the

foregoing

the

subexpression

really needs

sequence

as:

T=B*C

A=T+E*F

H=A+G-T

DIF((T)-H)

eliminates

10,20,30

two

computations

the

number

B*C

from

the

overall

seguence.

Decreasing
program

execution

C.2.1.2

the

time

arithmetic

elimination

the

resulting

Operator

Reduction

operations performed
common

subexpressions

source

shortens

the

object program.

Strength

The

time

required

execute

arithmetic operations will vary according to the operator(s) involved.
The hierarchy of arithmetic operations
according
to
the
amount
of
execution time required is:
MOST

TIME

OPERATOR
* %

/
*

LEAST

TIME

+,
-

During program optimization,
the
global
optimizer
replaces,
where
possible
(1),
some
arithmetic operations that require the most time
with operations that require less time.
For
example,
consider
the
following DO loop that is used to create a table for the conversion of
from

20
DO

their

equivalents

feet.

MILES=1,20

IFEET(MILES)=5280*MILES

Numerical

cases

miles

where

analysis

this

considerations

possible.
C-5

severely

1limit

the

number

WRITING

USER

PROGRAMS

the
1if
shorter
be
1loop would
The execution time of the foregoing
time-consuming multiply operation, i.e., 5280*MILES, could be replaced

you

Since you increment MILES on each pass,
by a faster operation.
can replace the multiply operation by an add and total operation.
In its optimized form, the foregoing

sequence egquivalent

to:

1loop

would

replaced

K=5280

MILES=1,20

IFEET (MILES) =K

K=K+5280

for
5280
In the optimized form of the loop, the value of K is set to
1loop and is increased by 5280 for each
the
iteration of
first
the
succeeding

iteration of the loop.

subscript calculations
This foregoing situation occurs frequently in
the size is two or
whenever
s
multiplication
contain
implicitly
that

greater.

speed with
C.2.1.3 Removal of Constant Computation From Loops - The
if
increased
a given algorithm may be executed can be
which

instructions and/or computations are moved out of frequently traversed
1less frequently traversed program sequences.
into
sequences
program

the
1in
arguments
the
of
Movement of code is possible only if none
to be moved are redefined within the code sequences from which
items
of
1loop consisting
a
within
Computations
taken.
they are to be
variables
or
constants that are not changed in value within the loop
computations
Decreasing the number of
may be moved outside the loop.
made
within
a
1loop greatly decreases the execution time required by
the

loop.

For

example,
DO

in the
10

seqguence:

I=1,100

F=2.0*%Q*A(I)+F

the value of the computation
2.0*Q,
once
calculated
on
the
first
iterations,
will
remain unchanged during the remaining 99 iterations
Reforming the

of the loop.

foregoing sequence to:

Q0=2.0*Q

DO
10

I=1,100

F=QQ*A(I)+F

moves the calculation 2.0*Q outside
the
scope
of
movement of code eliminates 99 multiply operations.

the

1loop.

This

In addition, it is possible to
remove
entire
assignment
statements
from
loops.
This
action
can
be
easily
detected
from the macro
expanded listings.
The internal
sequence
number
remains
with
the
statement and appears out of order in the leftmost column of the macro
expanded listing (LINE).

WRITING

USER

PROGRAMS

C.2.1.4
Constant Folding and Propagation - In
this
method
of
optimization,
expressions
<containing determinate constant values are
detected and the constants are replaced, at
compile
time,
by
their
defined or calculated value.
For example, assume that the constant PI
is defined and used in the following manner:

PI=3.14159

X=2*PI1*Y

At compile time, the optimizer will have used the defined value of
PI
to
calculate
the
wvalue
of
the
subexpression 2*PI.
The optimized
sequence

then

would

be:

PI=3.14159

X=6.28318*Y

thereby eliminating

a multiply operation

from

the

object

code

program.

The computation of determinate constant
wvalues
at
compile
time
1is
termed
"folding";
the
use
of
the defined value of a constant for
replacement
purposes
throughout
a
program
sequence
is
termed
"propagation
of
the
constants."”
The
execution
time
saved by the
foregoing type of compile time optimization is particularly
important
when the modified instruction occurs in a loop.

C.2.1.5

Removal

Inaccessible

Code

The

optimizer

detects

and

eliminates any code within the source program that cannot be accessed.
In general, this will not happen since
programmers
do
not
normally
include
such
<code in their programs;
however, inaccessible code may
appear in a program during the
debugging
process.
The
removal
of
inaccessible
code by the optimizer will reduce the size of the object
program.
A warning message is generated for
each
1inaccessible
1line
removed.

C.2.1.6

Global

source

program,

minimize computation
allocation
process
MOVEM machine

executed

Allocation

optimizer

During
the

the

that

code.

will

appear

<compilation

allocation

time
in
the
optimized
1is
designed
to
minimize

instructions

portions

controls

registers

object
program.
the number of MOVE
the

most

a
to

The
and

frequently

WRITING

USER

PROGRAMS

C.2.1.7
1I/0 Optimization - Every
effort
1is
made
to
minimize
the
number of regquired calls to the FOROTS system.
This is done primarily
through extensive analysis of implied
DO
1loop
<constructs
on
READ,
WRITE,
ENCODE,
DECODE,
and REREAD statements.
The formats of these
special blocks are
described
1in
Appendix
E.
These
optimizations
reduce
dthe
size
of
the program (argument code plus argument block
size is reduced) and greately improve the performance of programs that
use implied DO loop I/O statements.

C.2.1.8
Uninitialized Variable Detection - A
warning
message
is
generated
when a scalar variable is referenced before it has received
a value.

C.2.1.9
Test Replacement - If the only use of a DO loop index
1s
to
reduce operator strength (D.2.1.2) and the loop does not contain exits
(GO TOs out of the loop), the DO loop index is not needed and
can
be
replaced by the reduced variable.
For

example:
DO

I=1,10

K=K+7*1I

CONTINUE

Reduction of operator
this loop into
po

strength and

test

replacement

together

transform

1=7,70,7

K=K+I

CONTINUE

This occurs

frequently in subscript computation.

Improper

C.2.2

Consider
P

Function References

this

statement:

F(X)

Q(Y)

If:

the

evaluation of

and

the

evaluation of
D,

and

F(X)

defines or

changes

the

variables

Q(Y)

defines

changes

the

values

and

then it is possible that different values of P could result, depending
on
which
function
1is
-evaluated
first.
Let's see how this works.
Let's assign some values (to begin with) to A, B, C, and D and
define
the functions F(X) and Q(Y):
Let:

F(X):

Q(Y):

10.

11.

C
D

=
=

4.
5.

Cc
F

= 8.
=D+

D = 12.
Q =A +

13.

WRITING

USER

PROGRAMS

Now play

computer and evaluate P, calling first F(X), then Q(Y).
Now
re-evaluate
P,
<calling
Q(Y)
first, then F(X).
©Notice that you got
different values for P because the variables A, B, C,
and
D
changed
value depending on the order in which the functions were called.
(Our
answers were 33 when F(X) was called first and 36 when Q(Y) was called
first.)

The

ANSI

FORTRAN

standard prohibits

this

kind

situation.

But

the

compiler
won't
<catch it unless you mention the affected variables in
the function call itself.
The compiler depends on strict adherence to
this

rule.

There's

strong

possibility

that

vyou

won't

get

the

results you want if you don't look for situations
of
this
type
and
avoid
them.
Your
best
bet is to define your variables OUTSIDE the
function and not change them in the course of the
evaluation
of
the
function itself.

C.2.3

Programming

Techniques

Observe the following
source program.
They

C.3

not

use

for

Effective

recommendations during the coding
will improve the effectiveness of

loops

with

Specify

label

lists

when

using

Nest loops so
largest range

that the innermost
of values.

4.,

Avoid

the

Avoid

unnecessary

use

INTERACTING WITH

C.3.1

Calling

extended

associated

use

index

input/output

NON-FORTRAN-10

of
the

a
FORTRAN
optimizer.

range.

assigned

COMMON and

TOs.

the

one

with

the

variables.

EQUIVALENCE.

PROGRAMS

AND

FILES

Sequences

The following paragraphs describe
DECsystem-10 subroutine calls.
l.

Optimization

the

standard

procedures

for

writing

Procedure

The

calling

accumulator
argument in
b.

The

The
AC

left

program

must

load

half

subroutine

then

must

called

set

right

address

half

the

first

zero.

PUSHJ

instruction

17.

The

return will be made to
the
after the PUSHJ 17 instruction.
If

the

(AC)
16
with
the
the argument list.

you

use

facility,

the

/DEBUG:BOUNDS

calling

MOVEI

16,AP

PUSHJ

17,F

1instruction

option

sequence

must

the

immediately

FOROTS

trace

PROGRAMS

USER

WRITING

where AP is the pointer to the argument list.
If you use
the
trace facility, the word preceding the first word of
an entry point should have its name in SIXBIT.
Restrictions

Skip returns are not permitted.

the
before
located
stack
The contents of the pushdown
address specified by AC 17 belong to the calling program;
they cannot be

that
must

FOROTS

initialized

stack

the

The specific
are

as
1.

by:

16,RESET.

library

CALL

Accumulator

subprogram.

stack;
the
of
control
has
it
not
<create
your
own stack.
The

assumes
FOROTS
therefore,
you

JSP

C.3.2

read by the called

routine

RESET.

Usage

functions performed by accumulators

follows:

(AC)

17,16,0,

and

Pushdown Pointer - AC 17 is always maintained as
a
pushdown
pointer.
Its
right half points to the last location in use
on the stack, and its left half contains the negative of
the
number
of (words-1) allocated to the unused remainder of the
stack.
(A trap occurs when something is pushed into the next
to last location.
The trap instruction may itself be a PUSHJ
on the KI10 processor,
which
uses
the
1last
1location.)
A
positive left half is not permitted.
Argument

List

pointer.
contents.

The called subprogram does not need to preserve its
The calling program cannot depend on getting
back

Pointer

wused

the address of the argument list passed to
cannot point to the ACs or to the stack.

the

argument

callee.

Temporary

and Value Return Registers - AC 0 and 1 are used as
temporary
registers
and
for
returning values.
The called
subprogram does not need to preserve the contents of AC 0
or
1l
(even if not returning a value).
The calling program must
never depend on getting back the
original
contents
of
the
data passed to the called subprogram.

Returning

Values

subprogram,
a
the arguments,

- At

the

option of

the

designer

<called

subroutine may pass back results by modifying
returning a single-precision value in AC 0
or

a
double-precision
or
complex
value
in
AC
0
and 1.
A
combination
of
the
above
may
be
used.
However,
two
single-precision
values
cannot
be
returned in AC 0 and 1,
since FORTRAN would not be able to handle it.

USER PROGRAMS

WRITING

Preserved ACs
2 through 15;

- FORTRAN-10 FUNCTION subprograms preserve
subroutine subprograms do not.

ACs

The design of

the called

the

subprogram

cannot

depend

contents
of
any
of
the
ACs
being
set up by the calling
subprogram, except for ACs 16 and
17.
Passing
information
must
be
done
explicitly
by
the
argument list mechanism.
Otherwise,

the called

FORTRAN-10

subprograms cannot be written

in either

COBOL.

Argument Lists

C.3.3

The format of the argument list is as follows:
Arg

Arg

list

count

word

addr.---First arg entry
Second arg entry

entry

arg

Last

The format of the arg count word is:
bits

0-17

These contain -n,

bits

18-35

entries.

where

1is

reserved and must be

These are

The format of an arg entry is as

follows

(each

the

number

arg

entry

1is

single

:
word)

bits 0-8

Reserved for future DEC development

(set

for

.
now)

bits

9-12

Arg

bit 13
bits 14-17
bits 18-35
The

following
1.

type

code.

Indirect bit if desired.
1Index field, must be 0 for
Address of the argument.

restrictions

Neither

the

argument

on
the stack.
can be moved.
argument

should
list

present.

observed:

nor

the

arguments

themselves

can

This restriction is imposed so that the stack
The same restriction applies to
any
indirect

pointers.

The called program may not modify the argument
1list
itself.
The argument list may be in a write-protected segment.

Note that the arg count word is at position -1
with
respect
to
the contents of AC 16.
This word is always required even
if the subroutine
does
not
handle
a
variable
number
of
arguments.
A
subroutine
that
has no arguments must still
provide an argument list consisting of two words,
1.e.,
the
argument count word with a 0 in it and a zero argument word.

WRITING

USER

PROGRAMS

Example

MOVEI
PUSHJ
oo

16,AP
17,SUB

s ARGUMENT

; SET UP ARG POINTER
; CALL SUBROUTINE
; RETURN HERE

LIST

-3,,0
A

AP:

s SUBROUTINE TO SET THIRD ARG TO SUM OF

ADD
MOVEM
POPJ

C.3.4

Argument

:GET FIRST ARG
:ADD SECOND ARG
:SET THIRD ARG
:RETURN TO CALLER

T,R0(16)
T,R1(16)
T,@2(16)
17,

MOVE

SUB:

FIRST TWO ARGS

Types

Argument

Table C-1
Types and Type

Type Code

Codes

Description
FORTRAN

Use

COBOL

Use

0
1
2
3

Unspecified
FORTRAN Logical
Integer
Reserved

Unspecified
Not applicable
l-word COMP
Reserved

14
15
16
17

Complex
Not applicable

Not applicable
Byte string descriptor
Reserved
Not applicable

4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13

Real
Reserved
Octal
Label
Double real
Not applicable
Double Octal
Reserved

Reserved
ASCIZ string

COMP-1
Reserved
Reserved
Procedure address
Not applicable
2-word COMP
Reserved
Reserved

Literal arguments are permitted, but they must reside

1in

writable

This is because the FORTRAN-10 compiler makes a local of all
segment.
caller's
the
to
formals back
all
copies
and
non-array elements

arguments.

development.

All

wunused

type

codes

are reserved for future DIGITAL

WRITING

C.3.5
The

Description

types

the

Type

The

calling

type

the

called

Type
A

has

should

assume

A
4.

the

should

binary

and
-

none

the

1If

should

several

assume

the

value

negative

2's

and

Real

and

above

handle

types

default

called

the

correct

are
as

conditions

the

The

argument

possible,

part

of
true,

its
the

integer

.TRUE..

specify

positive

specify

l-word-COMP
signed

binary

integer.

COMP-1

DECsystem-10

format

sign
excess 128
mantissa

36-bit
7

unsigned

Label

23-bit

binary

and

memory

floating-point

number.

exponent

Type

value.

procedure

address

address.

Double

always O
indirect
0

the

flag

address

real

A double-precision

floating-point

number

code
1s
being executed, i.e., KA
and KI format on a KI1l0 processor.
Type
A

containing

complement

bits 0-12
bit 13
bits 14-17
bits 18-35

type.

argument

logical

Integer

36-bit

Type
A

specified

that

Type 6 - Octal
A

not

types.

bit O
bits 1-8
bits 9-35

are:

checking

FORTRAN

36-bit

Type

passed

subprogram

36-bit

Type

2).

.FALSE.
3.

may

program

specification.

(type

that

Unspecified

subprograms

called

PROGRAMS

Arguments

arguments
-

USER

2-word

Type
A

2-word

COMP

(72-bit)

2's

word
word
word
word

1,
1,
2,
2,

Double

72-bit

complement

bit O
bits 1-35
bit O
bits 1-35

unsigned

binary

signed

sign
high order
same as word
low order

octal
value.

for

format

the

CPU

binary

integer.

bit

which

KAlO processor

WRITING

Type

10.

PROGRAMS

USER

- Complex

A complex number represented as an
ordered
pair
of
36-bit
floating-point
numbers.
The first represents the real part,
and the second represents the imaginary part.

Type

11.

15 - Byte String Descriptor

The format of the byte string descriptor

is:

word

the
at
aimed
1i.e.,
ILDB-type pointer,
preceding the first byte of the string

word

EXP byte

The byte

descriptor

byte

count

may

not

modified

the

called

The byte string itself must consist of a string of
program.
any
be
The byte size may
contiguous bytes of uniform size.
number
of
bits
from 1 to 36.
The byte count must be large
enough to encompass 256K words of storage, i.e., 24 bits
for
l1-bit bytes.

12.

Type

(See

- ASCIZ

COBOL Program Reference

Manual.)

string

A string of contiguous 7-bit ASCII bytes
1left
justified
on
the
word boundary of the first word and terminated by a null
byte in the last word.
The length of the string may be
from
l

C.3.6
The

256K

words.

Converting Existing MACRO-10 Libraries for use with FORTRAN-10
following

sequence.

simple

example

illustrates

the

FORTRAN-10

calling

daTAx13d174x¥91IxLT

0D JHL SINIWLNOY¥° T:Y9AYLIT

SHVIVISANVSAVINY]uwxwONILIDITAXTNOILINIJA—w%wIONdaONITITT[

9990 NIT11VTI1Y4ADnT0d1dW90YNSXO*T°P°9IC§¢IS‘N¥I¥NJ¥V)VVD0ITA¥1YAXT¥‘3Id9dVYINDYTY0LIY9I‘doDY(¥dJOL1DTN)AJIN9YWNOOILVJINLWST‘'YSIE¥YATNDYOI*IDYdNaIAVLANd“O7‘Y9LLdVLEwYNIS¥V(HA,I2L9IY9M,¥ALIYAJ0SLNAWNOYY

(NOI0SNTIW)IAd

010 0 ¢10 0 £€T10 0 v10 0

GT000
91000
LT000

ONd

SWYIDO0UddnNsS d TIVvD

"NIVIW
10000
¢0000
£€0000
70000
50000
90000
L0000
80000
60000

WRITING
USER

C-15

PROGRAMS

SHIYVIOdNWIL

USER

PROGRAMS

0¢ M/0T

T2 da‘’‘ob

WRITING

d9’T0¢

C-16

9SLT3I2I0¥¥NTVYx0Id»V1I4OdSAN9PT9)VISAVYYCExNIIVLxxI]OJTwxduWYXO0SZTTNTLJ0IDIATHALXTTPI3Xd«VAxx3SNNdO«IxALNIYT93NI1TINJOAIILAVY—DIJ,A.%I4AOIWONJ0CTWIxIddx3ZTXOYYNWVIUI«YO~IdJALVI¥TSYYIL[IWYWI%xYV€CNdXAXYVY€0T2G

L160Z7G8922Z21T1z000000000000000 WNaTT1LIJnIU¥IdIOdNNNdT¥I1LX3ddIY=I =L yYVY==my=D =TM(:IXI)XX£€2TX,d=WDZX‘¥X) (0°0

7628T€701100000000 Nv1X1OXIIS=¥ =T ==T =2 =€ =€ NAWIToLTWJYI¥III0ZVNdTNAX3A1I¥QdNdYVaYWYN(X£)Y (0T)
USER

C-17

WSHIYVIOd
AL

*XTdWO0OD

€2000

SWY DOUd Ns d TI¥D

GTI000

G0000
L0000

WRITING
PROGRAMS

C-18

X1d

JAONW JAONW

IZ ¢c £c

VI
91

adav

dAOKWd WIAONKWA dAOW JAON

€'¢

ZX'L T1'T

€T

r'L

WWIIAAOONWW
WWWAIIAAOOONNWWW
WIAOWN TIYIAN‘0

A(ZIS)S

IX’0

G¢
9¢
LT

WIAONW TJAON WIAONW

USER

0¢

TXd¥0d° NYIdLIO0d WIAOW
JAONW (9T)Z9‘T
WIZXEVY’T
(9T1)€0‘T
JWAIOANOWNW oNdT1daa’y
TINI‘Z
(9T)¥ve‘?P
(9T)SP‘E
LJ0’¢€
9T)9 ‘9
WIAOW (LIT’9
(€X'TWYNXIVY’L
L)L L L'L
ONS‘LT
PX'y P

d0IL0VITCN’I‘DZ¥S490€9
WJAIOANOWW ‘9T19’1‘09’09(9T)TO0V"(9T)

201 Td49V'1 W/IM/ 9L-AON-%¥ 6T1:21 d9vdI-1
TIY3Y‘0

0T
TT
Al

ANI'I

WRITING
PROGRAMS

Z1’'€ €19

WIAONW

0¢ I¢ A3 ge

G ‘Z LJ0'Z

L1200

LIT’'Z

WYNXJVY'’E

0’S

r‘e

WRITING USER PROGRAMS

‘WT

aav

G¢

: 50014

0¢c

C-19

99 L9

WRITING

To convert
still load
1.

PROGRAMS

existing MACRO-10 programs conveniently so that
they
will
and execute correctly when called from F40 or FORTRAN-10:

Transfer

the

initial

entry

PUSH

Change

These are the
These
macros
release) were
with both F40

all

sequence

for

routine

CAIA

entry:

USER

returns

17 ,CEXIT.
##

POPJ

17,0

functions performed by
the
HELLO
and
GOODBY
macros.
(available
in
the file FORPRM.MAC, part of the FOROTS
successfully used to convert the library routines to run
and FORTRAN-10.

In addition, since the FORTRAN-10 compiler uses the indirect
bits
on
argument
1lists
(note
that
this
permits shared, pure code argument
lists), it 1is essential for code that accesses parameters to take this
into
account.
Specifically,
sequences
that obtained the values of
parameters through use of operations such as
HRRZ

to pick

MOVEI

R,1(16)

the

address

the

second

argument

should

work

when

interfacing

changed

R,Q@1(16)

The latter operation
FORTRAN-10.

will

with

either

F40

Refer to the previous example, which illustrates the code generated by
the
FORTRAN-10 compiler, for specific details of how each argument is
accessed.
Note that in the case
of
the
formal
array,
it
1is
the
address of the array that 1is accessed.

C.3.7

Mixing

FORTRAN-10 and

F40

Compiled

Programs

Starting with Version 1A of LINK-10, use of the

that
results
in
a
degradation
of
the
1loaded.
This
feature
1is provided as a
It is not intended to be used
for
other

with

will

This introduces extra code
execution
of
programs
so
convenience for conversion.
than conversion assistance.

Interaction

This

/MIXFOR

and
F40
is loaded.

C.3.8

programs.

switch

permit
loading
FORTRAN-10
modifying the code while it

achieved

COBOL-10

The FORTRAN-10 programmer may call COBOL-10 programs
as
subprograms,
and, conversely, the COBOL programmers may call FORTRAN-10 programs as
'
subprograms.

either

the

called

the

foregoing

subprogram.

cases,

I/0 operation must

not

performed

WRITING

C.3.8.1
Calling FORTRAN-10
programmers
may
write

USER

PROGRAMS

Subprograms
subprograms

from COBOL-10 Programs - COBOL
in
FORTRAN-10
to
use
the

conveniences and facilities provided by this language.
The COBOL verb
ENTER is used to call FORTRAN-10 subroutines.
The form of ENTER is as
follows:

5
ENTER FORTRAN program name

identifierl

|[USING

(literall

procedure

om——

identifier2

namel

¢literal2

procedure?

The USING clause of the foregoing forms
names
the
data
within
the
COBOL
program
that
1is
to
be
passed
to
the
<called
FORTRAN-10
subprogram.
The
passed
data
must
be
1in
a
form
acceptable
to
FORTRAN-10.

The calling sequence used by COBOL in calling a FORTRAN-10

subprogram

is:

MOVEI

16,

address

PUSHJ

17,

subprogram

first

entry

argument

list

address

1f the USING clause appears
in
the
ENTER
statement,
the
compiler
creates an argument list that contains an entry for each identifier or
1is
It
USING clause.
the
1in
appearance
of
literal in the order
preceded
by
a word containing, in its left half, the negative number
present,
If no USING clause is
of the number of entries in the list.
contains an empty word, and the preceding word 1is
1list
argument
the
Each entry in the list is one 36-bit word at the form:
set to 0.
0-8

9-12

13-35

type

address

Bits

0-8

are

always

Bits

9-12 contain a

type code

that

indicates

the

USAGE

the

argument.

Bits 13-35 contain the address of the
argument
of
word of the argument;
the address can be indexed or
Following

appear

is a description of

addresses.

For

the

argument

l-word

2-word

CODE:
IN ARGUMENT

ADDRESS:

LIST:

For

LIST:

how

CODE:
IN ARGUMENT

XWD 100, address
that of the argument

the

codes

11
XWD

that

itself

items

440,

address

the

high-order

argument

COMPUTATIONAL-1

ADDRESS:

codes,

1locations specified by the

items

COMPUTATIONAL

their

the

IN ARGUMENT
ADDRESS:

For

types,

and

COMPUTATIONAL

CODE:

the

1list,

the
first
indirect.

LIST:

items
4
XWD

200,

that of

C-21

address

the

argument

itself

word

the

WRITING

For

DISPLAY-6

CODE:
IN ARGUMENT

ADDRESS:

and

USER

DISPLAY-7

LIST:

WORD1:

15
XWD

that

PROGRAMS

items

640,

address

2-word

argument

byte

pointer

descriptor

the

identifier

literal

WORD2:

bit
bit
bit

0 is 1 if the item is numeric
1 is 1 if the item is signed
2 is 1 if the item
1is
a
figurative
constant (including ALL)
bit 3 is 1 if the item is a literal
bits
4
through
11
are
reserved
for
expansion
has
1item
bit 12 is 1 if the
with
one
or
more
Ps just
decimal point, e.g., 99PPV.
bits 13 through
17
are
the
is

bits
the

For procedure names

the

If bit

places.

decimal

for

number

18 through
item

PICTURE
a
before the

number
of
12 is 1, this

Ps.

35 contain

the

size

bytes.

(which cannot be used for calls to

COBOL

subprograms)
CODE:

IN ARGUMENT

LIST:

ADDRESS:

The return from a subprogram
the

call.

C.3.8.2

Calling

7
XWD

340,

that

address
the procedure

(via POPJ 17,)

is to the statement

COBOL-10 Subroutines from FORTRAN-10 Programs

after

- To

call COBOL subroutines use the standard subroutine calling mechanism:
CALL COBOLS (args...)
X=COBOLS (args...)

subroutine call
function call

You must have compiled the COBOL subroutine using the
COBOL
compiler
described in the DECsystem-10 COBOL Programmer's Reference Manual.

C.3.9

LINK-10 Overlay Facilities

LINK-10 provides several routines that are accessible directly from
a
FORTRAN-10
program.
These
routines
are
presented
here
briefly,

together with the FORTRAN-10 specification of
their
parameters.
In
general,
LINK-10
performs
these
functions
automatically.
These
routines are available only for your convenience.
Full details of the
use

Manual.

the

overlay facilities can be
:

found

in the

LINK-10 Reference

WRITING USER PROGRAMS

Conventions - The following terms are used

C.3.9.1

parameters to LINK-10 overlay routines.

consisting

File spec

A literal constant

Name

A LINK name or number

List of link names

filename.ext

[directory]

variable.

constant

name

sequence

describe

the

device:

1literal

that

1is

items

separated

commas.

The routines avallable are:

(File spec) Used
file
to
be
specification is

INIOVL

(List of link names)

GETOVL

RUNOVL

C.3.10

structure

(Name)

Loads
to

the

that

from

(File spec)

change

the

specified

LINK

and

Removes the

specified

Used

in core.

LINK.

(List of link names)
LINKs

LOGOVL

For a full

overlay

transfers

REMOVL

Reference

overlay
the
specify
to
found
1if
the
1load
time
to be overridden.

core.

Used to specify where

the

If no arguments
file is to be written.
given, the log file is closed.

description

these

routines,

refer

the

1log

are

LINK-10

Manual.

FOROTS/FORSE Compatibility

1is
C.3.10.2
(C.3.10.1 and
Sections
in
information presented
The
those users who have programs and data files that
for
only
intended
FORSE object
the
and
were developed using the F40 FORTRAN compiler
The following sections describe the manner in which both
time system.
upward and downward compatibility between the FORTRAN-10,
F40,

FORSE FORTRAN systems may be achieved.

FOROTS

and

FORTRAN-10/F40 Data File Compatibility - Table C-2 describes
C.3.10.1
Table C-3
TO FOROTS).
(FORSE
files
data
of
compatibility
upward
FORSE).
TO
(FOROTS
files
data
of
describes downward compatibility

WRITING

USER

Table

Upward

PROGRAMS

C-2

Compatibility

(FORSE TO FOROTS)

May

FORSE
File

read
Type

FOROTS

Sequential ASCII

Yes

The

Following

Manner:

May be

record

read

directly;

positioning

operations,
BACKSPACE,

may

Sequential

Binary

Yes

May be
a

Sequential

Mixed

files

Yes

read directly

forward

May be

RECORD,

used.

record
operations
permitted.

€.g.,
SKIP

fashion

positioning
are
not

read directly

a forward
record

Random Access

ASCII
Binary

Files
Files

No}
No

NOTE:

fashion only;
positioning

operations
permitted.
Random Access

1in

only;

not

suggest

that

a
random
access
file
be read
(using
FORSE)
and
be
rewritten as a
sequential
file
that
can
be
accepted
by
FOROTS.

WRITING

USER

PROGRAMS

C.3.10.2
Converting FOROTS Data Files to FORSE-Acceptable Form - The
following
paragraphs
describe procedures that may be used to convert
FOROTS sequential mixed, random access ASCII, and random access binary
data files into a form that can be read by FORSE.
Conversion of FOROTS Sequential Mixed Files - We suggest the following
sequential mixed file into either a
FOROTS
a
convert
to
procedure
sequential ASCII or sequential binary file acceptable to FORSE.
1.

Prepare

either

and

run a

FORTRAN-10

sequential ASCII or

I/O program

that

will

produce

a sequenial binary output file.

it
must
be
If
a
seguential
ASCII
file
1is
produced,
Line-blocking
line-blocked
before
1t can be read by FORSE.
system
the
is accomplished by copying the file using either

COPY
line

the

command

(with

blocked and will

data

example
file

A switch)

PIP.

acceptable

FORSE.

The copy will be
The

following

of the command sequence needed to line-block

FOROT.DAT:

.COPY FOROT.DAT=FOROT.DATA/A

it
must
be
If
a
segquential
binary
file
1s
produced,
FORSE.
by
record-blocked
before
it
can
be
read
Record-blocking is accomplished using the /K feature
of
the
program
BAKWDS.
The following is an example of the command

sequence needed to record-block the data file FOROT.DAT:
.R

BAKWDS

*FOROT.DAT=FOROT.DAT/K

WRITING

USER

Table

Downward

PROGRAMS

C-3

Compatibility

May

(FOROTS

Read

File

FORSE

Sequential

ASCII

File

Yes

FORSE)

FOROTS

Type

The

Following

Manner:

This

operation

permitted
1f the file is
line-blocked.
This
may
be accomplished by making
a copy of the file
using
either
the
system
copy
command
(with
an
A
switch)
or
the
PIP
program.
The
resulting
copy
will
be
line-blocked.
An

example

sequence

block
using
.R

the

needed

a
PIP,

command

FOROTS
follows:

line

file,

PIP

* FOROTS . DAT=FOROTS
. DAT/A

Sequential

Binary

File

Yes

This
operation
is
permitted
if the file is
record-blocked.
This
type
of
blocking
is
accomplished by using the
/K
option of the program
BAKWDS.
The following 1is
an

example

sequence

record-blocks
.R

command

which
file.

BAKWDS

* FORSE . DAT=FOROTS
. DAT/K

Sequential

Mixed

File

(See

Section

suggested
procedure.)

Random Access

ASCII

File

(See Section
suggested

C.3.10.2

for

conversion

C.3.10.2

for
conversion

procedure.)

Random Access Binary File

(See Section
suggested
procedure.)

C.3.10.2 for
conversion

WRITING USER PROGRAMS

Conversion of FOROTS Random Access ASCII Files - We suggest the
following procedure to convert a FOROTS random access ASCII file into

a form acceptable to FORSE.

Prepare and run a FORTRAN-10 I/O program that will <create a
sequential ASCII file consisting of the records of the random
access

file.

Line-block the sequential ASCII file using either the system
(with an A switch) or the PIP program. The
COPY command
following is an example of the COPY command:
.COPY LNBLK.DAT=SEQFL.DAT/A

The foregoing
(LNBLK.DAT)

command

would

produce

line-blocked

copy

the

file

of the sequential file SEQFL.DAT.

Prepare and run an F40 I/O program that will

produced

step

and

will

generated random access file.

read

rewrite the file as a FORSE

Conversion of FOROTS Random Access Binary Files - We suggest the
following procedure to convert a FOROTS random access binary file into

a form acceptable to FORSE.

Prepare and run a FORTRAN-10 I1/0 program that will create a
sequential binary file consisting of the records of the
random access file.

Record-block the sequential file. This 1is accomplished by
using the /K feature of the program BAKWDS. The following

example illustrates the command sequence required to <convert
the file FOROTS.DAT into the record-blocked file FORBLK.DAT.
.R BAKWDS

*FORBLK.DAT=FOROTS.DAT/K

An F40 I/O
sequential
access

C.3.10.3

file.

program may then be written to convert the
record-blocked file into a FORSE generated random

General Restrictions - Observe

the

following

restriction

during the preparation of FORTRAN-10 programs and data files:

are not
(as implemented for the F40 compiler)
implemented in FORTRAN-10. An overlay capability that is greatly

CHAIN functions

superior to CHAIN is available with LINK-10 version 2.

APPENDIX

FOROTS

This appendix describes the facilities that FOROTS provides for the
FOROTS implements all standard FORTRAN I/O operations
FORTRAN user.
as set forth in the "American National Standard FORTRAN, ANSI
x3.9-1966." In addition it provides the user with capabilities and
programming features beyond those defined in the ANSI standard.
The primary function of FOROTS is to act as a direct interface between

user

object

output operations.

D.1

and

programs

the DECsystem-10 monitor during input and

Other capabilities include:

initialization

Job

Channel

Error handling and reporting

File management

Formatting of data

Mathematical library

User library

Specialized applications packages

Overlay facilities

10.

F40 compatibility

and core management

(non-mathematical)

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

You can run FOROTS on a DECsystem-10 KAl0, KI10,

KL10

processor.

FOROTS may interface with all DECsystem-10 peripheral devices.
addition to monitor or user program reguirements, a minimum of

pages of user core is needed to run FOROTS.

In
14

FOROTS

The software required with
Other
software
version.

FOROTS

items

the

that

5.06

can

monitor

associated

later

with

FOROTS

include:

D.2

The

MACRO-10

The

LINK-10

The

system program

The

FORTRAN-10

FEATURES

assembler
loader

(version

(version
COMPIL

compiler

later)

1A or

later)

(version

22 or

(version

later)

FOROTS

The following list briefly describes
many
specific
information
concerning the implementation
detailed
is given later in this appendix.
1.

and

features;

these

features

Your program may run in
either
batch
or
timesharing
mode
without
requiring a program change.
All differences between
batch mode and timesharing mode operations
are
resolved
by
FOROTS.

Your programs may access
both
devices 1n the same manner.
FOROTS helps provide complete
all DECsystem-10 devices.

directory

data

file

may
the

non-directory

compatibility

FOROTS does not require
1line-blocking
(a
each
output
buffer
must contain only an
lines).

Up to 15 data files
number
or
all
of

and

between

requirement
that
integral number of

be
accessed
simultaneously.
Any
open
data
files
may
be accessed

randomly.

FOROTS

treats

local

devices.

Programs

devices

written

correctly on
the commands

for

disk under
needed for

You may change
specifications
Non-FORTRAN

located

magnetic

remote

tape

stations

similarly

operations

will

FOROTS supervision.
FOROTS
magnetic tape operations.

run

simulates

or specify
object
program
device
and
via a FOROTS interactive dialogue mode.

binary

data

files

may

read

1image

file

mode

FOROTS.

10.

FOROTS

provides

processing

interactive

routines.

These

execution
of
the
program
routines whenever designated
11.

error

traceback

history of all
at the address

facility

program/operating

routines

permit

you

to
specific
error
types of errors are
for

fatal

errors

system

error

route

the

processing
detected.
provides

subprogram calls made back to the main
of the point where the error occurred.

program

FOROTS

12.

13.

FOROTS

provides

functions,

including

trap

handling

default

values

system

and

error

You may mix ASCII and binary records in the
may

both

for

arithmetic

same

file,

reports.

and

accessed in either sequential or random access

.
mode

14.

WRITE
FOROTS permits your program to switch from READ to
the same I/0 device without loss of data or buffering.

15.

wuse
for
designed
Although primarily
FOROTS
use
also
may
you
compiler,
system,
for

D.3

as an

FORTRAN-10

I1/0 system for

MACRO-10

F40 object programs.

and

FORTRAN-10
the
with
as an independent I/O

object

programs,

and

ERROR PROCESSING

the FOROTS error processing
Whenever a run-time error is detected,
This system determines the
system takes control of program execution.
class of the error and either outputs an appropriate

controlling

processing

D.4

terminal

routine.

branches

program

the

message

the

a predesignated

INPUT/OUTPUT FACILITIES

except
access
of
modes
FOROTS uses monitor-buffered I/0 during all
formatted
are supported in dump mode;
devices
Display
DUMP mode.
unformatted files are accessed as
text is handled in ASCII line mode;
Monitor Calls Manual.)
DECsystem-10
to
(Refer
files.
binary
FORTRAN

The following paragraphs describe I/O data channel and access modes.

Input/Output Channels Used Internally by FOROTS

D.4.1

I/0
in
are available
15)
(1 through
Fifteen software channels
<channel 0 is reserved for the following system
Software
operations.
functions:

The printing

The

1loading

error

and

messages,

and

initialization

FOROTS

(GETSEG

uuo

wuser

program

data

operations)

Software channels 1 through 15 are available

for

When a request is made for a data channel, a
transfer operations.
The first free
1is found.
table is scanned until a free channel
of the
completion
on
program;
requesting
the
to
is assigned
channel
to
returned
1is
channel
software
assigned transfer, control of the
FOROTS.

FOROTS

File

D.4.2

Modes

Access

transferred

Data may be

processor

between

storage

devices in two major modes - sequential and random.

and

peripheral

transfer
data
sequential
D.4.2.1 Sequential Transfer Mode - In
the records involved are transferred in the same order as
operations,

in this
Each I/O statement executed
they appear in the source file.
immediately following the last record
mode transfers the record
A special version of the
transferred from the accessed source file.
sequential

mode

(referred

APPEND)

available for output

to write a
record immediately after the last logical record of the accessed file.
During the APPEND operation, the records already in the accessed file
The special APPEND mode permits you

(write) operations.

the only function performed is the appending of the

remain unchanged;

transfY2red records to the end of the file.

the
You must specify transfer modes (other than SEQINOUT) by setting
to one of several
FORTRAN-10 OPEN statement
a
ACCESS option of

possible arguments.

For the sequential mode,

the arguments are

ACCESS='SEQIN' (sequential read-only mode)
ACCESS='SEQOUT' (sequential write-only mode)

(sequential read followed by a sequential

ACCESS='SEQINOUT'

write)

ACCESS='APPEND'

(sequential

Append mode)

Random Access Mode - This transfer mode permits records to be
D.4.2.2
source file in any desired order.
a
from
transferred
and
accessed
a
and
core
processor
between
Random access transfers must be made
(disk) that permits random addressing operations to files that
device
must
access
random
for
Files
have been set up for random access.
number of identically sized records that may be
specified
a
contain
individually accessed by a

record number.

You may accomplish random access transfers in either a read/write mode
You must specify random transfer modes
special read-only mode.
a
or
several
of
one
by setting the ACCESS option of an OPEN statement to
possible

arguments.

ACCESS='RANDOM'
ACCESS='RANDIN'

D.5

(random
(random

read/write mode)
special read-only mode)

ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF DATA FILES AND THEIR FORMATS

The following paragraphs describe the types of
acceptable

D.5.1

ASCII

data

files

are

that

FOROTS.

Data

Files

Each record within an ASCII data file consists of a set of
contiguous
A vertical paper-motion character, such as, a Form
characters.
7-bit
ASCII
All
Feed, a Vertical Tab, or a Line Feed, terminates each set.

the last word in a record is padded

records start on a word boundary;

to ensure that the record

with nulls,

if necessary,

There

implied maximum length

word

boundary.
is no

also

ends

Logical records may be split across physical blocks.
for

D-4

logical

records.

FOROTS

NOTE

sequential
input,
FOROTS
does
not
require conformation to word boundaries;
it reads what it sees.
Therefore,
any
file
that
1is
written
by
FOROTS will
conform
to
the
foregoing
format
requirements.

D.5.2
Each

FORTRAN Binary
logical

record

Data

Files

FORTRAN binary data

file

contains

data

that

the
executing
program
wmay
reference
with
either
a READ or WRITE
statement.
A logical record is preceded by a control
word
and
may
have
one or more control words embedded within it.
In FORTRAN binary
data files, there is
no
relationship
between 'logical
records
and
physical
device
block sizes.
There is no implied maximum length for
logical records.
|
|

D.5.2.1

Format of Binary Files

- A FOROTS

binary

file

may

contain

three forms of Logical Segment Control Words (LSCW).
These LSCWs give
FOROTS the ability to distinguish ASCII files from binary files.
LSCW

START

001+

the

number

words

CONTINUE

END

LSCWs.

the

'RANDOM',

CONTINUE

(exclusive

‘

all

records

are

the

OPEN

'SEQINOUT',
specify is

of the same length,

statement
all three
'RANDIN',

and there are no

LSCWs.

The following examples
file contains only 001

segment

access you specify for
a
file
(through
parameter)
1is
'SEQIN', 'SEQOUT', or
appear in a record.
If the access you

ACCESS
=
LSCWs may

the

any "END" LSCWs)
002
indicates
that
the
segment
of
a
disk
block
boundary continues
003+ number
of words in the preceding segment including

illustrate the
and 003 LSCWs.

LSCW.

The

random access

LOOK AT A BINARY FILE AND SEE THE LOGICAL SEGMEN?Y

CONTROL

WORDS.

OPEN(UN]T=1,ACCESS='RANDOM’ yMODE2/BINARY/,
1

RECORD=1¥9)

135

WRITE(1'Y)

(1.

J=1,100)

SE D

WRITE(1'2)
END

(J,K=3%1,100)

binary

FOROTS

o000
o700y

22002

20003

Pe’R04
@g2005
BpCoRe

Qo007

Ppz21@

201020
200000

geRowes5
2000320 220205
200230 220005

2g2020

eoe200
200200
200000

0002282

29011

200000

Pp2012
Q2013

080200

29014

Pg2@15
2pco16

p2017

P/ 020

PgoR2

000000

coooee

202200

Gooooe
ooeloQ
0@2000

002000
20000

0@ 022
2,023
22.*024

ggodece

2pr@25
P 026
20027

2000020

000020
200220

002220

292030

002020

2eI034

2g22020
2020200

P2p"232

2p2R33
2p/234
2p’035%
B@R36

Pp2037
Cpr04p
02041
Pp2R42

Pp 2043

Pei044

202045
PpL046

Pp2047

222050

2gue5q
PpCR52

/80220
0po000

200200

coolan
°p2220
Jged2o
200020
2ged00
eoodes
200200

2000020
cpeleo

200020
02020
2008000
200700

Pp 2054

000020
2000280

@@7055

2020200

2056

200020

22057

200020

092060

200020
200020

o053

Bp72064

B2@1 45 <— Number of words
in record counting
eegoes

Bp 062

2oe020

Ppr063

200220

grgags
208085
goe0as5
220005
g2ga@s
20025
200205
2beees5
220085
202005
220885
geeapgs
220085
aegaas
geeaps
gegoes
APQ2e5
2P0Res5
2200085
220025
eo22e5
220085
p0B025
2oRne5
g2e2p5
02gags5
22090205
p2gags
pPRe@s5
228295
200005
200085
gogeas
geeass
a0Qees
g2gepgs
2200025
222005
geeees5
geeens
229705
pepeas
aReees
a72paoRs
200005
220305
goQaps

END LSCW or the

number of words
following this
word to the

END LSCW.

BRaR64

P 265
Ppr066

2p2Q67

o270

03071

Bp.'072
@P2073
2p2074
22075
204076
Qpd@77

o100
Bp2101

82102

22103

Bpci124
7105

dp7i106
@p2107
2p:119

2p2111
Pp¢112
207113
Bp114

2pd11%

Ppzi116

220005
oPgBe5
200205
200000 aRgnAgs
203200 2200025
o0r2030 200025
dgedee gReoes
egeeao 22205
egepaoo 298205
2ge002 pe@ags
02220 g2gegs
200020 engepss
002220 208005
200000 a0gags
200000 202285
2022002 220005
202200 2Pgoes
2000200 2200205
200000 peeeRs
2g2P00 2090225
2geoan 2000085
200200 200095

000020

Jgedoe
220900

2000202

200020

ogeceo
2gecep
280000

2pi17

oge230

Gpril2p
Bpel21

20002282

Ppa122
22123

e0l20

Bp125
Pp2126

depooe

2912124

Bp0127

P0p0213p

Ppo13y
990132
20133
020134
220135

PpR136

202000

202020
200020
2geogo

P20000

202000

oge000
dooRoe

dpecen
200000
000002

222137

2002022
2000200

Ppni42
P@2143
PR 144

200000

Pg¢140
P@2141

20145

@146

@p’147

Bp*159

200000
200000
200000

202020

2p3220
2019220
20020

2opedan

220225

208225
200005
22QR0e5
oegaes
200005
200085
22Q0es
2200205
209205
829205
R2Q2@s
pCoRR5
oP0005
2000es5
2PP005
ePe9p%
eoe2es
2Pge95
2900085
2000025
a020p8%
200025
200005
20RARS
329205
290085
2?3@146 —END LSCW

P20145

Containing the

220007

in the record
including LSCW's.

2eop7

number of words

FOROTS

200207
200227
CpoP20 200207
282220 2008007
Age220
2070320

Bpa233
Ppa234

@2.2155

200009

Pp3235
22236
Pp2237

Bp2156

200229

2pit151
2@ 2152

Bp2153
@p2154

20157

200000

Bp7160

Q@2200

Bg’ 161

2,162

202020
2pedon

Pp2164

0pa029
202020

#2165

200022

02166

22000

Bpli67

Poooae

294170

200030
202000

2R %163

Ppel171
Q@172
22173

8174
293175

Bpl176

2p.1177

2oadep
22900

200020
200200
202000
2002292

01200
Ppv20oy

Apa000

Pp. 202

dpeago

0p2222

203

202220

02,204
2p208%

2000009

200022

07206

2peRece

212

Joeca0
200020
200222
Jogeden

Pp..213

202229

2912207

@p.1210
Ppi1211

Pp2214

@215
P

216
Q@217

2p2220
Pp2221

200000

200000
2p0000

200000

cpeean
2pp020

p2222
Bpi223

egeeeo

dec224
Pp2225

dgoReo

222000

@gi227
Ppe239
Ppa231

000020
Pp0000
ogeron
dgedoe
Jge000

Pp.2232

2o0200

2p2226

200007

200207
208007
200007
000007
200007
200207
200007
200007
LLErE,
300007
200007
300007
200007
2000807
300207
02007
3002307
220307
2020307
200007
300007
0900087
200007
200007
2008007
200007
200207
200007
302007
a0eaa7
000007
200007
200007
202207
200007
202007
TLLIK,
209007
200007
2208007
3002807
LITTE,
200807
300007
200007

200000

200000
2ogoee
200020
0geP00

Ppvi24p

PP 241
@pv 242

PooPag
200029
000000

Bp:243
Bp2244
2p2245

200000
2padop
002020

80246

220700

Bpii247

208000

@p2259

02200
2009082

2@:251
@@7252

202000

8g2253

200200

Pp.2254
7255
PR 256

7oeeae

2p7257

Agr 260
PpZ261

2g2022

22000
000220

200220
200220

Ppr262
263
Ppii2é4

22266
B 267

vgooae

@p279
Apc271

202020

@pn272

Je20200

g 273

2ap0ce

200000
202000

265

274

@p2275

Bp 2276
Bpl277
20300

Ppc301
22302
Bp.303

200000

2000280
eo0220

200200
200020

cpooeo

Poo@20
200000
Peodan

2ood02
200200

Bpc304
Pp2305
Bp306

?eo200

dec307
202310

2oe0g2
200000

Bpec3i12

02311

20200
2peleo

Pp343

003020

8 L',
200020

4 d
gPoee7
aRgae?
aepea?
20@0@7
229207
pogap7
aogoa7
2200@7
52g2a7
2080227
2000287
o20287
220007
200227

2oeag7

g22pag7
pogae?
go0ae7
B2egag7
20297
graag7
220087
00007

geeog7
2ep0Q7
220207

argaa7
edeeqa?
pegoa7
o8e0g7
aeeoe?
2000827
200087
2eg2e7
goeoa7
aegea7
gPe2a7
gageg?
oeo0@7
ghgea?
gooee?
gRRoR7
g2egae?
ereeg?
geooa7?
gegee?
2000207
a%@146

FOROTS

In the sequential access binary file,

128-word disk boundary and contains a

the second
002

record

(CONTINUE)

LSCW.

crosses

LOOK AT A BINARY FILE AND SEE THE LOS!CAL SEGMENT
CONTROL

WORDS,

OPEN(UN]T=4,MODE®/B]NARY’)
[=5

WRITE(L)

(1,

J=1.,100)

Ja7

WRITE(L)

END

(J,K=1.,100)

0.2

2012232 220145

Bp3R43

@022 Q022@P5

Pp2003
20204

02Q200p 200085
Q00020 2004025

Pp<046
Pp. 047

202200 20Q2Q5S
Q2002002 2208eQ5

Ppl2@1
92002

P0.:905
Pp:>206

Q00002 290005
200222 290025

2J0@220 2P@225
202330 29Q@2@25

Pp:0037

0QC220 220205

2 11
Pp.)012
Pp 013
Pp.214
Pp’0215
Pp:P16

2Q2220
200920
0P3320
Q0020
0@2000
7200020

e 21p

PR 017
Pg/028
0p’021

Pp:022
Pp 023

Pp:024

0202230

Pp D44
Pp. 045

Pp2050
Pp.054

Opo052

0@o2Q9

QQoQge 27@7Q5
J0¢22@ 020005
200220 2P00DS

2p062
Pp’*063
PR 064

QApplag 2PBOE5
200022 220805
0p2220 3028005

200205
27P02Q5
2KRAQ25
2P@2Q5
222005
290005

2022720 @70005
200220 Q702085

0290220 P20AQS

0’065
Pp’:066

Pp067

0000208 BPAE05
0Qe2ap 802095

207075
Bp*076

202008 200225

Pp:102

geggag

B2Q0Q5
Q00005
2920005
290005

0p:054
99055
2p.:056
9p ;057
Pp 06@
Po.06)1

0p1032
Pg2033

2p2037

Z@gggs

0P000P QACOC25
0paPog 292905
0QP208 P22225

Ppp4p

OQQ0220 200005

20042

0Q000Q 2ROOQ5

Ppi:P41

000002 292005

Pp2053

0QCQ02¢p
022000
200028
0OppR3p

Pp034
Ppc035
Pp1P36

0200220 239Q2@5
O@02000 200005

220205

Pp 025
PR~ 226
2p0.9027
00..039
ggzg31

200002 200285
202022 220025

290020 290005

Pp:079
Pp~”271
Pp*R72
Ae2073

0PP202Q
@P022g
AP2000
292222
20222Q
200220

028205

2200095
Q200025
2PQ295
200085
Q20ROE5
2900325

O2Pe220 220005
0QR0pP 208005

C0pR29 220205
CQ00mg
0Q2229
0Q2020
7200000

2908295
028005
0PB2O5
2299285

Bfld074

@flaflflfi

297077
0o 170
2prioy

0C@2000 278725
002000 29PAQS
7209028 208205

2p 183

Pou1%4

BeslpS

990305

002020 20B2R3
002008 0VQ0DS5

002220 278025

200030 290025

2p203p 20005

022200 220005

the

FOROTS

@pvl106
Rez2127
Ggri11g
Bgri111
Bp2112
227113

Pps114

Bp2iis

Bedile
@p2117
Bprl12p
Gp121

@p2122

Pp2123
BRi124

PR212%
2p"126
22127

Pp2i3p
220134
Pp2132

Pp2133

2pv134
Bgri3s
222136

207137

B0i:14@

@141

02142
293143
Bp2144

Rg”145

Peir146
22147

2159

Ppii151

@pir152

222153
Bpir154
Be.15%
PR2156
B@2157
/160

PR 2161

Pp1162
P21163

29,164
Bpl165

Bpz166

22167
Gpi:17@
Bp2171
P2@J172

2002292
200220
dpe0pe0

200225
300005
RARBRS
202000 R2Pa25
792000 pegaes5
200000 Q22095
2000200 e2@20e5
22200 PRE2R5
0ge0a0 e2gaes5
Pgoleo po@eas
290020 QPBeR5
200290 GeQOQs
Jgoceo peeees
2oeeo0 200005
2peoeae 220205
2gedng RPQ0Q5
2e0o00 200205
0gspae 209205
2pe299 gopoos
Peo0ae 222395
0ge000 e0Q22s
Po0020 R2Q2ps
202020 ePgops
023220 g2gaes
292000 200025
20002392 pogogs
Rpoeoo g2g0@5
200200 2200025
2poRe0 g2ga205
200000 0090¢5
200020 220005
203020

P2B146
201000 220032 -— Number of
words to
200020 ergoe?
next LSCW.
200000 P2B0p7
202900 2008@7

290200

opedeg
opedeg

202020
2oedop
700000

200P0o0

2o2200

280200
2p00ep
200000

200000
0209280

200200
Pee2ap

200020
2p0020

2280027
200207
2gng?
gegeg7
280027
220227
2¢Q02@7
200007
negag7

A0@2Q07
290007
Rogap7
p00ap7
200027
gogap?7

plgap7
2000207

27173

174

200000
0opRz0

Bp2176

202000

Pai’r17s

222177

@pv200
Beray

Ppc2n2
o203
o204
202205

Gp206
fl29207
Pp.21@

Rpr21}
@p2212

202213
Bp2214
2p2215

Ppr216

Pp2217
2220
Bp2221

Bpr222
Pp222y
Ppal24
Bp2225

Bpin226
22227

Pp223@

Pp2231
Pp2232

2p2233
Bp.2234
Pp2235
Bpz236
02237

Qo249
epr241
Bpr242
Ppr243

2244
Pp245
Bpl246

0pp229

203000

202200
0goooe

Ppedep
o0el00

020200

cogop0

200020

eo2000
Pgeeoo
202000

200020
2g0020

202000

2eeoee

2229002

0podae

Pp0020

228220
eeed20
2geoge
200000

0g2d00
2000202
egeR30
0go0c0

Pao02e

222020

2oedoe

2po220

2000092

2002020

2ogedoe

202200

2000292

Po2020

2peooo
igeeno
230220
Poodoe

@pir247

000000

Ppr2sy

203920

@250

gpo2s2
Pp3253

PB0000

200220
Pagoap

a0gag7
abpap7
pegoar
209007
gegea7

2281 14 -<—Continue LSCW.

200287
Q0oag?7
eRoeg?
2002087
220027
200027
g20a3p7
gogog7
gegog?
220087
ae00g7
Begog?7
2000207
popea?

g2gag?

220007
222227
p20827
eo@ea7
20007
009227
20gop?7
Q20037
g00a337
eReaQ7
2027
200007
200227
gegeg?
Q2pag?7
0202097
p2g2@7
groeg?
2200207
gopoe7
geceap7
gPeeg?
2o00e7
p2@oe?
200007
220907
222027
pAgRR7

2254
2255

7000292

Pp.1256

oooceo

22227

290000

eP@207
22ge0?

Bp1257

220000

a2@ae7

FOROTS

260
Ppr261
0p2262

0p2263

700020

200000
0gplo0

20020

Pp2264
2p265
BRc266
Pp 26867

22200
eo0220
2oo0oe

22279

2000080
20p2g0
2ge000

Bp2271

BB 272
0273

‘oe0a0

0geRoo

2dg274

2ge000

B8ecd?5

202220

Bpin276

Image

mode

C
C

2000020

pogap?
gegag?
e0p2R7
peeea’?
grRRaa?
20007
4 o
22207
pagag7
oepgea?
angea?
220007
geooe7
900327

Pe2303

0000020

Ppc300

Pp2301

092304

2000080

Pp2385

202000

22306

000000

002307

Gpc31p

Pps311
Bp23312
PR2313

Pp 314

peeaR?7

files contain no

Pp2302

0gP008
200000
200000
eopden

0pL277

LSCWs.

ggoRoo

20000
202000

202007
2900027
200007
gl00a7
200007
goeoa?
e2p0@7?
@20007
g0g2007
g20207

g0gog?
gogoe?7
20220 g2@ea?
6g3020 02147

ogolon

You cannot

backspace

this

LOOK AT AN IMAGE MODE FILE AND SEE NO LOGICAL SEGMENY
CONTROL WORDS.

OPEN(UNIT=1,MODE®’
[MAGE')
[25
WRITE(1)

(1,

Js7

WRITE(1)
END

22001

202220
280920

Pdp30@2

Cp2200

2p2003

2007080

p7004

2000020

Bpuoo5

o006

209000
200000
200000

2p7011

200000

Qg 000

e 20987
2pJ)01p

3012

file.

200000

227013

¢aedeo

292014

200200

222015

ogeoed

Pp7@B16

0pedap

202017

Go0000

Pp2020
Gp2021

200030

200000

Bpre22

200029

Bp2023

Pgo2eo

(JrK=1:.108)

220005
p2@205
p2geps
220005
0?0025
20005
270085
P0Q205
oRAgags5
202005
gog9ag5
200005
420005
200005
229805
a000e5
pogREs
220005
pPeoRs
229005

Apl024
2ero25

PpcR26
Pp3027
0p203P

Pe2034

002032

200000
200000

000000

2go0ap

2pe0o0
Q00020

200000

PeUR33

220008

GeR034
23035

200020

BplB36
Bp2837

PPA04Q

002044

PprB42
2a2043

2pJ044

2008200

2000080

200000
200020
0g2020
2peR20

0gedoo

2000020

0puR4s

egpegn

PgR046

202020

2pag4ay

200200

429025
J20005
20goQ5
3090025
gooo05
adgaps
220005
200005
200005
APRRB5
P22005
220005
a2pags
2oPaes
M20225
202005
3290025
022025
wepaas
negeps

FOROTS

204050

Bp205%Y
Q052
202053
22054

2972055

PgJ05%56

Bp2057
Pp206P
Pp2061

Pp’062
202063
PR

064

oceees
aPeoas
pe@eRs
p2gB25
2@o0em J0P025
200000 2000225
200000 2RP0Qgs
2800200 200205
200920 229205
202000 aeeaogs
290002 pepags
202029 20000295
7o00nQ 280005
200000 220205
coedap 222005

BpR135
Pp2136

2p2155

200020

gondep
220200
2ooRag

pr137
2o214¢9
Ppaidy

Bp72142

282230

282090
200030

320200

200000

202143

000000
2000020

Bg2145

200000

Ppcidqs

@p.2146

200020

700200

@pl2147

202020

Pplis5g@
07151

TIILT.

202030

Pg¢R67

200020

2’Pegs

Pe2152
PR %2153
Poci54

2p2071

A00220
200200
00220

2090@5
220095

Bpcis56

200200

2000025
peeres

Gpr157

200000

Gpll6p

200220

Ppr161

200000

2162

208200

2272163

000020

22065

Zel066
0p°0270
2

072
22073

200000

2@’074

200020

2 078
2pr076

292320
2ee002

22077
og 100

2002420

24101

200000

297102

200000

2103

00020

PR:104

702030
2020020

Qe 105

Rar106

Pp107

G211
Pp2111
2p2112
0p2113
222114

02115
Ppr116

22147

Gp2120

Pp212%

200020

2022020
02000
200220
2000020

022000

2pedeo

2gedo0

2000020

2pa0ee

222000
P0e000

22124

202020

2gedng

PpAi2s

ogenao

PpRi126
dgrizy
2pci3g
P13y

o00020

2pr133
0134

dooeeo
280020

2p000D

eg2020
200000
200220

222166
Pp2167

208020

200000

300039

223020

2p.*172
22173

2000790

o174

202200

2e2175%

202220

Be2176
222177
o200
2p:201%

202020
P330730

QR 2203
207204
Bpr2a5

A222@5
200005
oPReRS5
202205
gegaegs
220205
gegees
202005
e2e2e5
p22oe5
p2p2Q5
22002025

206

Qp2207

200200

000020

2e20200
2@e00p
002030

2000230
202020
LITLY.
200000

Bpr2ig
Ppr21iy

000220

2p0213
222214

200009
200000

2pi21s
@p221i6

000200
200000

@pa2i2

D-11

2002030

G317

229285

g2gepgs
2pecoo g2200s5

232000

2o0030

0012022

2000205

200000

0p7164
202165

222170

2oodeg

P@2122
Pui123

Ppr132

AePaps
a22a@5%
20p00ag5
2002Ps
22225
200005
200005
pP@oR5
a000205
p20205
28gRes
029025
2PQ0205
2008025
pogoes5
200005
220025

2p8020
300000

20802230

0pP000

Pe2217
Ppi222@

280000

2p2221%

TTTLY.

282200

229005
2Rneees
eogees
aep2es
pPeaRs
220205
2200025
320007
gReae7
020027
gRe2a7
geeea?
eZgen?
a20a@7
poegaa7
peoeg?
220007
202ep7
voQea7
200207
200007
020207
200007
eeena7
o2Qen7
229207
argen7
20geg7
gagne?
270007
290207
geege7
gepea7
32@0g7
220007
g20eg?
220027
270007
oPgag7
aog0Q7
Jegea?
200027
Aoag?
220227
222007
20297
greeg?
2Qeg7
22ge97
a002a7
Jegea7
220027
320207

FOROTS

Pp0222

QppRod 22@2R7
Q200009

2022Q7

Pp7256

000020

Ppo224
Pp2225
0pl226
Bp2227

0Opolag
0@ePg@
0200020
0@podee

00007
220007
2290027
292297

897257
0p26p
d@7261
2p2262

202070 290207
200700 @92227
Q00020 0220007
909300 00007

0p2234
002232
9p2233
Ppr234
200235

202000
@QQ0R200
0@000Q
0000020
0Qe0go

202027
290007
200027
0ARAEG7
090087

Q0264
0pi26%5
Pp.266
0p~ 267
004279

Ppr237
9pe24p

00a230 020707
0p22pp 2920097

Bp 1242

202020

0p2223

9pr23p

Ppve36
Baz24y

Pp2243
Bp- 244

2p7245

Pplr246
0p 2247
902590
097251
Pg/252
902253
027254

D.5.3

0200002 000207

2000np 200307

892255

Pp1263

Pp271

@pr272
@p2273

0Qad00 220787
200207

0QQ200 220007
0pC0Q3p 290200y

Ope023 200007
Opnopp 200327
200009 27077

000000 290Q027

0peoge 000087
000Q%p@ 290007

QJp00Qe alo2R7

PR1274

00000 2920007

2p0o03Q 290007

Pp2276¢

Qp00Pg 290007

Q000007

Apc275

2PQ000p

200007

Q2020 200207

@p2277

200007 290027

222070
Q0@Q2¢0
002020
202000
QQ0030
200000
202320

Pp230¢1
02302
P2.323
Pp/304
207305
007306
Ben3p7

Q00220
Q200000
202000
000007
002200
300000
02poPo0

200000 2280287

2370007
370027
2PQ@0Q7
220097
290007
220007
@202¢7

Mixed Mode Data

004309

000200 000007

220007
20Q02@7
Q2047827
220027
020087
000027
000007

Files

FOROTS permits files containing both ASCII and binary data records
to
be
read.
Mixed files may be accessed in either sequential or random
access mode.
Logical ASCII and binary records have the same format as
described
1in
the
©preceding
paragraphs.
1In random access mode, the
record size must be large enough to contain the largest record, either
ASCII

binary.

FOROTS

D.5.4

Image

Files

The image data transfer mode is a
buffered
mode
in
which
data
is
transferred
1in a blocked format consisting of a word count located in
the right half of the first data wurd of the buffer
followed
by
the
number
of
36-bit
data
words.
The
devices that permit image data
transfers and the form in which the data is read or written are:

Device

Card

Data

Punch

image

mode,

bytes.

Each

Since

there

27)

and

the

last

word

third

one

Reader

buffer

for

are

only

contains

only

thrown

card to
punches

EOF

three

12-bit

card

column.

to one
columns in

room

away.
punched

the

last

the

columns

bytes

Image
for

card,

data;

the
causes

mode

each

partial

buffer

card

output.

and

then

card.

All

12 punches in all 80 columns are
packed
into
the buffer as 12-bit bytes.
The first 12-bit byte
contains column 1.
The last word
of
the
buffer

contains

columns 79
respectively.

bytes,
two

Disk

Tape

and 80
Cards

buffers.

Data is written
in the buffer.

Magnetic

contains

corresponds

there

1is

punches

Card

byte

exactly

The

each
byte

Forms

Data

appears

the

Data

disk

as the left and middle
are not split
between

exactly

consists

magnetic

the

tape

buffer.

36-bit

appears

words.

exactly

processing

checksumming of
any
kind
1is
performed
by
the
service
routine.
The
parity
checking
of
the
magnetic tape system is sufficient assurance
that
the
data
1is
<correct.
All data, both binary and
ASCII, is written with odd parity and at 800
bits
per inch unless changed by the installation.
Paper

Tape

Punch

Binary

words

split
eighth

into
hole

control
routine.

by
Paper

Tape

Reader

the

taken

from

six
6-bit
punched
1in

the

bytes
each

or
checksumming
Data punched in

paper

Characters

tape

not

reader

having

buffer

is performed
this mode is

the

output

are

and punched with the
frame.
No
format

the

same

eighth

hole

by the I/O
read
back

mode.
punched

are

ignored.
Characters are truncated to six bits and
packed six to the word without further processing.
This
mode
1is
useful
for
reading
binary tapes
having arbitrary blocking format.
Plotter

D.6

USING

FOROTS

6-bit

the

plotter

characters
exactly

per

word

are

they

appear

itself

for

use

other

than

FORTRAN.

general

I/0

transmitted
in

the

buffer.

FOROTS

has

programs

Six

been

designed

written

programmers

may

employ

lend

languages
FOROTS

D-13

I/0

system

Currently,

system

for

MACRO

writing

FOROTS

simple MACRO calls that simulate the calls made to FOROTS by a FORTRAN
to FOROTS are to routines that implement
made
calls
The
compiler.
FORTRAN I/0 statements such as READ, WRITE, OPEN, CLOSE, RELEASE,

FOROTS will provide automatic memory allocation, data conversion,
buffering, and device interface operations to the MACRO user.

FOROTS

D.6.1

Entry

Points

FOROTS provides the following entry points for

calls

FORTRAN compiler or a non-FORTRAN program:
Entry

either

Function

Point

ALCHN.

Allocate software channels

CLOSE.
DBMS.
DEC.

Close a file
DBMS interface
DECODE routine

Allocate dynamic core blocks

ALCOR.

De-allocate software channels
De-allocate dynamic core blocks

DECHN.
DECOR.

ENCODE routine

ENC.

Terminate program exeuction
Input/Output list termination routine
Position to the next record (RANDOM ACCESS)

EXIT.
FIN.
FIND.

Error

FORER.

processor

Overlay interface

FUNCT.

Formatted input routine
Input/Output list routine

IN.
IOLST.

File utility processing routine

MTOP.
NLI.
NLO.

NAMELIST input routine
NAMELIST output routine

OuT.
RELEA.
RESET.
RTB.

Formatted output routine
Release a device (CLOSE implied)
Job initialization entry
Binary input routine

Open a file

OPEN.

Trace subroutine calls
Binary output routine

TRACE.
WTB.

Calling

D.6.2

from

Sequences

You must use the following general form for all calls made to FOROTS:
MOVEI

16,ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,Entry

(control

Point

is returned here)

where:

formatted
specifically
ARGBLK is the address of a
by
needed
information
contains
that
block
accomplish the desired operation.

Entry Point is an entry point identifier
Paragraph

desired

D.6.1)

FOROTS

that

routine.

specifies

the

(see list

FOROTS

With three exceptions, all returns from FOROTS will
be
made
to
the
program
1instruction
immediately
following the call (PUSHJ 17, entry
point instruction).
The exceptions are:

An error
or WRITE

An end-of-file return to a statement
WRITE statement END=option,

fatal

return to
statement

error

that

a specified
ERR=option,

returns

statement

the

number,

monitor

1i.e.,

READ

debug

package.

Paragraphs D.6.3.1 through D.6.3.11 give the MACRO calls and
required
argument
block
formats
needed
to
initialize FOROTS and FOROTS I/O
operations.
Argument blocks conform to the subprogram calling convention described
in
Appendix
C.
However, there is one exception in dealing with the
first word of an I/0 initialization
call,
i.e.,
WTB.,
ENC.,
RTW.,
etc.,
for
a
FORTRAN
1logical
wunit number.
In previous versions of
FOROTS and FORTRAN-10, if the indirect bit was not set,
the
argument
was immediate;
1if it was set to 1 (one), the argument was the address
of the variable.
The type field was always 0 (zero).
With Version 4 of FORTRAN-10 and Version 4 of FOROTS
this
convention
has
been
changed.
If
the
type
field of the first word of an 1I/0
initialization call for the FORTRAN logical unit number is
0
(zero),
the argument 1s an immediate mode (18 bit) constant wherever possible.
If the type field is integer, the argument is indirect
(see
Appendix
C,

Table

C-1,

Type

2).

This exception should not cause
any
upward
since
all
previously working programs will

compatibility
still function.
it
permits
the

feature
with
this
convention
1is
that
construct to be correctly implemented:
N=-4
READ

100

D.6.3

The

!SET
(N,100)

FOR

problems,
An added

following

TERMINALS

I,J

FORMAT(2I5)

MACRO Calls

following

for

FOROTS

paragraphs

Functions

describe

the

forms

the

MACRO

calls

FOROTS
that are made by the FORTRAN-10 compiler.
The calls described
are
1identified
according
to
the
1language
statement
that
they
implement.
The
following terms and abbreviations may be used in the
description of the argument block (ARGBLK) of each call:
—

pointer
is
the

calling
n

count

FORMAT

the

list

the

second

word
to

address pointed
sequence.)

ASCII

Input/Output

the
the

argument block.
argument ARGBLK

characters,

statement

name

in
by

address,

array
list,

containing

ASCII

characters,

(This
the

FOROTS

the
OF

statement
FILE"

the

to which control

statement

"ERROR"

to which

NAMELIST

name,

variable

specifying

access

1list

directed

type

specification of

"END

control

1is

transferred

the

1logical

record

number

for

I/0;

the

FORMAT

statement

variable

not

used,

constant,

1is

0-8

9-12

14-17

18-35

-6

—|

mode,

where ARGBLK

transferred

condition,

name

random

condition,

Reserved

Res;Lved

type

Format

D.6.3.1
I/O
Statements, Sequential
Access
READ
and
WRITE
statements
for
formatted
operations and their calling sequences are:
READ
(u, f,END=c,
MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

IN.

ERR=d)

list

and

WRITE (u,f,END=c,
MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

OUT.

ERR=d)

list

Size

(in

words)

v
Calling
Sequences - The
sequential data transfer

FOROTS

where

ARGBLK

1is

0-8

9-12

14-17

18-35

-5

—

Reserved

type

Format

Reserved

The READ and WRITE statements for unformatted
operations and their calling sequences are:
READ (u,END=c,

ERR=d)

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

RTB.

Size

(in

sequential

words)

data

transfer

list

and
WRITE (u,END=c,

where

ERR=d)

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

WTB.

ARGBLK

list

0-8

9-12

14-17

18-35

-3

—

Reserved

type

Reserved

D.6.3.2

and

NAMELIST

WRITE

operations

I/O,

statements

and

their

READ

(u,name)

READ

(u,

name,

Sequential

for

calling

END=c,

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

NLI.

sequences

ERR=d)

and
WRITE

(u,

name)

WRITE

(u,

name,

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

NLO.

END=c,

Access

Calling

NAMELIST-directed

ERR=d)

are:

Sequences

sequential

data

The

READ

transfer

FOROTS

1is

where ARGBLK

0-8

9-12

14-17

18-35

-4

—»!

Reserved

type

NAMELIST table

address

first
The
The NAMELIST table is generated from the FORTRAN NAMELIST.
following that are a number
the table is the NAMELIST name;
of
word
of 2-word entries for scalar variables, and
a
number
of
(N+3)-word
N is the dimensionality of the
where
variables,
array
for
entries
array.

The names you specify in the NAMELIST statement are stored,

Each

table.

the

1in

first

form,

arguments associated with the name;

1is

name

any

- Address
calculations used
1involve factors and offsets.

to
For

The name argument list may
(refer
to
the
following

.
diagrams)

Factoring
element

SIXBIT

this argument list may be of

length
and is terminated by a zero entry.
be in either a scalar
or
an
array
form

D.6.3.3
Array Offsets and
reference
a
gilven
array

by a list of

followed

example:
Array

DIMENSION A
The

size

each

Ul-L1+1

U2-L2+1

dimensioned

(Ll1/U1,L2/02,L3/0U3,...Ln/Un)
dimension

represented

etc.

order
A

the

calculate

the

address

element

referenced

(I1,12,1I3,...1In)

following

formula

used:

A+(I1-L1)+(I2-L2)*S1+(I3-L3)*S2*S1l+...+(In-Ln)*S[n-1]*...*%S52*51

The

terms

and

not on the element referenced

are

factored

out

depending

the

dimensions

to arrive at the

the

array

single

formula

A+ (-L-L2*S1-L3*S2*S1...)+I1+I2*S1+I3*S2*S]l...

The parenthesized part of
precision array and it is

this formula is
the
offset
for
referred to as the Array Offset.

FOROTS

For

each dimension of

a given array,

there

corresponding

factor

by
which
a
subscript in that position will be multiplied.
From the
last expression, one can determine the factor for dimension n to be
S[n-1]1*S[n-2]*...*S52*S1

For

double-precision and

complex

arrays,

the expression becomes

A+2* (I1-L1)+42* (I2-L2)*S1+2*(I3-L3)*S2+S1+...

Therefore,

the array offset for a double-precision array 1is

2% (=L1-L2*S1-L3*S2*S1...)

and the factor

the nth dimension 1is

for

2*S[n-1]1*S[n=-2]*...*S2*S1

The

factor

always
array

1is

for

the

always

The

SCALAR ENTRY

first dimension

factor

for

double-precision

NAMELIST Table

.11

12.

.14|15.

.17

18.

.35

SIXBIT/SCALAR NAME/

ARRAY ENTRY

0-8

Scalar

addr

NAMELIST Table

9-11

12-14

15-17

18-35

SIXBIT/ARRAY NAME/

#DIMS

ARRAY

type

array

1is

the first dimension of a single-precision

SIZE

OFFSET
I

Factor

FOROTS

READ
I/O Statements, Random Access Calling Sequences - The
D.6.3.4
and
operations
transfer
data
access
random
for
and WRITE statements
their

calling

sequences are:

(u#R,f,END=c, ERR=d) list
(u#R,END=c, ERR=d) list

READ
READ
MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

RTB.

WRITE
WRITE

(u#R,f,END=c, ERR=d) list
(u#R,END=c, ERR=d) list

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

WTB.

and

where ARGBLK 1is

9-12

0-8

18-35

14-17

-6

—»|

Reserved

type

format size

address of

Reserved

Record

(in words)

Number

f and the format size in words are 0 if the I/0 statement 1is

unformatted.

D.6.3.5

Calling

Sequences for Statements

That Use Default Devices a reserved system

The FORTRAN-10 statements that require the use of
default device and their calling sequences are:
Default

ACCEPT f, list
READ f, list
REREAD f, list
MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

IN.

UNIT=-4
UNIT=-5
UNIT=-6

Device

(TTY)
(CDR)
(REREAD)

FOROTS

where

ARGBLK

1is

0-8

9-12

14-17

18-35

-5

—»|

Reserved

Res;Lved

type

X
Default

f, list
PUNCH f, list
TYPE f, list
MOVEI

16,

PUSHJ

17,

where ARGBLK

0-8

Reserved

Res;Lved

(in

words)

Device

UNIT=-3

(LPT)
(PTP)
(TTY)

UNIT=-2
UNIT=-1

ARGBLK

9-12

14-17

-5
—»|

Format Size

18-35

0
2

type

format size (in words)

FOROTS

D.6.3.6

Statements to Position Magnetic Tape Units - The

formatted

unformatted FORTRAN-10 statements that may be used to control the
and
positioning of a magnetic tape device and their calling sequences are:
Function

FOROTS

Code

Statement)

SKIPFILE

(u)

BACKFILE

(u)

BACKSPACE
ENDFILE
REWIND

OO
& N W

(FORTRAN

(u)

(u)
(u)

SKIPRECORD
UNLOAD

(u)

CALL:
MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

MTOP.

where ARGBLK

1is

0-8

9-12

14-17

18-35

—-4

—

Reserved

type

Y
Reserved

type

FOROTS

D.6.3.7

List

Directed

Input/Output

Statements

code

- You

may

write

READ

and

any

form
of
a
sequential
Input/Output
statement
as
a
list-directed
statement by replacing the referenced FORMAT statement number with
an

asterisk
statements
READ

(*) .
The
1list-directed
forms
and their calling sequences are:

(u,

END=c,

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

IN.

WRITE

(u,

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

OUT.

ERR=d)

list

and

END=c,

ERR=4d)

list

the

WRITE

FOROTS

where ARGBLK 1is

0-8

9-12

14-17

18-35

-5

—

Reserved

D.6.3.8
Input/Output Data Lists - The compiler
generates
a
calling
to the runtime system if an I/O list is defined for the READ
sequence
the <calling
with
The argument block associated
or WRITE statement.
the variables and arrays to be
of
addresses
the
contains
sequence

The general form of an I/O list

transferred to or from an I/O buffer.

calling

sequence

1is:

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

IOLST.

Any number of elements may be included in the ARGBLK.
The end of
the
a zero entry or a call to the FIN.
by
specified
1is
block
argument
entry.

Mnemonic

Name

FOROTS

DATA
SLIST
ELIST
FIN

The elements of an
1.

Value

1
2
3
4

I/O list are:

DATA

The DATA element converts one single- or double-precision
or
for a READ
form
internal
to
external
from
item
complex
WRITE
a
for
form
external
statement and from internal to
statement.
Each DATA element has the following format.

0-8

DATA

9-12

14-17

18-35

type

SCALAR ADDR

FOROTS

SLIST

The

SLIST argument

the

following

converts

entire

array

from

internal

external
form
or
vice
versa,
depending
on
the
type of
statement, i.e., READ or WRITE, involved.
An SLIST table has
form:

0-8

9-12

SLIST

0
For

type |

example,

the

14-17

18-35

#ELEMENTS

INCREMENT

BASE

ADDRI.

sequence:

DIMENSION A(100),B(100)
READ
(-, -)A
or

READ(-,-) (A(I),I=1,100)
develops

!only when

SLIST argument

0-8

9-12

the

/OPT

switch

used

form:

14-17

0
0
0
0

18-35

2
0
0
4

More
the

than

0
0
2
0

one

increment
DIMENSION

WRITE

develops

base
is

same.

The

1
A
0

SLIST as

B(100)

the

only when

the

switch

used

/OPT

form:

9-12

14-17

18-35

0
0
2
2
0

0
0
0
0
0

144
1
A
B
0

2
0
0
0
4

1long

sequence

(A(I),B(I),I=100)

SLIST argument

0-8

144

address may appear

the

A(100),

(-,-)

0
0
0

FOROTS

ELIST

The

SLIST

format

permits

only

single

increment

for

of
arrays
increments

to be specified while the ELIST permits
to be specified for different arrays.

The

format

the

ELIST

0-8

number

different

1is

9-12

134

14-17

18-35

ELIST

No.

Elements

transfer

Base

1
N

increment
ADDR

increment
Base

For

example,

the

DIMENSION

FORTRAN

sequence

IC(6,100),

IB(100)

WRITE(-,-)

produces

the

Base

ADDR

(IB(I),IC(1,I),I=1,100)

ELIST

0-8

9-12

14-17

0
0
2
0
2
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0
4

The

ADDR

increment

increment may

zero.

This

18-35

144
1
1B
12
IC
0

could

produced

the

sequence

DIMENSION

A(100)

WRITE(-,-) (K,I=100)
The

zero may not

argument block.

0-8

appear

The

lonly when
as

ELIST for

9-12

the

/OPT switch

1immediate

constant

used

1in

the previous example would

14-17

the

18-35

144
Pointgr.to

word

contailning

zero

type

FOROTS

FIN

The

end of an

I/0 list

indicated

<call

the

FIN

routine
in
the
object time system.
This call must be made
a
with
after each I/0 initialization call, including
cal l1s

The FIN routine may be entered by an explicit

I/0 list.

null

block.
argument
call or by an argument in the I/O list
both
calls
are used, the explicit call has no meaning.

FIN element has

EXPLICIT

PUSHJ

the

following

format:

The

CALL:

17,

FIN.

form
and
D.6.3.9
OPEN and CLOSE Statements, Calling Sequences - The
calling sequences for the OPEN and CLOSE FORTRAN-10 statements are:

OPEN

STATEMENT

CALL

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

OPEN.

CLOSE STATEMENT CALL

where

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

CLOSE.

ARGBLK

1is

0-8

Negative
the

9-12

14-17

18-35

number

of words 1in
block not
including
this one.

type

The G field (bits 0 through
the
argument
name;
the
address which points to the

8) contains a 2-digit numeric that defines
H
field
(bits 18 through 35) contains an
value of the argument.

FOROTS

The numeric codes that may appear
each identifies are:

Field

Open

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10

DIALOG
ACCESS
DEVICE
BUFFER COUNT
BLOCK SIZE
FILENAME
PROTECTION
DIRECTORY

D.6.3.10

Argument

G field

G Field
12
13
14
15
16
22
23
24

Memory Allocation Routines

called
to
allocate
points,
ALCOR.
and
de-allocation.

the

or de-allocate
DECOR.,
that

Open

and

the

argument

that

Argument

MODE
FILE SIZE
RECORD SIZE
DISPOSE
VERSION
ASSOCIATE VARIABLE
PARITY
DENSITY

- The memory management module

1is

core blocks.
There are two entry
control
memory
allocation
and

Use the ALCOR.
entry to allocate the number of words specified in the
argument
block
wvariable.
Upon return, AC 0 will contain either the
address of the allocated core block or a
-1
wvalue,
which
1indicates
that core 1is not available.
The calling sequence for ALCOR.
call is:

where

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

ALCOR.

ARGBLK

0-8

9-12

14-17

18-35

-1

—»|

Reserved

type

Address of
Number

Words

Use the DECOR.
entry to de-allocate a previously alliocated
block
memory;
the argument variable must be loaded with the address of
core block to be returned.
Upon return AC 0 is set to 0.

of
the

If the number of desired words is
N,
ALCOR.
actually
removes
N+l
words
from
free
storage.
The pointer returned points to the second
word (word 1 as opposed to word 0) removed from free storage.
The
0
word
contains the negative value of N in its left half.
This word is
used by FOROTS to maintain linked lists of
allocated
(using
ALCOR.)
and free storage.

The

calling

segquence

MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

DECOR.

for

DECOR.

call

is:

FOROTS

where ARGBLK

1is

0-8

9-12

14-17

18-35

-1

Pointer

—»|

Reserved

type

word

containing

address of block
to be returned

Software Channel Allocation And De-allocation Routines - You

D.6.3.11

in MACRO programs via calls to the
may allocate software channels
routine.
routine and de-allocate them by calls to the DECHN.
ALCHN.
values are returned

in AC O.

next
the
or
channel
entry to allocate a particular
Use the ALCHN.
The channel to be allocated is passed to ALCHN.
available channel.
Zero is passed in the argument Dblock
in the argument block variable.
Allowed channels are
variable to allocate the next available channel.
or
available,
not
is
requested
channel
the
1If
1 through 17 (octal).

all channels are in use, ALCHN.

returns with a -1 in AC 0.

returns, AC 0 contains the assigned number.

The calling sequence of an ALCHN.
MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

ALCHN.

where ARGBLK

routine 1is:

1is

9-12

0-8

18-35

14-17

-1

Pointer

—»|

In normal

Reserved

type

containing
the

channel

word
#

zero

channel.
assigned
previously
entry to de-allocate a
Use the DECHN.
1in the argument block
channel to be released is passed to DECHN.
The
by
assigned
not
was
de-allocated
be
If the channel to
variable.
and thus cannot be de-assigned, AC 0 is set to -1 on return.
ALCHN.
The calling sequence
MOVEI

16,

ARGBLK

PUSHJ

17,

DECHN.

for

a DECHN.

routine

is:

FOROTS

where ARGBLK 1is

14-17

9-12

0-8
-1

18-35
0

type

—»|

Reserved

D.7

FUNCTIONS TO FACILITATE OVERLAYS

Pointer

containing

word

the channel #
to be released

FOROTS provides a subroutine (FUNCT.) to serve as an interface with
the LINK-10 overlay handler. This subroutine consists of a group of
functions that allow the overlay handler to perform 1I/0, core
management, and error message handling. These functions have only one
entry point, FUNCT., and they are called by the sequence
MOVEI
PUSHJ

16,
17,

ARGBLK
FUNCT.

The general form of the ARGBLK 1is
18-35

0-17

Negative of the

ARGBLK —»

number of words
in block

type

function number

error code

type

status

type

type
type
type

argument 1
argument 2
argument 3

type

argument n

where
type

function number
error code

the FORTRAN argument type (see Appendix C)
the number of one of the required functions
the 3-letter mnemonic output by the object
(See Table
or [.
%,
?,
time system after
D-1.)

status

undefined on the call and set

with one of the values below.

-1

0
l....n

the

Function not implemented

Successful return
Specific error message

return

FOROTS

Table

Function

Number

Mnemonic

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Numbers

Function

ILL
GAD
COR
RAD
GCH
RCH
GOT
ROT
RNT

D-1

and

Function

Codes

Description

Illegal function
Allocates core from a specific address
Allocates core from available core
De-allocates core
Gets or assigns an I/0 channel
Releases an I1/0 channel
Allocates core from FOROTS
De-allocates core from FOROTS
Returns the initial runtime from FOROTS

IFS

Returns

initial

runtime

file

spec.

from

FOROTS

CBC

FUNCTION 0 (ILL)
ignored, and the

FUNCTION 1
address.

The

- This function
function always

(GAD)

- This

arguments

The

arg

address

arg

number

return

0
1
2

Cuts back core

statuses

is illegal.
The
argument
returns a status of -1.

function

allocates

are:

at
of

which
words

if possible

to
of

begin
core

core

1is

specific

allocation

allocate

are:

core allocated (arg 1 and
not enough core available

cannot

from

block

allocate

core

2 unchanged)
in system (arg 1
specified address

and arg
(arg
1

unchanged)
and
arg
2

unchanged)

illegal
(arg

FUNCTION

arguments

The

arguments
and

(COR)

This

function

undefined

size

returned

core

statuses

are:

allocated

(arg

allocated

address

size

allocates

greater

than

256K)

core

from

any

address.

The

allocate

unchanged,

enough core available in
illegal argument (i.e., size

address.

(RAD)

The

This

function

arguments

arg

address

arg

number

returned

arg

beginning

address

the

core)

not

FUNCTION

are:

arg

(i.e.,

unchanged)

arg

The

arg

statuses

(arg 2 unchanged)
greater than 256K)

de-allocates

core

the

specified

and

the

size

are:
of

core

de-allocated

words

de-allocated

are:

core

de-allocated

core

cannot

illegal

argument

greater

than

system

de-allocated

(i.e.,

both

256K)
D-30

the

address

are

FOROTS

- This function assigns an I/O channel.

(GCH)

FUNCTION 4

The argument

is:

arg
The

undefined

statuses

returned

are:

0 I/0 channel assigned (arg 1 channel number)
1 no I/0 channels available

FUNCTION

argument

(RCH)

1is:

function

releases

I/0

channel.

The

I1/0 channel number to be released

arg 1
The

- This

statuses

returned

0 channel
1 invalid

are:

released
channel number

FUNCTION 6 (GOT) - This function gets core from the object time system
The

list.

arg
arg
The

arguments are:

address at which to allocate core
number of words of core to allocate

1
2

statuses

are:

0 core allocated

(arg

returned

1 and arg

2 unchanged)

1 not enough core available in system (arg 1 and arg 2 unchanged)
2
arg
and
1
(arg
2 cannot allocate core at specified address
unchanged)

illegal

t
(s)
argumen

if the object time
in that
This function differs from function 1
free core lists, then function 1 is used to allocate
two
system has

1I/O
space for links, and this function is used to allocate space for
Function 1 uses the free core list for LINK-10, and function
buffers.
6 uses the list for the object time system.

FUNCTION 7 (ROT) - This function
The

system.

returns

core

the

object

time

address of core to be de-allocated and returned
size of core to be de-allocated and returned

arg 1
arqg 2
The

are:

arguments

returned

statuses

are:

0 core de-allocated
1 core cannot be de-allocated
3

illegal

FUNCTION 8

argument

(RNT)

- This function returns the initial runtime from

object time system.
arg

The returned

0 always

The argument 1is:

undefined

status

1is:

(arg 1 - runtime from the object time system)

This function is used only if the user desires a log file.

the

FOROTS

FUNCTION 9(IFS) - This
function
returns
the
initial
runtime
file
specification
from
the
object
time
system.
The specification 1is
obtained from accumulators 0, 7, and 11 after the initial RUN command.
The

arguments

arg
arg
arg

The

1
2
3

are:

undefined
undefined
undefined

returned

status

is:

0 always (arg 1 - device from
from accumulator 0, and arg 3

This function tells the
initial RUN command.

accumulator
- directory

overlay handler

which

11,
arg
2 - filename
from accumulator 7)

file

read

after

FUNCTION 10 (CBC) - This function cuts back core if
possible
and
used to reduce the size of the user job.
There are no arguments.
The

returned
0

D.8

status

the

1is

1is:

always

LOGICAL/PHYSICAL

DEVICE

ASSIGNMENTS

You make FORTRAN logical and physical device assignments at run
time,
or
standard
system assignments are made according to a FOROTS Device
Table,
1.e.,
DEVTB.
Table
D-2
shows
the
standard
assignments
contained

the

Device

Table.

FOROTS

Table

Device/Function

D-2

FORTRAN

Device

FORTRAN

Logical

Table

Use

Unit Number

REREAD
CDR
TTY
LPT
PTP
TTY
0
DSK
CDR

-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
00
01

REREAD statement
READ statement
ACCEPT statement
PRINT statement
PUNCH statement
TYPE statement
ILLEGAL
DISK

Card

CTY
TTY
PTR
PTP
DIS
DTA1

04
05
06
07
08
09

Console Teletype
User's Teletype
Paper Tape Reader
Paper Tape Punch
Display
DECtape

DTA2
DTA3
DTA4
DTAS
DTA6
DTA7

10
11
12
13
14
15

DECtape
DECtape
DECtape
DECtape
DECtape
DECtape

DSK
DSK

23
24

DISK
DISK

DEV2
DEV3
DEV4
DEVS5

26
27
28
29

DEV39

LPT

MTAOQ
MTA]
MTA2
FORTR
DSK
DSK
DSK

DEV1

16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Line

Reader

Printer

Magnetic Tape
Magnetic Tape
Magnetic Tape
Assignable Device
DISK
DISK
DISK

Assignable Devices

APPENDIX

FORDDT

interactive

program

used

debug

FORTRAN

programs

and

control
their execution.
By using the symbols created by the FORTRAN
compiler, FORDDT allows you to examine and modify the data and
FORMAT
statements
in
your
program,
set
breakpoints
at
any
executable
statement or routine, trace your program
statement-by-statement,
and
make
use
of
many
other
debugging
techniques
described
in
this
appendix.
Table

E-1

lists

all

the

commands

available

Table

Access

the

FORDDT.

Purpose

Commands

Modifies

data

locations.

TYPE

Displays

data

locations.

Commands

GROUP

Defines

MODE

Specifies

format

OPEN

Accesses

program

PAUSE

Places

REMOVE

Removes

pause

DIMENSION

Defines

indirect

dimensions

pause

lists
of

arrays

/DEBUG:

B-2.)

symbol

statements.

table.

requests.

arrays

for

(Unnecessary
was

dimensions

for

TYPE

requests.

/DEBUG:DIMENSIONS

Defines

for

typeout.

unit

references.

DOUBLE

E-1

Declarative

user

Commands

Command

Data

FORDDT

used.

was

See

Table

double-precision

references.

DIMENSIONS

FORDDT

(Unnecessary

used.

See

Table

FORDDT

Table

E-1

(Cont.)

Table

Commands

Command

Control

Purpose

Commands

START

Begins execution of FORTRAN program.

CONTINUE

Continues execution after a pause.

GOTO

Transfers control

within

the

Traces execution of the program.

Terminates program and returns

STOP

monitor

mode.

DDT

Enters DDT

(if DDT 1is loaded).

Commands

Other

LOCATE

Lists program unit names in which
symbol

STRACE

Displays
program

WHAT

E.1

to some program statement

open program unit.

routine

INPUT

given

Dbacktrace

current

DIMENSION,

GROUP,

status.

Displays
PAUSE

defined.

current

information.

and

FORMAT

FORDDT commands are made up of alphabetic FORTRAN-like identifiers and
need
consist
of
only
those characters required to make the command
unique.
If you wish to specify parameters, a space or tab is required
following the command name.
FORDDT expects a parameter if a delimiter
(i.e., space or tab) is found.
Comments may be
appended
to
command
lines by preceding

E.1l.1

Variables

the comment with

and

Arrays

FORDDT allows you to access and modify
the
data
1locations
in
your
program
by
using
standard FORTRAN-10 symbolic names.
Variables are
specified simply
by
name.
Array
elements
are
specified
1in
the
following
name

format:
(Sl1,...,5Sn)

where
name

(Sl,...,5n)

a FORTRAN variable or array name
the subscripts of the particular

array.

You may reference an entire array simply by
1its
unsubscripted
name;
you
may
specify a range of array elements by inputting the first and
last array elements of the desired range, separated by a dash(-).

E-2

FORDDT

Examples
ALPHA

ALPHA (7)
ALPHA (PI)

ALPHA
(2) -ALPHA (5)

E.1.2

Numeric

FORDDT

Conventions

accepts

FORTRAN-10

optionally

input

signed

numeric

INTEGER - A string of decimal

digits.

FLOATING-POINT

the

standard

string

decimal

digits

optionally

including
a
decimal
point.
Standard
engineering
double-precision exponent formats are also accepted.

OCTAL - A string of octal digits
double

E.1.3

data

formats:

quote

optionally

preceded

(").

COMPLEX - An
ordered
pair
of
1integer
or
real
separated by a comma and enclosed in parentheses.

Statement

and

Labels

and

Source

constants

Line Numbers

FORTRAN statement labels
are
input
and
output
by
straightforward
However, source line numbers must be
1i.e., 1234.
reference,
numeric
This mandatory
input to FORDDT with a number sign (#) preceding them.
sign distinguishes statement labels from source line numbers.

E.2

NEW

USER

TUTORIAL

a
as
below
described
commands
The new FORDDT user can rely on the
These commands are easy to
programs.
FORTRAN
debugging
for
basis
understand

E.2.1

and

Basic

apply.

Commands

The easiest method of loading and starting FORDDT is:
.DEBUG filename.ext
FORDDT will

respond

ENTERING

(DEBUG)/F10

with

FORDDT

Just as an asterisk

angle

brackets

(*)

signify

signifies

FORTRAN-10's

readiness,

the

two

that FORDDT is awaiting one of the following

commands:

OPEN

Makes
available
to
FORDDT
the
symbol
names
1in
a
When a
particular program unit of the FORTRAN program.

program unit symbol table
E-3

1is

opened,

the

previously

FORDDT

open program unit is automatically closed.
When FORDDT
is entered, the MAIN program is
automatically
opened.
The command format is:
OPEN

name

This will open the particular program
unit
named
allow
all
wvariables
within
that
subprogram
to
accessible to FORDDT.

and
be

OPEN

START

with no arguments will
main program unit.

reopen

Starts your
The command

the main

program at
format is:

the

symbol

program

table

the

entry

point.

files
command

to
be
format

START

STOP

Terminates program execution, causes
closed,
and
exits to the monitor.

all
The

is:
STOP
MODE

Defines the display format for succeeding
FORDDT
TYPE
commands.
You
need
type only the first character of
the mode to identify it to FORDDT.
The modes are:
Mode

Meaning

o OH+HMT
OO Y

ASCII

(left-justified)

COMPLEX

DOUBLE-PRECISION
FLOATING-POINT
INTEGER

OCTAL

RASCII

(right-justified)

Unless the MODE command is
mode is the floating-point
The

command
MODE

format

given, the
format.

default

typeout

is:

1list

where list contains one or more of the mode identifiers
separated
by
commas.
The
current
setting
can
be
changed by issuing another MODE command.
If more
than
one
mode
1s
given,
the
wvalues are typed out in the
order:

F,D,C,I1,0,A,R

MODE

with

no
setting

TYPE

Allows

arguments will reset
FORDDT
of floating-point format.
you

display

locations.
They
formatted according
The

command
TYPE

format

list

the

contents

one

are
displayed
on
to
the
last
MODE
is:

the

original

data

your
terminal
specification.

F'ORDDT

where list may contain one or more
array
elements,
or
array element
For example:
commas.
TYPE

ALPHA,

BETA(2),J(3)-J(5)

Each item will be displayed
active typeout modes as set
ACCEPT

arrays,
variables,
ranges separated by

in
by

each
o0of
the last

the
MODE

currently
command.

Allows

vyou
to
change
the
contents
of
a
FORTRAN
variable, array, array element, or array element range.
The command format is:
ACCEPT

name/mode

value

where

name

the

name

element,

modified.

the

unsubscripted

wvariable,

array

array,

element

the

field

array

name

array

range

element

contailns
or

range, 1t causes all the
elements
to
be
set
to
the given value (see special case
for ASCII in Section F.6).
mode

the
format
of
the
data
wvalue
to
be
entered.
If given, it must be preceded by
a slash (/)
and
1immediately
follow
the
name.
(Note that /mode does not apply to
FORMAT modification.)

value

the new value
correspond in
Data

to
be
format

assigned.
It
must
to the given mode.

Modes

You need type only the first character of a
data
mode
to
1identify
1t
to
FORDDT.
If
not
specified, the
default mode is REAL.
The following
1input
modes
are
available:
Mode

Meaning

A
C
D

ASCII(left-justified)
COMPLEX
DOUBLE-PRECISION

/F0O0O/
(l.25,-78.E+9)
123.4567890

REAL

123.45678

I
O
R
S

INTEGER
OCTAL
RASCII(right-justified)
SYMBOLIC

1234567890
76543210
\BAR\
PSI(2,4)

example
ACCEPT

This
with

the

ALPHA

changes the
the default

Example

command

format

is:

100.6

value
input

of the variable ALPHA
to
100.6
mode of REAL, since mode was not

specified.
PAUSE

Allows you to set
a
breakpoint
at
any
1label,
1line
number,
or
subroutine entry in your program.
You may
set up to ten pauses at one time.
When
one
of
these
pauses is encountered, execution of the FORTRAN program

E-5

FORDDT

is suspended and
control
is
transferred
to
Also,
when a pause 1is encountered, the symbol
that subprogram is automatically opened.
The
format

FORDDT.
table of
command

is:

PAUSE

where P is a statement label number,
1line
for example,
routine entry voint name;
PAUSE

number,

100

will cause a breakpoint at statement label
currently open program unit.

100

Note that subprogram parameter

be displayed

when

pause

1is

values will

encountered

the

subprogram entry

point.
CONTINUE

Allows the program to resume execution after
a
FORDDT
pause.
After
a
CONTINUE
1is
executed,
the program
either runs to completion, or
it
runs
until
another

pause is encountered.
If you include a value with this
occurrence
command, the program will run until the nth
different pause is
a
until
or
pause
given
the
of
The command

encountered.

formats are:

CONTINUE
or

CONTINUE

Example

will
of
REMOVE

CONTINUE

continue

execution

the

until

the

fifteenth

occurrence

pause.

Used to remove those pauses from the program previously
set up by the PAUSE command.
The command format is
REMOVE

where

pause

was

the

number

set,

1.e.,

REMOVE

100

will

remove

the pause

Note

that

pauses;

REMOVE with

therefore,

the

statement

statement label

label

arguments

where

the

remove

all

100.

will

no abbreviation of the command

allowed in this instance.
This precaution prevents
accidental removal of all pauses.

WHAT

Displays

your

terminal

the

open
program
unit
and
any
settings.
The command format
WHAT

name

currently
1is:

the

currently

active

pause

FORDDT

E.3

FORDDT AND THE

Most

facilities

FORDDT

however, 1if
program, the

features;

FORTRAN-10/DEBUG

FORTRAN

available,

and

several

are

available

without

other

the

commands

1if

you

which

wish

will

/DEBUG

when compiling
will
not
be

restricted.

FORTRAN-10 to compile extra
information
B,
Using
the Comoiler, for a complete
The additional features include:
will

generate

to the REL file for all arrays
The dimension information will

FORDDT

FORTRAN-10

not use the /DEBUG switch
features
(NEXT
command)

/DEBUG:DIMENSIONS,

command.
dimension

the

you do
trace

Using the /DEBUG switch tells
for
FORDDT.
(See
Appendix
description of each feature.)
1.

SWITCH

dimension

information

dimensioned in the subprogram.
automatically be available
to

reference

array

This
feature
eliminates
1information
for
FORDDT

TYPE

the
need
by
using

to
the

specify
DIMENSION

command.

/DEBUG:LABELS,
which
executable source line
labels

are

FORDDT

commands

This

generated,

switch

allocated
the

end

will
for

and

also
a

generate
labels
form "line-number

they

may

and

GOTO.

generate

FORMAT

the

"format-label

display

PAUSE

will
in the

modify

used

labels

statement

statement.

F".

they

FORMAT

arguments

These

are

the

that

via

you

the

TYPE

the

1location
can

have

will

every
these

with

last

FORDDT

1labels

generated,

statements

for
L".
If

detect

the

form
able to

and

commands.

Note
the

that the :LABELS switch i1s automatically activated
with
:TRACE switch, since labels are needed to accomplish the

trace

features.

/DEBUG:TRACE,

which

before
for the

executable
statement.
This
command NEXT to function.

Note

that

single

FORDDT

This

each
trace

also

than

input

reference

applies

will

one

line,

and

generate

FORTRAN

only

the

label

the

switch.

/DEBUG:INDEX, which will force
respective
data
location
as

switch

statement

first

line-number

:LABELS

reference

has

1is

FOKDDT

required

been

statement

placed

will

associated

have

with

1it.

the compiler to store
1in
1its
well
as a register the index

variable of all DO
loops
at
the
beginning
of
each
1loop
iteration.
You
will
then
be
able to examine DO loops by
using FORDDT.
If you modify a DO loop index using FORDDT, it
will
not
affect
the
number
of
1loop iterations because a
separate loop count is used.
(See Section D.1l.5.)
Note

that

commands

E.4

The
the

AND

this

switch

has

direct

STARTING

any

the

FORDDT

simplest method of loading
following command string:

.DEBUG

affect

FORDDT.

and

filename.ext (DEBUG) /F10

E-7

starting

FORDDT

1is

with

FORDDT

responds

ENTERING

with

FORDDT

> >

The angle
command,

readiness.

brackets
Jjust
as

indicate that
an
asterisk

FORDDT is ready
(*)
signifies
~

to receive a
FORTRAN-10's

The

DEBUG command to the monitor will also load DDT (standard
system
debugging
program).
DDT can be used or ignored, but
it does require an extra 2K (octal) of core.

You may
wish
to
1load
vyour
compiled
program
and
FORDDT
directly
with the LINK-10 loader.
(Loading with LINK-10 was
accomplished implicitly in the previous command string.)
The
command sequence 1s as follows:
.R

LINK

*filename.ext
*filename.ext

/DEB/G
/DEB:

FORDDT

(loads
(loads

DDT)
FORDDT)

FORTRA

*filename.ext

/DEB: (DDT,

FORDDT

)/G

loads

both

and

FORDDT

FORTRA

DDT

If the total FORTRAN program consists of many subroutines and
insufficient
core
1is
available
to
complete
1loading with
symbols, it is possible
to
1load
with
symbols
just
those
sections
expected
to
give trouble.
The remaining routines
need

E.5

SCOPE

Each program
FORDDT,
vyou

not

NAME

loaded.

AND

LABEL

REFERENCES

unit has its own symbol
automatically open the

table.
symbol

When
table

you initially
enter
of the main program.

All

references to names or labels via FORDDT must be made with respect
to
the
currently
open
symbol
table.
If
vyou have given the main
program a name other than MAIN by using
the
PROGRAM
statement
(see
Chapter 5, Section 5.2), FORDDT will ask for the defined program name.
After you enter the program name, FORDDT
will
open
the
appropriate
symbol table.
At this point, symbol tables in programs other than the
main program can be opened by using the OPEN
command.
(See
Section
F.5.)

References to
statement
labels,
1line
numbers,
FORMAT
statements,
variables,
and
arrays
must
have
1labels
that
are
defined in the
currently open symbol table.
However, FORDDT will accept variable and
array
references
outside
the currently open symool table, providing
the name 1is unique with respect to all program units in the given load
module.

E.6

FORDDT

COMMANDS

This

section

gives

The

commands

are

detailed

given

description

alphabetical

order.

all

commands

1in

FORDDT.

FORDDT

Allows

yocu

array,

change

array

statement.

contents
array

command

format

The

the

element,

name/mode

FORTRAN

element

variable,

range,

FORMAT

is:

value

where

name

the

wvariable

element

array,

range,

array
FORMAT

element,

array

statement

modified.
mode

The

the

format
mode

(/)

and

of the data value
to
be
entered.
keyword must be preceded by a slash

immediately

Intervening
that

blanks

are

does

not

/mode

not

the

name.

allowed.

apply

(Note

FORMAT

modification.)
value

the

new

value

assigned.

the
input
value
specified mode.
DATA

LOCATION
Data

The

following

data

Mode

must

The

format

correspond

Modes

modes

are

accepted:

Meaning

Example

ASCII

COMPLEX

(1.25,-78.E+9)

DOUBLE-PRECISION

123.4567890

REAL

123.45678

INTEGER

1234567890

OCTAL

RASCII

SYMBOLIC

not

(left-justified)

the

76543210
\BAR\
PSI(2,4)

specified,

data

/FO0/

(right-justified)

the

Two-Word
For

default

mode

REAL.

Values

modes

ASCII,

RASCII,

OCTAL,

FORDDT
will accept a "/LONG" modifier on
This modifier indicates that the variable

are

of
the

MODIFICATION

interpreted

two

words

and

SYMBOLIC,

the mode switch.
and
the
value

long.

Example

VAR/RASCII/LONG

will

assume that VAR
l0-character literal

1s two words
into it.

Initialization
If

the

array

the

name

field

name

array

value.

the

'1234567890"

range

long

and

store

the

given

Arrays

contains

array

elements,

specified

range

will

unsubscripted
all

set

elements

the

of
given

FORDDT

Example

ARRAY/F

1.0

ACCEPT ARRAY (5)-ARRAY(10)/F

Note

that

this

applies

only

Long

Literals

1.0

to modes

other

than

ASCII

and

RASCITI.

When
the
wvalue
field
of
an
ACCEPT
contains
an
unsubscripted
array
name or range of array elements, and
the specified data mode is
ASCII
or
RASCII,
the
wvalue
field
1s
expvpected
to
<contain
a
long
1literal string.
ACCEPT will store the string linearly into
the
array
or
array range.
If the array is not filled, the remainder of
the array or range will be set to zero.
If the literal is
too long the remaining characters will be ignored.
Example

ACCEPT ARRAY/RASCII
FORMAT

'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'

STATEMENT MODIFICATION

When the name field of an ACCEPT contains a label,
FORDDT
expects this label to be a FORMAT statement label and that
the value field contains a new FORMAT specification.
Example

The

new

(1HO,F10.2,3(I2))

specification

originally
allocated
remainder of the area
is

cannot

longer

than

the

space

to the FORMAT by the compiler.
The
is cleared if the new
specification

shorter.

Note
that
FOROTS
performs
some
encoding
of
FORMAT
statements
when it processes them for the first time.
If
any 1/0 statement referencing the given
FORMAT
has
been
executed,
the
FORTRAN
program
has
to
be
restarted
(re-initializing FOROTS).
CONTINUE

Allows the program to
resume
execution
after
a
FORDDT
pause.
After
a CONTINUE
is executed, the program either
runs to completion or until another pause 1is
encountered.
The command format is:
CONTINUE

where

the n is optional and, if omitted, will
be
assumed
to
be
one.
If a value is provided, it may be a numeric
constant or program variable, but it will be treated as an
integer.
When the value n is specified, the program will
continue execution until the nth occurrence of this pause.
For

will

example,

CONTINUE

continue

execution

pause.

after

the

20th occurrence

the

FORDDT

DDT

Transfers

control

system

debugging

opened

possible
.F10

FOROTS

The

the

are

that

the

FORCDT.

program

©program
(if

unaffected

program

and

execution

global

symbol

command

format

DDT,

loaded).

wused

Any

the

standard

files

currently

return

may

return

T[FORDDT

resumed.
control

is:

.F10$G

where
be

§$

1in

represents

altmode

the

condition

image

DDT.

modified
DIMENSION

Sets

your

the

access

same

core

user-defined
purposes.

those

declared

will

allow

scope

than

warning

you
that

where
For

the

dimensions

compiler

redimension

Your

before

dimensions

the

given.

DIMENSION

escape.

with

These

array
need

the

program

unless

source

array

the

source

program.

The

command

format

have

this

have

FORDDT

agree

code.

for

not

will

you

with

FORDDT

larger
done,

is:

name

the

array

specified.

example:

DIMENSION

FORDDT

will

redefined

The

command

ALPHA(7,5/6,10)

remember

the

dimensions

the

array

until

removed.

DIMENSION

will give a full
for all arrays.
DIMENSION

will

display

list

all

the

user-defined

ALPHA

the

current

information

for

only.
DIMENSION

will

remove

array

the

array

any

user

defined

array

information

ALPHA.

elements

name

ALPHA

ALPHA/REMOVE

Arrays,

Array

dimensions

Array

are

Elements,

specified

and

the

for

the

Ranges

following

format:

([dl1/d2,...](S1l,...)

where
name

the

[eeo]

optional,
This

name

form

DIMENSION

the

and
1is

array

contains

dimension

equivalent

statement.

1in

information.
effect

the

FORDDT

(«..)

the

subscripts

the

specific

element

desired.

The entire array 1is referenced simply by its unsubscripted
name.
A range of array elements is specified by inputting
the first and last array elements
of
the
desired
range
separated by a dash (-)
(A(5)-A(10)).
DOUBLE

Defines the dimensions of a double-precision
array.
The
result
of
this
command 1is the same as for the DIMENSION
command except that the array so dimensioned 1is understood
by FORDDT to be an array with word entries and, therefore,
reserves twice the space.
The command format is:
DOUBLE

GOTO

arrayname

Allows you to continue your program
from
a
point
other
than the one at which it last paused.
The GOTO allows you
to continue at a statement label or code-generating source
line
number
provided
that
the /DEBUG:LABELS switch has
been used or the contents of a symbol previously
ASSIGNed
during the program execution.

Note that the program must be STARTed before this
command
can
be
used,
and
also
note that a GOTO is not allowed
after the "C"C REENTER sequence.
(See F.6.)
The

command
GOTO

GROUP

format

is:

Sets up a string of text for input to a TYPE command.
You
can
store
TYPE
statements
as
a
1list
of
wvariables
identified by the
numbers
1
through
8.
This
feature
eliminates
the
need to retype the same list of variables
each time you wish to examine the same
group.
Refer
to
the TYPE command for the proper format of the 1list.
The

command
GROUP

format
n

is:

list

where
n

the

group

number

list

a string of TYPE
future accessing

1-8

statements to
of the current

be
<called
1in
group number.

GROUP

with

current

arguments
contents

GROUP

will

type

will
of

all

cause
the

FORDDT

that

type

out

the

out

the

contents

the

requested.

Note

groups

one

group

may

call

another.

particular

group

FORDDT

LOCATE

Lists the program unit names in which a
given
symbol
1is
defined.
This
1s
useful
when the variable you wish to
locate is not in the currently open program
unit
and
1is
defined in more than one program unit.
The command format
is:

LOCATE

where

MODE

may

number,

Defines

the

any

FORMAT

FORTRAN

variable,

statement

number.

default

formats

array,

typeout

from

initial
default
mode,
variables
floating-point format.
1If you wish to
modes, the command format is:
MODE

1label,

FORDDT.

1list

Mode

the
mode

Meaning

P> OHMOO TM

FLOATING-POINT
DOUBLE-PRECISION
COMPLEX
INTEGER
OCTAL

ASCII (left-justified)
RASCII (right-justified)

typical

command

MODE
NEXT

will
be
typed
1in
change the
typeout

where list contains one
or
more
of
the
modes
1in
following
table.
(Only the first character of each
need be typed to identifyv it to FORDDT.)

1line

string

might

be:

A,I,OCTAL

Allows
you
to
cause
FORDDT
¢to
trace
source
lines,
statement
1labels,
and entry point names during execution
of your program.
This command
will
only
provide
trace

facilities if the program was compiled with the
/DEBUG switch.
If this switch
was
not
used,
command
format

will

act

CONTINUE

command.

FORTRAN-10
the
NEXT
The

command

is:

n/sw

where

a program variable

integer

numeric

value

and

SwW

one

the

/S=

/L=
/E=
The default
trace.
The
The

20/L

switches

statement

label
source line
entry point

starting value
default switch

command

following

of
is

n is
/L.

single

statement

FORDDT

will trace
numbers or

the
execution
of
until another pause

Note that if no argument
given will be used.
For
NEXT

the
next
20
source
is encountered.

1s specified,
example,

the

1last

1line

argument

will change the tracing
mode
to
trace
only
subprogram
entries using the numeric argument previously supplied.
OPEN

Allows you to open a particular program unit of the loaded
program
so
that
the
wvariables
will
be
accessible to
FORDDT.
Any previously
opened
program
unit
1s
closed
automatically
when
a
new
one
1s
opened.
Only global
symbols, symbols in the currently open
unit,
and
unique
locals
are available at any one time.
Note that starting
FORDDT automatically opens the MAIN program.
The
command
format

1is:

OPEN

name

where name is the subprogram name.
will reopen the MAIN program.

OPEN with

arguments

If the PROGRAM statement was used in the FORTRAN
program,
the
name
supplied by you will be requested upon entering
FORDDT.
PAUSE

Allows

you to place a pause request at a statement number,
source
line number, or subroutine entry point.
Up to ten
pauses may be set at
any
one
time.
When
a
pause
1is

encountered,
execution
1is
suspended
at
that point and
control is returned to FORDDT.
Also,
when
a
pause
1is
encountered,
the
symbol
table
of
that
subprogram
1is
automatically opened.
The

command

formats

include:

PAUSE

PAUSE
PAUSE
PAUSE
PAUSE

P IF condition
P TYPING /g
P AFTER n TYPING /g
P IF condition TYPING

AFTER

where

P
n

=
=

the
an

point where the pause
integer
constant
or

is requested,
wvariable
or

array

element

will
to

100

set

pause

after

group

PAUSE

reaching

will

number

statement

suspended,

100

PAUSE

#245

cause

and

the

cause
to

execution
entered

MAX(5)

occur

encountering

specified
by
abbreviated.

100,

FORDDT

program.

AFTER

pause

label

<cause

this

MAX(5).

E-14

Note

source

point

that

the

line

number

AFTER

may

number

not

245

times
be

FORDDT

PAUSE
If

the

variable

2.5E-3,

DELTA

the

LIMIT(3,1)

pause

request

abbreviated,

connectives
PAUSE

will
the

are
505

request
1label

LIMIT(3,1).GT.2.5E-3

but

all

the

PAUSE

than

granted.

usual

the

The

FORTRAN

pause to be
and
the

made at the
wvariables

When

The

TYPING

LINE#24

AFTER

displayed

the

TYPING

control

can

typing

Note

that

sequence,

specification

TYPING

may

not

REMOVE

Removes

format

the
is:

used

requests

with

the

FORDDT

after
16
of group 3

PAUSE
the

command,

typeout

terminal.

remain

command,

previously

REMOVE

For

transferred

START

of
be

time.

character

pause
a

every

option

any

not

logical

first occurrence
in
group 5 will

will place a request at source line
number
24
(octal)
times
through;
however, the contents

will

value

may

505,

displayed.
abbreviated.

greater

allowed.
TYPING

will

after

control

requested

control

seguence.

START

©pauses.

REENTER

The

command

example,

will

REMOVE

L#123

remove

REMOVE

ALPHA

remove

REMOVE

with

requests,
allowed.

pause

pause
no

program

the

arguments

and,
This

source

subroutine
will

line

number

entry

remove

ALPHA.

all

in this case, no abbreviation
prevents
the
unintentional

123.

vyour

pause

of REMOVE
removal

is
of

pauses.

START

Starts

your

program

entry

point.

The

the

command

normal

format

FORTRAN

main

program

is:

START

STOP

Terminates

the

files,

and

command

format

program,

causes

requests

exit

FOROTS

the

monitor.

all

open

The

usual

is:

STOP

STOP/RETURN

will allow a return
to
devices or closing files

monitor
so that

mode
without
CONTINUE can

releasing
be issued.

FORDDT

STRACE

Displays a subprogram level backtrace of
of the program.
The command format is:

the

current

state

STRACE
TYPE

Causes one or more FORTRAN defined
array
elements
to
be
displayed
command format is:
TYPE

be one or
numbers.

commas,

more variable or array references
These
specifications
must
bDe

and

group

numbers

must

a
slash
(/).
The command with no arguments
last argument list submitted to FORDDT.
An

or
The

list

where list may
and/or
group
separated

variables,
arrays,
on your terminal.

array

element

range

<can

also

preceded

will

use

specified.

the

For

example:
TYPE

PI(5)-PI(13)

will display the values from
If
an
unsubscripted
array
array will be typed.

PI(5)
to
PI(13)
name is specified,

There

choosing

MODE

command.

are

several

conjunction

methods

with

you

the

not

floating-point

specify
form.

You can specify a
described in this
You
by
in

the

form

format,

format
wvia
appendix.

the

1inclusive.
the entire

the

typeout

defaultis

MODE

command

can change the format
previously
designated
the MODE command by including print modifiers
the TYPE or GROUP string.
The print modifiers

are:

/BA./C,/D,/F,/1,/0,/R
The first print modifier specified in a string of
variables
determines
the
mode
for
the entire
string unless another mode is placed directly
to
the right of a particular variable.
For example,
in

TYPE
the

/IK,L/O,M,N/A,/2

typeout

specified.

mode

integer

until

another

mode

1is

Therefore,

'M,and/2

Integer

OCTAL
=
WHAT

Displays the
format 1is:
WHAT

ASCII

information

saved

FORDDT.

The

command

FORDDT

E.7

ENVIRONMENT

program

CONTROL

enters

"C"C

REENTER

pause

the

indefinite

sequence.
point

This

reentry

loop,

and

will

allow

program.
Most

commands

can

GOTO,

routines
any
of
state

you

can

recover

cause
to

control

used

STRACE,

once

TYPE,

and

the

program

cause

has

been

typing

simulate

run-away

reentered;

control

external to FORDDT.
No guarantee can be made to ensure
that
these
commands
following
a
“C"C REENTER sequence will not
the

user

before

profile.

any

The

these

program

four

must

commands

returned

can

restore

command

can

issued
to

FORTRAN-10/0PTIMIZE

should

compiled

never

with

the
was

a
1In

stable
order

next
used,

1label
a NEXT

integrity.

SWITCH

attempt

the

program

issued.

you should set a pause at
If the /DEBUG:TRACE switch

You

your

transfer

restore program integrity,
and
then CONTINUE to it.

E.8

FORDDT to

however,

destroy

you

action

use

FORDDT

/OPTIMIZE

with

switch.

program

The

global

that

has

optimizer

been

causes

variables to be kept in ACs.
For this reason, attempts to examine
or
modify variables in optimized programs will not work.
Also, since the
optimizer moves statements around in your program, attempts
to
trace
program

flow

FORDDT

will

FORDDT

responds
error

been

The

format

great

confusion.

MESSAGES

Fatal

has

lead

with

two

messages

terminated.
of

?FDTXXX

these

levels

indicate

Warning
messages

messages

that

the

messages

fatal

processing

provide

error
of

helpful

and

warning.

given

command

information.

is:

text

3FDTXXX

text

where

warning

fatal

FDT

FORDDT

XXX

3-letter

text

mnemonic for
explanation of error

Square

brackets

output

Fatal

The

mnemonic

the

([

])

this

error

section

message

signify

variables

and

terminal.

are

not

Errors

fatal
the
wuser
order.

errors

BDF

[symbol]

BOI

BAD

OCTAL

illegal

in
terminal

the

and

following

list
listings.

UNDEFINED

are each
They are

MULTIPLY

preceded

listed

by
?FDT
on
alphabetical

DEFINED

OUTPUT

character

was

detected

octal

input

value.

FORDDT

CCN

CANNOT

CONTINUE

Pause has been placed
on
causing
FORDDT
to
1loop;
FORTRAN-10
CFO

CORE

FILE

compiled

programs.

OVERFLOW

The storage area for
CNU

[name]

COMMAND

THE

some
form
of
skip
instruction
should
never be encountered in

GROUP text has been exhausted.

NOT

UNIQUE

More letters of the command are required to

CSH

CANNOT

START

DIMENSION

TABLE

is not

FORMAT

acceptable

FORTRAN-10

OVERFLOW

FORDDT does not have the space
to
dimensions until some are removed.
FCX

HERE

The specified entry point
main program entry point.
DTO

distinguish

commands.

other

the

from

CAPACITY

record

any

array

EXCEEDED

An attempt was made to specify a FORMAT statement
requiring
more space than was originally allocated by FORTRAN-10.
FNI

FORMAL

INITIALIZED

NOT

Reference to a FORMAL parameter
never
FNR

was

IS A FORMAL AND MAY NOT BE RE-DEFINED

[array name]

FORMAL parameters may
IAF

of some subprogram that

executed.

ILLEGAL ARGUMENT

not

DIMENSIONed.

FORMAT

The parameters to
the
given
command
were
not
specified
Refer to the documentation for correct format.
properly.
IAT

ILLEGAL ARGUMENT TYPE

unrecognized
SPR if

Submit an
ICC

COMPARE

IER

subprogram

argument

type

was

involves

report via an

SPR.

detected.

NOT ALLOWED
two

constants.

(number)

Internal
IGN

test

[number]

this message occurs.

TWO CONSTANTS

Conditional

INVALID

FORDDT error
GROUP

- please

NUMBER

Group numbers must be integral and in the range 1 through 8.
INV

INVALID

VALUE

A syntax error was detected

E-18

in the numeric parameter.

FORDDT

ITM

ILLEGAL

The
LGU

TYPE

mode

[array

MODIFIER

name]

only

[label]

LOWER

MLD

[array

name]

NOT

valid

for

statements.

SUBSCRIPT.GE.UPPER

The lower bound of
equal to the upper
LNF

any given
bound.

FORMAT

dimension

must

less

MULTI-LEVEL

ARRAY

DEFINITION

NOT

ALLOWED

same array cannot be dimensioned more than
[dimensions] construct)
in a single command.

SUBSCRIPTS

The array
specified
NAL

NAR

NOT

1s
in

attempt

defined
to
have
more
the given reference.

dimensions

has

been

AFTER

The

given

command

made

modify

something

restored
NOT

via

is
a

not

allowed

CONTINUE

until
NEXT

CANNOT FIND FORTRAN START ADDRESS FOR
Main

program

Names

must

symbols
NOT

than

data

program

integrity

has

are

not

FORTRAN

[program name]

loaded.

VARIABLE

6-character

alphanumeric

strings

beginning

letter.

NGF

CANNOT

GOTO

NPH

CANNOT

INSERT

attempt

executable

PAR

other

LOADED

[symbol]

with

NUD

were

command.

NFS

[symbol]

set

than

RE-ENTER

DDT

the

FORMAT.

NDT

NSP

(via

NEEDED

NOT

once

ALLOWED

been

NFV

STATEMENT

The

MSN

than

has

been

SUCH
has

STATEMENT

PAUSE

statement

attempt

FORMAT

HERE

made
or

place

subprogram

pause
entry

other

than

point.

PAUSE

been

made

REMOVE

USER

DEFINED

ARRAY

been

made

remove

pause

that

was

never

up.

[symbol]

NOT

attempt

array

has

that

PARENTHESES

Parentheses
statements

was

never

REQUIRED

are
and

dimension

information

for

defined.

(..)

required
complex

for

the

constants.

specification

FORMAT

FORDDT

PRO

REQUESTS

PAUSE

TOO MANY

The

The PAUSE table has been exhausted.

1limit

maximum

1is

10.
SER

ERROR

SUBSCRIPT

The subscript specified is outside the range of its

defined

dimensions.
STL

[array name]

SIZE

TOO LARGE

An attempt has been made to

define

array

larger

than

256K.
TMS

TOO

MANY

SUBSCRIPTS

The array is defined
to
have
fewer
dimensions
specified in the given element reference.

URC
Warning

than

are

COMMAND

UNRECOGNIZED

Messages

Each warning message in this list is preceded by %FTN on your terminal
They are given here in alphabetical order.
and on listings.
ABX

COMPILED ARRAY BOUNDS EXCEEDED

[array name]

FORDDT has detected another symbol defined in the
specified
range
of
the
array.
Note that this will occur in certain
EQUIVALENCE cases and can be ignored at that time.
CHI

CHARACTERS

IGNORED:

" [text]"

The portion of the command string
included
thought to be extraneous and was ignored.
NAR

[symbol]

NSL

SYMBOLS

NOT

was

LOADED

FORDDT cannot
NST

"text"

ARRAY

NOT

1in

find

the

symbol

table.

STARTED

The specified command requires that a
START
be
previously
issued to ensure that the program is properly initialized.
POV

PROGRAM

The

OVERLAYED

symbol

table

different

from

the

last

1is

being

time

FORDDT

had

superseded

for

control.
SFA

SUPERSEDES

The
the

F10

ARRAY

FORTRAN-10 generated
array.

dimension

given

SPO

VARIABLE

SINGLE-PRECISION

XPA

ATTEMPT TO EXCEED

An attempt has

PROGRAM AREA WITH

been

currently defined

ONLY

made

program

to
space.

E-20

[symbol

access

name]

memory

outside

the

APPENDIX

CCMPILER

FORTRAN-10

warning.
continue,
The

responds

If
but

format

?FTNXXX

with

two

MESSAGES

levels

messages

warning
message
1is
received,
fatal error will stop the program

messages

fatal

error

and

the compilation will
from being compiled.

1is:

LINE:n

text

LINE:n

text

FFTNXXX

where

fatal

warning

FTN

FORTRAN

XXX
LINE:n
text

=
=
=

3-letter mnemonic for the error message
line number where error occurred
explanation of error

Square

brackets

output

Fatal

the

([

mnemonic

])

this

appendix

signify

variables

and

are

not

terminal.

Errors

Each

fatal error in the following list is preceded by ?FTN on the user
terminal
and
on
1listings.
They are presented here in alphabetical
order.

ABD

[symbolname]

The

ATL

AWN

BOV

usage

HAS

given
For

statement

cannot

[name]

example,

TOCO

total

amount

greater

than

512P.

array

was

the

given

reference.

TOO

determine

core

[name]

The

STATEMENT

with
a

[definition]

current

symbol
as

information

defined
a

defined

LARGE

necessary

HAS

statement

portion

subprogram

WRONG

have

about

the

EQUIVALENCE

name.

accommodate

NUMBER

the

this

array

SUBSCRIPTS

fewer

dimensions

than

CLASSIFY

type,

some

portion

must
be examined by the compiler before
syntactic analysis begins.
During this

entire

LARGE

REFERENCE

DEFINED

referenced

The

ARRAY

BEEN

conflicts

symbol.

ARRAY

ALREADY

required

F-1

the

statement

actual semantic
<classification

statement must

fit

into

and
the

the

COMPILER

MESSAGES

internal statement buffer (large enough for a normal 20-line
statement).
This
error message 1s issued when the portion
of a given statement
required
for
<classification
1is
too
large
to fit in the buffer.
Once FORTRAN-10 has classified

a
CER

CFF

statement,

COMPILER

CPE

ERROR

Submit

CANNOT

FIND

The

there

file

explicit

ROUTINE

SPR for

restriction on

its

length.

[name]

any occurrence

this message.

FILE

referenced

CHECKSUM OR PARITY

INCLUDE

ERROR

1IN

statment

was

not

found.

[source/listing/object]

FILE

[name]
CQL

CLOSING

QUOTE

LITERAL

ILLEGAL STATEMENT FUNCTION REFERENCE
[symbolname]

VARIABLE
OR
DFD

DIA

DUPLICATE

DIMENSION

DUMMY ARGUMENT

[name]

MUST

SCALAR,

DEFINED AS

FORMAL

COMMON

DOUBLE

[type]

NAME

ILLEGAL

Duplicate
fields
specification.

were

encountered

[name]

INDEX

VARIABLE

In any nest
defined for
DID

CANNOT

DLN

CPTIONAL

DATA

The

extended

DUMMY

VALUE

LIST

FORTRAN

defined

IMPLIED

ALREADY

of DO loops, a given
more than one loop.

INITIALIZE

supported
DNL

IN CALL STATEMENT

1in

INCLUDE

file

variable may

not

DATA

form

that

specification

allows

data

statements

wvalues

1is

SPECIFICATION

WITHOUT

DPR

DUMMY

PARAMETER

DSF

ARGUMENT

[name]

DTI

THE

DVE

CANNOT

DWL

[source/listing/object]

ECT

ATTEMPT

EDN

EXPRESSION

EID

ENTRY

STATEMENT

ILLEGAL

INSIDE

EIM

ENTRY

STATEMENT

ILLEGAL

[name]

DIMENSIONS

not

FORTRAN-10.

ASSOCIATED

LIST

VARIABLES

USE

SUPPORTED

statement

type

ACTIVE

index

PARAMETER

NOT

1in

DUMMY

ENTER

TOO

REFERENCED

SAME

FUNCTION

[arrayname]
VARIABLE

MUST

DEVICE

NESTED

F-2

DEFINITION

NAME

THE

TYPE

INTEGER

EQUIVALENCE

[symbolname]

DEEPLY

BEFORE

[[device]]
INTO

MAIN

COMMON

COMPILE
A

LOOP

PROGRAM

WRITE
TWICE

LOCKED

COMPILER MESSAGES
ENF

LABEL

[number]

MUST

REFER

EXECUTABLE

STATEMENT,

FORMAT

ETF

ENTER

EXB

EQUIVALENCE

FEE

FOUND

FAILURE

FNE

LABEL

EXTENDS

syntax

[number]

COMMON

BLOCK

WHEN

EXPECTING

error

message.

MUST

REFER

WHEN

EXPECTING

[name]

EITHER

BACKWARD

[symbol]

FORMAT,

NOT

FOUND

HDE

HARDWARE

[symbol]

DEVICE

ERROR

STATEMENT
FWE

[symbol]

EXECUTABLE

[symbol]
[source/listing/object]

DEVICE

[ [device]]
IAC

ILLEGAL

IAL

INCORRECT

IBK

ILLEGAL

STATEMENT

ICL

ILLEGAL

CHARACTER

[character]

IDN

[number]

ILLEGALLY

ASCII

LOOP

You

are

one

CHARACTER

ARGUMENT

LINE:

attemping
more

TYPE

IDT

ILLEGAL

MISSPELLED

IDV

IMPLIED

INDEX

IED

INCONSISTENT

INDICES

MAY

given

EQUIVALENCE

refer

IIP

ILLEGAL

IIS

INCORRECT

ILF

ILLEGAL

Refer

FILES

IMPLIED

IMPLICIT

INCLUDE

Section

FIELD

NESTED

loop

before

the

given

one.

terminating

TYPE
VARIABLE

DECLARATION

than

RESIDE
DO

[name]

SUBSCRIPTED

one

would

physical

cause

some

symbolic

location.

DISK

INDEX

SPECIFICATION

PARAMETER

SWITCH

STATEMENT

LABEL

declaration

MUST

SOURCE

SUBPROGRAM

after

DATA

EQUIVALENCE

name

NON-INTEGER

FUNCTION

LIBRARY

NOT

The

IID

FOR

terminate

IMPLICIT

INCLUDED

defined

IDS

IFD

[character]

BLOCKDATA

loops

[filename]

[symbol]

General

NOT

AFTER

9.3.2

LOGICAL

for

restrictions

logical

object

statements.

INN

INCLUDE

STATEMENTS

MAY

NOT

I0D

ILLEGAL

STATEMENT

USED

ISD

ILLEGAL

SUBSCRIPT

EXPRESSION

Subscript

indices

expressions
and constants

NESTED

OBJECT
IN

OF
DATA

may be formed
combined with

F-3

DO
STATEMENT

only
+, -,

with
*, or

implicit
/.

COMPILER MESSAGES

ISN

[symbolname]
The

the

used

cannot

symbol

[symboltype]

IS NOT

attempted manner.

IUT

PROGRAM UNITS MAY NOT BE TERMINATED WITHIN

IVP

INVALID

IXM

ILLEGAL MIXED MODE ARITHMETIC

INCLUDED FILES

PPN

Complex and

double-precision

cannot

appear

1in

the

same

expression.

ILLEGAL

[datatype]

Refer

Section

LAD

LABEL

[number]

LED

ILLEGAL LIST DIRECTED

LFA

LABEL ARGUMENTS

LGB

LOWER BOUND GREATER THAN UPPER BOUND FOR ARRAY

LLS

LABEL

IZM

TOO

Labels

6.3.

LTL

TOO MANY

In rare

[statement

ILLEGAL

cannot be

LIST DIRECTED

TOO

0 or

greater

THAN

MSP

STATEMENT

MWL

ATTEMPT TO

[name]

5 digits.

I/O LIST
REDUCE NUMBER OF

the

syntax

COMMON VARIABLE

NAME

than

ITEMS

a combination of long lists

statement can exhaust
MORE

typel

SMALL

LIST

instances,

[number]

IN FUNCTION OR ARRAY REFERENCE

I/0 WITH NO

ITEMS

MCE

[number]

ALREADY DEFINED AT LINE:

LARGE

LNI

SIZE MODIFIER

stack.

EQUIVALENCE

single

GROUP

MISSPELLED

DEFINE

MULTIPLE

RETURN

WITHOUT

FORMAL

LABEL

ARGUMENTS

NCF

NOT ENOUGH CORE

FOR FILE SPECS.

NEX

EXPONENT

AFTER

NFS

FILENAME

SPECIFIED

The

INCLUDE

statement

NIO

NAMELIST DIRECTED

NGS

CANNOT

Refer

GET

to Appendix

COUNT

reqguires

[name]

[number]

CONSTANT

I/0 WITH

SEGMENT

description

TOTAL K NEEDED=

the

filename.

I/0 LIST
-

ERROR CODE:

Monitor

Calls

[number
]

Manual

for

codes.

NIR

REPEAT

MUST

NIU

NON-INTEGER

NLF

WRONG NUMBER OF ARGUMENTS

UNIT

UNSIGNED

I/O

STATEMENT

INTEGER

FOR LIBRARY

FUNCTION

[name]

full

COMPILER

NNF

STATEMENT

NRC

STATEMENT

NOT

NUO

.NOT.

NWD

INCORRECT

OPW

CPEN

PD6

FORTRAN

PIC

THE

PRF

PROTECTION

PTL

PROGRAM

The

NUMBER

USE

PARAMETER

FOKMAT

RECOGNIZED

UNARY

WILL

MESSAGES

OPERATOR

[name]

NOT

RUN

PARAMETERS

TOO

LARGE

program

takes

QEF

QUOTA

EXCEEDED

QEX

BLOCK

TOO

[filename]

WRONG

name]

DISK

than

FULL

LARGE

QUOTA

KIB

[filename]

RFC

[function

RIC

COMFLEX

SAD

ERROR
IS

CONSTANT

IMAGINARY

PART

ARRAY

[name]

RANGE

LIMITS

SNL

[statement

SOR

SUBSCRIPT

TFL

TOO

TOF

MANY

FORMAT

THAN

USED

COMPLEX

USER

UMP

UNMATCHED

USI

[symbol

The

CORE

CALL

REPRESENT

THE

DIMENSIONS

MAY

NOT

APPEAR

ONLY

REAL

CONSTANT

LABELED

RANGE
LABELS

SPECIFIED

FILES

ARE

NOT

ALLOWED

binary

file

EXCEEDED
PARENTHESES

[symbol

symbol

FOR

CONSTANT

STATEMENTS

OUTPUT

type]

given

EXCEEDED

FUNCTION

Only
a
1listing
and
a
relocatable
specified as output files.
UCE

CONSTANTS

[name]

RECURSIVE

SIGNED

name]
OUT

CANNOT

INTEGER

[filename]

RDE

name]

512P

FILE